2.95 MB, pdf, ENGLISH
2015.01.213.27 MB, pdf, ARABIC
2015.01.213.6 MB, pdf, PERSIAN
2015.01.213.19 MB, pdf, FRENCH(M.E.Asia)
2015.01.21VOIR EGALEMENT :
www.samsung.com User Manual SM-G360H/DS SM-G360H SM-G360HU/DS English. 01/2015. Rev.1.1 2 Table of Contents Read me first Getting started 6 Package contents 7 Device layout 9 Using the SIM or USIM card and battery 16 Using a memory card 18 Turning the device on and off 18 Locking and unlocking the screen Basics 19 Using the touch screen 22 Home screen layout 26 Notifications panel 27 Opening apps 28 Installing or uninstalling apps 30 Entering text 32 Screen capture 32 My Files 33 Power saving feature 33 Viewing help information Network connectivity 34 Mobile data 34 Wi-Fi 35 Tethering and Mobile hotspot Personalising 37 Managing the Home and Apps screens 39 Setting wallpaper and ringtones 40 Changing the screen lock method 40 Transferring data from your previous device 42 Setting up accounts Phone 43 Making calls 45 Receiving calls 45 Options during calls Contacts 47 Adding contacts 47 Importing and exporting contacts 48 Searching for contacts Table of Contents 3 Device & data manager 74 Upgrading the device 75 Transferring files between the device and a computer 76 Backing up and restoring data 77 Performing a data reset Settings 78 About Settings 78 CONNECTIONS 82 DEVICE 86 PERSONAL 88 SYSTEM Troubleshooting Messages & email 49 Messages 51 Email Camera 53 Basic shooting 54 Shooting modes 56 Camera settings Gallery 58 Viewing content on the device Useful apps and features 59 S Planner 60 Internet 61 Video 62 Clock 63 Calculator 64 Memo 64 Radio 66 Voice Recorder 67 Google apps Connecting with other devices 69 Bluetooth 71 Wi-Fi Direct 73 Mobile printing 4 Read me first Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use. • Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings. • Some content may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, or device’s software. • Content (high quality content) that requires high CPU and RAM usage will affect the overall performance of the device. Apps related to the content may not work properly depending on the device’s specifications and the environment that it is used in. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by apps supplied by providers other than Samsung. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause the device or apps to work improperly. • Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal use of media. • You may incur additional charges for data services, such as messaging, uploading and downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services depending on your data plan. For large data transfers, it is recommended to use the Wi-Fi feature. • Default apps that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer be supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an app provided with the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed apps, contact service providers. • Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty. • Supported features may differ or be labelled differently depending on whether your device is a single or dual SIM model. Read me first 5 Instructional icons Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information 6 Getting started Package contents Check the product box for the following items: • Device • Battery • Quick start guide • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider. • The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. • You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make sure they are compatible with the device before purchase. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Using unapproved accessories may cause the performance problems and malfunctions that are not covered by the warranty. • Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer to the Samsung website. Getting started 7 Device layout Microphone Touch screen Front camera Proximity sensor Multipurpose jack Home button Recent apps button Power button Earpiece Back button Volume button Speaker Headset jack GPS antenna Back cover Main antenna Rear camera Flash Getting started 8 • Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. • Using a Samsung-approved screen protector is recommended. Unapproved screen protectors may cause the sensors to malfunction. • Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. Buttons Button Function Power • Press and hold to turn the device on or off. • Press to turn on or lock the screen. Recent apps • Tap to open the list of recent apps. • Tap and hold to access additional options for the current screen. Home • Press to turn on the screen while the screen is locked. • Press to return to the Home screen. • Press and hold to launch Google. Back • Tap to return to the previous screen. Volume • Press to adjust the device volume. Getting started 9 Using the SIM or USIM card and battery Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery Insert the SIM or USIM card provided by the mobile telephone service provider, and the included battery. Only microSIM cards work with the device. 1 Remove the back cover. Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover. Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively. Doing so may damage the cover. Getting started 10 2 ► Dual SIM models: Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. Insert the primary SIM or USIM card into SIM card slot 1 ( 1 ) and the secondary SIM or USIM card into SIM card slot 2 ( 2 ). 2 1 ► Single SIM models: Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. • Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to remove the memory card. • Use caution not to lose or let others use the SIM or USIM card. Samsung is not responsible for any damages or inconveniences caused by lost or stolen cards. Getting started 11 3 Insert the battery with the battery’s gold-coloured contacts properly aligned with the device’s contacts. 2 1 4 Replace the back cover. • Ensure that the back cover is closed tightly. • Use only Samsung-approved back covers and accessories with the device. Getting started 12 Removing the SIM or USIM card and battery 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Pull out the battery. 3 ► Dual SIM models: Press the SIM or USIM card with your finger, and then pull it out. ► Single SIM models: Press the SIM or USIM card with your finger, and then pull it out. Getting started 13 Using dual SIM or USIM cards (dual SIM models) If you insert two SIM or USIM cards, you can have two phone numbers or service providers for a single device. Activating SIM or USIM cards On the Home screen, tap → Settings → SIM card manager. Drag one or both of the switches for the SIM or USIM cards to the right. If both cards are activated, you can receive calls and messages on each card. However, if you are on a call using one card, the other card cannot be used to receive new calls. Changing the display name and icon of SIM or USIM cards On the Home screen, tap → Settings → SIM card manager. Select a SIM or USIM card and tap Select icon or Register name. Set a display name and icon for each card. Switching between cards When two SIM or USIM cards are activated, card selection icons appear on the dashboard of the notifications panel. Open the notifications panel and then select a card. Getting started 14 Charging the battery Use the charger to charge the battery before using it for the first time. A computer can be also used to charge the battery by connecting them via the USB cable. Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device. • When the battery power is low, the battery icon appears empty. • If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few minutes before turning on the device. • If you use multiple apps at once, network apps, or apps that need a connection to another device, the battery will drain quickly. To avoid disconnecting from the network or losing power during a data transfer, always use these apps after fully charging the battery. Plug the small end of the charger into the multipurpose jack of the device, and plug the large end of the charger into an electric socket. Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty. Getting started 15 • The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. • If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device. • While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger may stop charging. • If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the device, and then unplug it from the electric socket. Do not remove the battery before removing the charger. This may damage the device. To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in use to avoid wasting power. The charger should remain close to the electric socket and easily accessible while charging. Reducing the battery consumption Your device provides options that help you save the battery power. By customising these options and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges: • When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button. • Close unnecessary apps using the task manager. • Deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • Deactivate auto-syncing of apps. • Decrease the backlight time. • Decrease the screen brightness. Getting started 16 Using a memory card Installing a memory card Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 64 GB. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. • Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up. • The device supports the FAT and the exFAT file systems for memory cards. When inserting a card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the memory card. • Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards. • When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory appears in the My Files → SD card folder. 1 Remove the back cover and battery. 2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. 3 Replace the battery and back cover. Getting started 17 Removing the memory card Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap → Settings → Storage → Unmount SD card. 1 Remove the back cover and battery. 2 Pull out the memory card. 3 Replace the battery and back cover. Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or can damage the memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data. Formatting the memory card A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the memory card on the device. On the Home screen, tap → Settings → Storage → Format SD card → Format SD card → Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions. Getting started 18 Turning the device on and off Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn on the device. When you turn on your device for the first time or after performing a data reset, follow the onscreen instructions to set up your device. To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off. Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. Locking and unlocking the screen Pressing the Power button turns off the screen and locks it. Also, the screen turns off and automatically locks if the device is not used for a specified period. To unlock the screen, press the Power button or the Home button and flick your finger in any direction within the unlock screen area. You can change the unlock code to unlock the screen. Refer to Changing the screen lock method for more information. 19 Basics Using the touch screen • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. • To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply excessive pressure to it with your fingertips. • The device may not recognise touch inputs close to the edges of the screen, which are outside of the touch input area. • Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages (screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the device. • It is recommended to use fingers when you use the touch screen. Tapping To open an app, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a character using the keyboard on the screen, tap it with a finger. Basics 20 Tapping and holding Tap and hold an item or the screen for more than 2 seconds to access available options. Dragging To move an item, tap and hold it and drag it to the target position. Double-tapping Double-tap on a webpage or image to zoom in. Double-tap again to return. Basics 21 Flicking Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Apps screen to see another panel. Flick up or down to scroll through a webpage or a list of items, such as contacts. Spreading and pinching Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out. Basics 22 Home screen layout Home screen The Home screen is the starting point for accessing all of the device’s features. It displays widgets, shortcuts to apps, and more. Widgets are small apps that launch specific app functions to provide information and convenient access on your Home screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right, or tap one of the screen indicators at the bottom of the screen. To customise the Home screen, refer to Managing the Home screen. A widget An app A folder A screen indicator Favourite apps Basics 23 Home screen options On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, or pinch your fingers together to access the available options. Basics 24 Apps screen The Apps screen displays icons for all apps, including newly installed apps. On the Home screen, tap to open the Apps screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right, or select a screen indicator at the bottom of the screen. To customise the Apps screen, refer to Managing the Apps screen. Access additional options. An app Screen indicators Basics 25 Indicator icons Indicator icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen. The icons listed in the table below are most common. The status bar may not appear at the top of the screen in some apps. To display the status bar, drag down from the top of the screen. Icon Meaning No signal / Signal strength / Currently accessing SIM or USIM card (dual SIM models) / Roaming (outside of normal service area) GPRS network connected EDGE network connected UMTS network connected HSDPA network connected HSPA+ network connected Wi-Fi connected Bluetooth feature activated GPS activated Call in progress Missed call Synced with the web Connected to computer No SIM or USIM card New text or multimedia message Alarm activated Mute mode activated Vibration mode activated Flight mode activated Error occurred or caution required Battery power level Basics 26 Notifications panel Using the notifications panel When you receive new notifications, such as messages or missed calls, indicator icons appear on the status bar. To see more information about the icons, open the notifications panel and view the details. To open the notifications panel, drag the status bar downwards. To close the notifications panel, drag the bar from the bottom of the screen upwards. You can use the following functions on the notifications panel. Launch Settings. Tap a notification and perform various actions. Clear all notifications. Adjust the brightness. Select a SIM or USIM card. (dual SIM models) Activate or deactivate options. Tap and hold a button to view more detailed settings. Basics 27 Using the quick setting buttons You can activate or deactivate some features on the notifications panel. Tap the following options to activate or deactivate them. You can view more detailed settings if you tap and hold a button. • Wi-Fi: Refer to Wi-Fi for more information. • Location: Refer to Location for more information. • Sound / Vibrate / Mute: Select a sound mode. • Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device. Some apps do not allow screen rotation. • Bluetooth: Refer to Bluetooth for more information. • Mobile data: Refer to Data usage or Mobile networks for more information. • U. power saving: Refer to Ultra power saving mode for more information. • Mobile hotspot: Refer to Tethering and Mobile hotspot for more information. • Sync: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of apps, such as calendar or email. • Flight mode: Refer to Flight mode for more information. Opening apps On the Home screen or the Apps screen, select an app icon to open it. To open the list of recently-used apps, tap and select an app icon to open. Closing an app Tap and drag an app icon to the left or right to close it. To close all running apps, tap . Basics 28 Installing or uninstalling apps Samsung GALAXY Apps Use this app to purchase and download apps. Tap GALAXY Apps on the Apps screen. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Installing apps Browse apps by category or tap to search for a keyword. Select an app to view information about it. To download free apps, tap Free. To purchase and download apps where charges apply, tap the button that shows the app’s price. To change the auto update settings, tap → Settings → Auto update apps, and then select an option. Play Store Use this app to purchase and download apps. Tap Play Store on the Apps screen. Installing apps Browse apps by category or tap to search for a keyword. Select an app to view information about it. To download free apps, tap INSTALL. To purchase and download apps where charges apply, tap the price and follow the on-screen instructions. To change the auto update settings, tap → SETTINGS → Auto-update apps, and then select an option. Basics 29 Managing apps Uninstalling or disabling apps To disable default apps, open the Apps screen and tap → Uninstall/disable apps. appears on the apps that you can disable. Select an app and tap OK. To uninstall downloaded apps, open the Apps screen and tap → Downloaded apps → → Uninstall. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Application manager, select an app, and then tap Uninstall. Enabling apps On the Apps screen, tap → Show disabled apps, select apps, and then tap Done. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Application manager, scroll to DISABLED, select an app, and then tap Enable. • Hiding apps: Hide apps in the Apps screen only. You can continue to use hidden apps. • Disabling apps: Disable selected default apps that cannot be uninstalled from the device. You cannot use disabled apps. • Uninstalling apps: Uninstall downloaded apps. Basics 30 Entering text Keyboard layout A keyboard appears automatically when you enter text to send messages, create memos, and more. Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the input language to one of the supported languages. Break to the next line. Delete a preceding character. Enter punctuation marks. Enter uppercase. For all caps, tap it twice. Change the keyboard settings. Enter a space. Changing the input language Tap → Select input languages, and then select the languages to use. If you select two or more languages, you can switch between the input languages by sliding the space key left or right. Changing the keyboard layout Tap , select a language under INPUT LANGUAGES, and then select a keyboard layout to use. On 3x4 keyboard, a key has three or four characters. To enter a character, tap the corresponding key repeatedly until the desired character appears. Basics 31 Using additional keyboard functions Tap and hold to use various functions. Other icons may appear instead of depending on the last function that was used. • : Change the keyboard settings. • : Enter emoticons. • : Enter text by voice. Change the language. Open the keyboard. Start or pause entering text by voice. Copying and pasting 1 Tap and hold over text. 2 Drag or to select the desired text, or tap Select all to select all text. 3 Tap Copy or Cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard. 4 Place the cursor where the text is to be inserted and tap → Paste. Basics 32 Screen capture Capture a screenshot while using the device. Press and hold the Home button and the Power button simultaneously. The image is saved in the Gallery → → Albums → Screenshots folder. After capturing a screenshot, you can edit the image and share it with others. It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some apps. My Files Use this app to access various files stored in the device or in other locations. Tap My Files on the Apps screen. Access additional options. Search for files or folders. View files by categories. View the download history. View files stored in the device. Basics 33 Power saving feature Ultra power saving mode Use this mode to extend the device’s battery power. In ultra power saving mode, the device performs the following: • Restricts the available apps to essential and selected apps only. • Deactivates the mobile data connection when the screen turns off. • Deactivates the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth features. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Ultra power saving mode, and tap the Ultra power saving mode switch to activate it. Alternatively, open the notifications panel and tap U. power saving to activate it. To add an app to the Home screen, tap and select an app. To remove an app from the Home screen, tap → Remove, select an app with , and then tap OK. To change the settings for ultra power saving mode, such as network connectivity or sound, tap → Settings. To deactivate ultra power saving mode, tap → Disable ultra power saving mode. The estimated maximum standby time shows the time remaining before the battery power runs out if the device is not used. Standby time may vary depending on your device settings and operating conditions. Viewing help information To view help information for an app while you are using the app, tap → Help. Some apps may not include help information. 34 Network connectivity Mobile data Connect the device to a mobile network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. Refer to Data usage for additional options. ► Dual SIM models: On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Data usage → a SIM or USIM card, and then tick Mobile data. Alternatively, open the notifications panel and tap Mobile data to activate it. ► Single SIM models: On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Data usage, and then tick Mobile data. Alternatively, open the notifications panel and tap Mobile data to activate it. Wi-Fi Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. Refer to Wi-Fi for additional options. Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. 2 Select a network from the Wi-Fi networks list. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon. 3 Tap Connect. Once the device connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will reconnect to that network each time it is available without requiring a password. To prevent the device connecting to the network automatically, select it from the list of networks and tap Forget. Network connectivity 35 Tethering and Mobile hotspot About tethering and mobile hotspots Use this feature to share the device’s mobile data connection with computers and other devices if an Internet connection is unavailable. Connections can be made via Wi-Fi, USB, or Bluetooth. You may incur additional charges when using this feature. Using the mobile hotspot Use your device as a mobile hotspot to share your device’s mobile data connection with other devices. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot, and then tick Mobile hotspot. • appears on the status bar. Other devices can find your device in the Wi-Fi networks list. • To set a password for the mobile hotspot, tap Configure Mobile hotspot and select the level of security. Then, enter a password and tap Save. 2 On the other device’s screen, search for and select your device from the Wi-Fi networks list. 3 On the connected device, use the device’s mobile data connection to access the Internet. Network connectivity 36 Using USB tethering Share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices via a USB cable. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot. 2 Connect your device to the computer via the USB cable. 3 Tick USB tethering. appears on the status bar when the two devices are connected. 4 On the computer, use your device’s mobile data connection. Using Bluetooth tethering Share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices via Bluetooth. Ensure that the computer that you connect to supports the Bluetooth feature. 1 Pair your device with the other device via Bluetooth. Refer to Pairing with other Bluetooth devices for more information. 2 On the Apps screen of your device, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot. 3 Tick Bluetooth tethering. 4 On the connected device, open the Bluetooth settings screen, tap → Internet access. appears on the status bar when the two devices are connected. 5 On the connected device, use the device’s mobile data connection to access the Internet. The connection methods may vary depending on the connected devices. 37 Personalising Managing the Home and Apps screens Managing the Home screen Adding items Tap and hold an app from the Apps screen, and then drag it to the Home screen. To add widgets, open the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, tap Widgets, tap and hold a widget, and then drag it to the Home screen. Moving and removing an item Tap and hold an item on the Home screen, and then drag it to a new location. To move the item to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. You can also move frequently-used apps to the shortcuts area at the bottom of the Home screen. To remove an item, tap and hold the item. Then, drag it to Remove that appears at the top of the screen. Creating a folder 1 On the Home screen, tap and hold an app, and then drag it to Create folder that appears at the top of the screen. 2 Enter a folder name. 3 Tap , select the apps to move to the folder, and then tap Done. Personalising 38 Managing panels On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area to add, move, or remove a panel. To add a panel, scroll left to the last panel, and then tap . To move a panel, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. To remove a panel, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to Remove at the top of the screen. To set a panel as the main Home screen, tap . Managing the Apps screen Changing the sorting method On the Apps screen, tap → View as and select a sorting method. Hiding apps Hide apps that you do not want to see on the Apps screen. On the Apps screen, tap → Hide apps, select apps, and then tap Done. To display hidden apps, tap → Show hidden apps, select apps, and then tap Done. Moving items On the Apps screen, tap → Edit. Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location. To move the item to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. To move an item to a new panel, drag it to Create page that appears at the top of the screen. You can move folders only in the folder panel. Personalising 39 Setting wallpaper and ringtones Setting wallpaper Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Home screen or the locked screen. 1 On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, and then tap Wallpapers. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Display → Wallpaper. 2 Select a screen to change or apply wallpaper to. 3 Select an option and an image. 4 Tap Set wallpaper or Done. If you are using a dual SIM model, proceed to the next step. 5 Set the image as the wallpaper for one or both of the SIM or USIM cards. Changing ringtones Change ringtones for incoming calls and notifications. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Sound. ► Dual SIM models: To set a ringtone for incoming calls, tap Ringtones → a SIM or USIM card → Ringtones, select a ringtone, and then tap OK. To use a song stored in the device or in your account as a ringtone, tap Add. To set a ringtone for notifications, tap Ringtones → a SIM or USIM card → Notifications, select a ringtone, and then tap OK. ► Single SIM models: To set a ringtone for incoming calls, tap Ringtones → Ringtones, select a ringtone, and then tap OK. To use a song stored in the device or in your account as a ringtone, tap Add. To set a ringtone for notifications, tap Ringtones → Notifications, select a ringtone, and then tap OK. Personalising 40 Changing the screen lock method You can change the way that you lock the screen to prevent others from accessing your personal information. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock, and then select a screen lock method. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it. If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it. Pattern Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it. Set a backup PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern. PIN A PIN consists of numbers only. Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password again to verify it. Password A password consists of characters and numbers. Enter at least four characters including numbers and symbols, and then enter the password again to verify it. Transferring data from your previous device Using backup accounts You can transfer backup data from your previous device to your new device using your Google account. Refer to Backing up and restoring data for more information. Personalising 41 Using Samsung Smart Switch You can transfer data of the previous device to a new device via Smart Switch. Visit www.samsung.com/smartswitch for more information. Samsung Smart Switch is not supported on some devices or computers. Using Smart Switch Mobile Use this app to transfer data from your previous iPhone or Android device to your new device. You can download the app from GALAXY Apps or Play Store. 1 On your device, tap Smart Switch Mobile. 2 On your device, select an option depending on the previous device type and follow the on-screen instructions. If the previous device is an Android device, ensure that the Smart Switch Mobile app is installed on the device. Refer to the help for more information. Using Smart Switch with computers Use this feature to import a backup of your data (from selected manufacturer’s mobile devices) from a computer to your device. You can download the app from www.samsung.com/smartswitch. 1 Back up data from a previous device to the computer. For more information, contact the device’s manufacturer. 2 On the computer, launch Smart Switch. 3 Connect your current device to the computer using the USB cable. 4 On the computer, click the manufacturer of the previous device and follow the on-screen instructions to transfer data to your device. Personalising 42 Using Samsung Kies Import a backup of your data from your computer via Samsung Kies to restore data on your device. You can also back up data to the computer via Samsung Kies. Refer to Connecting with Samsung Kies for more information. Setting up accounts Adding accounts Some apps used on your device require a registered account. Create accounts to have the best experience with your device. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Add account and select an account service. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. To sync content with your accounts, select an account and tick items to sync. Removing accounts On the Apps screen, tap Settings, select an account name under PERSONAL, select the account to remove, and then tap → Remove account. 43 Phone Making calls Tap Phone on the Apps screen. ► Dual SIM models: Tap Keypad, enter a phone number, and then tap or to make a voice call, or tap to make a video call. Add the number to the contacts Access additional options. list. Preview the phone number. View favourite contacts. Delete a preceding character. View the contacts list. View call and message logs. Enter the number using the keypad. Phone 44 ► Single SIM models: Tap Keypad, enter a phone number, and then tap to make a voice call, or tap to make a video call. Add the number to the contacts Access additional options. list. Preview the phone number. View favourite contacts. Delete a preceding character. View the contacts list. View call and message logs. Enter the number using the keypad. You can also make calls to phone numbers listed in Logs, Favourites, and Contacts. Making calls from call logs or contacts list Tap Logs or Contacts, and then drag a contact or a phone number to the right to make a call. Making an international call Tap Keypad. ► Dual SIM models: Tap and hold 0 until the + sign appears. Enter the country code, area code, and phone number, and then tap or . To block outgoing international calls, tap → Settings → Call → Additional settings → a SIM or USIM card → Call barring. Then, select a call type and tick International calls. ► Single SIM models: Tap and hold 0 until the + sign appears. Enter the country code, area code, and phone number, and then tap . To block outgoing international calls, tap → Settings → Call → Additional settings → Call barring. Then, select a call type and tick International calls. Phone 45 Receiving calls Answering a call When a call comes in, drag outside the large circle. Rejecting a call When a call comes in, drag outside the large circle. To send a message when rejecting an incoming call, drag the reject message bar upwards. To create various rejection messages, open the Apps screen and tap Phone → → Settings → Call → Set up call reject messages → . Missed calls If a call is missed, appears on the status bar. Open the notifications panel to view the list of missed calls. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Phone → Logs to view missed calls. Options during calls During a voice call The following actions are available: • Add call: Dial a second call. • Keypad: Open the keypad. • End call: End the current call. • Speaker: Activate or deactivate the speakerphone. When using the speakerphone, speak into the microphone at the top of the device and keep the device away from your ears. • Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you. • Bluetooth: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device. Tap to view more options. Phone 46 During a video call The following actions are available: • → Hide me: Hide your image from the other party. • → Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party. • → Capture image: Capture the other party’s image. • → Record video: Record a video of the other party’s images. • → Memo: Create a memo. • → Messages: Send a message. • → Keypad: Open the keypad. • → Speaker off / Speaker on: Activate or deactivate the speakerphone. When using the speakerphone, speak into the microphone at the top of the device and keep the device away from your ears. • → Switch to headset / Switch to phone: Switch sound output to a connected Bluetooth headset or back to the device’s speaker. Tap the screen to use the following options: • Switch: Switch between the front and rear cameras. • Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you. • End call: End the current call. 47 Contacts Adding contacts Moving contacts from other devices You can move contacts from other devices to your device. Refer to Transferring data from your previous device for more information. Creating contacts manually 1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts. 2 Tap and enter contact information. • : Add an image. • / : Add or delete a contact field. 3 Tap Save. To add a phone number to the contacts list from the keypad, tap Keypad, enter the number, and then tap Add to contacts. Importing and exporting contacts Import contacts from storage services to your device or export contacts from the device to storage services. On the Apps screen, tap Contacts. Tap → Settings → Contacts → Import/export, and then select an import or export option. Contacts 48 Searching for contacts On the Apps screen, tap Contacts. Use one of the following search methods: • Scroll up or down the contacts list. • Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria. Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions: • : Add to favourite contacts. • / : Make a voice or video call. • : Compose a message. • : Compose an email. Adding shortcuts for contacts to the Home screen Add shortcuts to contacts that you frequently communicate with on the Home screen. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts. 2 Select a contact. 3 Tap → Add shortcut to home screen. 49 Messages & email Messages Sending messages Send text messages (SMS) or multimedia messages (MMS). You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages when you are roaming. 1 Tap Messages on the Apps screen. 2 Tap . 3 Add recipients and enter a message. ► Dual SIM models: Access additional options. Enter a message. Select contacts from the contacts list. Enter recipients. Attach files. Send the message. Messages & email 50 ► Single SIM models: Access additional options. Enter a message. Select contacts from the contacts list. Enter recipients. Send the message. Attach files. 4 ► Dual SIM models: Tap or to send the message. ► Single SIM models: Tap to send the message. Viewing incoming messages Incoming messages are grouped into message threads by contact. Select a contact to view the person’s messages. You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages when you are roaming. While viewing a message, tap to view more options. Messages & email 51 Email Setting up email accounts Tap Email on the Apps screen. Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time. Enter the email address and password. Tap Next for a private email account or tap Manual setup for a company email account. After that, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. To set up another email account, tap → Manage accounts → . If you have more than one email accounts, you can set one as the default account. Tap → Manage accounts, select an account, and then tick Default account. Sending emails Tap Email on the Apps screen. Tap at the bottom of the screen to compose a message. Add recipients. Add recipients from the contacts list. Enter a message. Enter a subject. Send the message. Add a CC or BCC. Access additional options. Attach images, videos and others. Save the message for later delivery. Discard the message. Messages & email 52 Reading emails Tap Email on the Apps screen. Tap , select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve new messages, tap . Tap a message to read. Reply to the message. Add this email address to the contacts list or view other options. Reply to all recipients. Forward the message. Go to the previous or next message. Delete the message. Open or download attachment. Access additional options. Mark the message as a reminder. 53 Camera Basic shooting Taking photos or recording videos 1 Tap Camera on the Apps screen. 2 Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus. 3 Tap to take a photo or tap to record a video. • Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out. Change the shooting mode. Start recording a video. Take a photo. View photos and videos you have captured. Display current mode. Switch between the front and rear cameras. Change camera settings. • The camera automatically shuts off when unused. • Make sure that the lens is clean. Otherwise, the device may not work properly in some modes that require high resolutions. Camera 54 Launching Camera on the locked screen To quickly take photos of special moments, launch Camera on the locked screen. On the locked screen, drag outside the large circle. If is not shown, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Lock screen, and then tick Camera shortcut. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Camera etiquette • Do not take photos or record videos of other people without their permission. • Do not take photos or record videos where legally prohibited. • Do not take photos or record videos in places where you may violate other people’s privacy. Shooting modes Auto Use this mode to allow the camera to evaluate the surroundings and determine the ideal mode for the photo. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Auto. Beauty face Use this mode to take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Beauty face. Camera 55 Panorama Use this mode to take a photo composed of many photos strung together. The device identifies the photo with in Gallery. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Panorama. To get the best shot, follow these tips: • Move the camera slowly in one direction. • Keep the image within the frame on the camera’s viewfinder. • Avoid taking photos of indistinct backgrounds, such as an empty sky or a plain wall. Best photo Use this mode to take a series of photos and save the best one. To view other photos in the series, scroll left or right. The device recommends the best photo and identifies it with . On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Best photo. Continuous shot Use this mode to take a series of photos of moving subjects. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Continuous shot. While holding the device steadily, press and hold the Shutter button to take several photos continuously. Night Use this mode to take a photo in low-light conditions, without using the flash. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Night. Camera 56 Sports Use this mode to take a photo of fast-moving subjects. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Sports. Camera settings On the Apps screen, tap Camera → . Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes. • Picture size: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. • Focus mode: Select a focus mode. Auto focus is camera-controlled. Macro is for very close objects. • ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects. • Metering modes: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are calculated. Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot measures the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene. • Tap to take pics: Tap the image on the preview screen to take photos. • Video size: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. • Recording mode: Change the recording mode. • Effects: Select a filter effect to use when taking photos or recording videos. • Flash: Activate or deactivate the flash. • Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. • Location tags: Set the device to attach the location tag to the photo. • To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather conditions. • When you share a photo with the location tag attached, the location information may be exposed to others. Camera 57 • Storage location: Select the memory location for storage. • White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras. • Exposure value: Change the exposure value. This determines how much light the camera’s sensor receives. For low-light situations, use a higher exposure. • Grid lines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects. • The volume key: Set the device to use the Volume button to control the shutter or zoom function. • Reset settings: Reset the camera settings. The available options vary depending on the mode used. 58 Gallery Viewing content on the device On the Apps screen, tap Gallery and select an image or a video. Video files show the icon on the preview thumbnail. To hide or show the menu bar and the preview thumbnails, tap the screen. Access additional options. Delete the image. Modify the image. Move to the previous screen. Send the image to others. Image and video preview thumbnails 59 Useful apps and features S Planner Creating events or tasks 1 Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. 2 Tap . Alternatively, select a date with no events or tasks in it and tap the date again. If the date already has saved events or tasks in it, tap the date and tap . 3 Select either event or task and enter details. • Add event: Set a start and end date for an event. You can set an optional repeat setting. • Add task: Add a task to do on a specific date. You can set an optional priority setting. Enter a title. Add more details. Select a calendar to use or sync with. Select an item. Set a start and end date for the event. 4 Tap Save to save the event or task. Useful apps and features 60 Syncing events and tasks with your accounts Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. To sync events and tasks with your accounts, tap → Sync. To add accounts to sync with, tap → Calendars → Add account. Then, select an account to sync with and sign in. When an account is added, a green circle is displayed next to the account name. To change an account’s syncing option, open the Apps screen, tap Settings, and then select an account service under PERSONAL. Internet 1 Tap Internet on the Apps screen. 2 Tap the address field. To change the search engine, tap the search engine icon next to the web address field. 3 Enter the web address or a keyword, and then tap Go. To search the web by voice, tap . To view the toolbars, drag your finger downwards slightly on the screen. Read an article in reading mode. Bookmark the current webpage. Open the homepage. Move to the previously-visited page. View your bookmarks and recent Internet history. Access additional options. Open the webpage window manager. Refresh the current webpage. Useful apps and features 61 Video Playing videos Tap Video on the Apps screen. Select a video to play. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Change screen ratio. Skip to the previous video. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Skip to the next video. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Access additional options. Pause and resume playback. Rotate the screen's orientation. Adjust the volume. Useful apps and features 62 Clock Alarm On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Alarm. Setting alarms Tap in the alarms list, set an alarm time, select the days on which the alarm will repeat, set other various alarm options, and then tap Save. To activate or deactivate alarms, tap next to the alarm in the alarms list. • Snooze: Set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat after the preset time. • Smart alarm: Set a time and tone for the smart alarm. A smart alarm starts at a low volume a few minutes before a preset alarm is scheduled to sound. The volume of the smart alarm increases gradually until you turn it off or the preset alarm sounds. Stopping alarms Drag outside the large circle to stop an alarm. If you have previously enabled the snooze option, drag outside the large circle to repeat the alarm after a specified length of time. Deleting alarms Tap → Select, select alarms, and then tap . World clock On the Apps screen, tap Clock → World clock. Creating clocks Tap and enter a city name or select a city from the cities list. Useful apps and features 63 Deleting clocks Tap → Select, select clocks, and then tap . Stopwatch On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Stopwatch. Tap Start to time an event. Tap Lap to record lap times. Tap Stop to stop timing. To clear lap times, tap Reset. Timer On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Timer. Set the duration, and then tap Start. Drag outside the large circle when the timer goes off. Calculator Use this app for simple or complex calculations. Tap Calculator on the Apps screen. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. If Screen rotation is disabled, tap → Scientific calculator. Useful apps and features 64 Memo Use this app to create memos and organise them by category. Tap Memo on the Apps screen. Composing memos Tap on the memos list and enter a memo. While composing a memo, use the following options: • : Create or set a category. • : Insert images. • : Make a voice recording to insert. To save the memo, tap Save. To edit a memo, tap a memo, and then tap the content of the memo. Searching for memos Tap on the memos list and enter a keyword to search for memos that include the keyword. Radio Listening to the FM radio Tap Radio on the Apps screen. Before you use this app, you must connect a headset, which serves as the radio antenna. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically when running for the first time. Useful apps and features 65 Tap to turn on the FM radio. Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap to return to the FM radio screen. View the list of favourite stations. Access additional options. Turn the FM radio on or off. Adjust the volume. Add the current radio station to the favourites list. Fine-tune the frequency. View the list of available stations. Record a song from the FM radio. Enter radio station frequency manually. Search for an available radio station. Scanning radio stations Tap Radio on the Apps screen. Tap → Scan, and then select a scan option. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically. Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap to return to the FM radio screen. Useful apps and features 66 Voice Recorder Recording voice memos Tap Voice Recorder on the Apps screen. Tap to start recording. Speak into the microphone. Tap to pause recording. To cancel recording, tap . Tap to finish recording. Display the list of voice memos. Access additional options. Start recording. Recording elapsed time Playing voice memos Tap Voice Recorder on the Apps screen. Tap and select a voice memo to play. • / : Pause or resume playback. • / : Skip to the previous or next voice memo. Useful apps and features 67 Google apps Google provides entertainment, social network, and business apps. You may require a Google account to access some apps. Refer to Setting up accounts for more information. To view more app information, open the each app’s main screen and tap → Help. Some apps may not be available or may be labelled differently depending on the region or service provider. Chrome Search for information and browse webpages. Gmail Send or receive emails via the Google Mail service. Google+ Share your news and follow updates that your family, friends, and others share. You can also back up your photos and videos, and more. Maps Find your location on the map, search for locations, and view location information for various places. Play Music Discover, listen to, and share music on your device. Play Movies & TV Watch videos stored on your device and download various content to watch from Play Store. Play Books Download various books from Play Store and read them. Useful apps and features 68 Play Newsstand Read news and magazines that interest you in one convenient location. Play Games Download games from Play Store and play them with others. Drive Store your content on the cloud, access it from anywhere, and share it with others. YouTube Watch or create videos and share them with others. Photos Manage photos, albums, and videos that you have saved on the device and uploaded to Google+. Hangouts Chat with your friends individually or in groups and use images, emoticons, and video calls while you are chatting. Google Search quickly for items on the Internet or your device. Voice Search Search quickly for items by saying a keyword or phrase. Google Settings Configure settings for some features provided by Google. 69 Connecting with other devices Bluetooth About Bluetooth Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices. • Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via Bluetooth. • Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. • Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. • Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes). Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth feature. Connecting with other devices 70 Pairing with other Bluetooth devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth, tap the Bluetooth switch to activate it, and then tap Scan. The detected devices are listed. To set the device as visible to other devices, tap the device name. 2 Select a device to pair with. If your device has paired with the device before, tap the device name without confirming the auto-generated passkey. If the device you want to pair with is not in the list, request that the device turns on its visibility option. 3 Accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on both devices to confirm. Sending and receiving data Many apps support data transfer via Bluetooth. You can share data, such as contacts or media files, with other Bluetooth devices. The following actions are an example of sending an image to another device. Sending an image 1 On the Apps screen, tap Gallery. 2 Select an image. 3 Tap → Bluetooth, and then select a device to transfer the image to. If the device you want to pair with is not in the list, request that the device turns on its visibility option. Or, set your device as visible to other devices. 4 Accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device. Connecting with other devices 71 Receiving an image When another device sends you an image, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request. The received image is saved in the Gallery → Download folder. Unpairing Bluetooth devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth. The device displays the paired devices in the list. 2 Tap next to the device’s name to unpair. 3 Tap Unpair. Wi-Fi Direct About Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct connects devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point. Connecting to other devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. 2 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct. The detected devices are listed. 3 Select a device to connect to. To connect to multiple devices, tap → Multi-connect. To change the device name, tap → Rename device. 4 Accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request on the other device to confirm. Connecting with other devices 72 Sending and receiving data You can share data, such as contacts or media files, with other devices. The following actions are an example of sending an image to another device. Sending an image 1 On the Apps screen, tap Gallery. 2 Select an image. 3 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct, and then select a device to transfer the image to. 4 Accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request on the other device. Receiving an image When another device sends you an image, accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request. The received image is saved in the Gallery → Download folder. Ending the device connection 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi. 2 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct. The device displays the connected devices on the list. 3 Tap End connection → OK to disconnect the devices. Connecting with other devices 73 Mobile printing Connect the device to a printer via Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct, and print images or documents. Some printers may not be compatible with the device. Adding printer plug-ins Add printer plug-ins for printers you want to connect the device to. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Printing → Add printer, and search for a printer plug-in in Play Store. Select a printer plug-in and install it. Connecting to a printer On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Printing, select a printer plug-in, and then tap the switch at the top right of the screen to activate it. The device searches for printers that are connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your device. Select a printer to use as the default printer. To add printers manually, select a printer plug-in, tap → Add printer → , enter details, and then tap OK. To change print settings, select a printer plug-in and tap → Printing settings. Printing content While viewing content, such as images or documents, tap → Print, and then select a printer. 74 Device & data manager Upgrading the device The device can be upgraded to the latest software. Upgrading over the air The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air (FOTA) service. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → About device → Software update → Update. Upgrading with Samsung Kies Download the latest version of Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. Launch Samsung Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically recognises the device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update button in the dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information about how to upgrade. • Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is upgrading. • While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer. Doing so may interfere with the update process. Device & data manager 75 Transferring files between the device and a computer Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice versa. Do not disconnect the USB cable from the device when you are transferring files. Doing so may cause data loss or device damage. • Do not disconnect the device from the computer when you play files saved in the device on the connected computer. After you finish playing the file, disconnect the device from the computer. • The devices may not connect properly if they are connected via a USB hub. Directly connect the device to the computer’s USB port. Connecting as a media device 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device → Media device (MTP). Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or not have any appropriate driver installed. 3 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Device & data manager 76 Connecting with Samsung Kies Samsung Kies is a computer app that manages media contents and personal information with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch, double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer. 2 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. Backing up and restoring data Keep your personal information, app data, and settings safe on your device. You can back up your sensitive information to a backup account and access it later. 1 Tap Settings on the Apps screen. 2 Tap Backup and reset and tick Back up my data. 3 Tap Backup account and select an account as the backup account. To restore data, you must sign in to your Google account via the setup wizard. You can launch and open the setup wizard by performing a factory data reset on the device. If you do not sign in to your Google account via the setup wizard, you cannot restore the backup data. Device & data manager 77 Performing a data reset Delete all settings and data on the device. Before performing a factory data reset, ensure you back up all important data stored on the device. Refer to Backing up and restoring data for more information. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything. The device automatically restarts. 78 Settings About Settings Use this app to configure the device, set app options, and add accounts. Tap Settings on the Apps screen. Supported features may differ or be labelled differently depending on whether your device is a single or dual SIM model. CONNECTIONS Wi-Fi Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other network devices. On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. To use options, tap . • Scan: Search for available networks. • Wi-Fi Direct: Activate Wi-Fi Direct and connect devices directly via Wi-Fi to share files. • Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings. • WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button. • WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN. Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy Tap → Advanced → Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep. When the screen is turned off, the device automatically turns off Wi-Fi connections. When this happens, the device automatically accesses mobile networks if it is set to use them. This may incur data transfer fees. To avoid additional charges, set this option to Always. Settings 79 Bluetooth Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances. On the Settings screen, tap Bluetooth, and then tap the Bluetooth switch to activate it. To use more options, tap . • Visibility timeout: Set duration that the device is visible. • Received files: View received files via Bluetooth. Tethering and Mobile hotspot Use the device as a mobile hotspot to share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices. Refer to Tethering and Mobile hotspot for more information. On the Settings screen, tap Tethering and Mobile hotspot. • Mobile hotspot: Use the mobile hotspot to share the device’s mobile data connection with computers or other devices through the Wi-Fi network. You can use this feature when the network connection is not available. • Configure Mobile hotspot: Configure settings for mobile hotspot such as a password, network SSID, and more. • USB tethering: Use USB tethering to share the device’s mobile data connection with a computer via USB. When connected to a computer, the device is used as a wireless modem for the computer. • Bluetooth tethering: Use Bluetooth tethering to share the device’s mobile data connection with computers or other devices via Bluetooth. Flight mode This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services. On the Settings screen, tap Flight mode. Settings 80 Data usage Keep track of your data usage amount and customise the settings for the limitation. On the Settings screen, tap Data usage. • Mobile data: Set the device to use data connections on any mobile network. • Set mobile data limit: Set a limit for mobile data usage. • Data usage cycle: Set a monthly reset date to monitor data usage between periods. To use more options, tap . • Data roaming: Set the device to use data connections when you are roaming. • Restrict background data: Set the device to disable sync in the background while using a mobile network. • Auto sync data: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of apps, such as calendar or email. You can select what information to sync for each account in Settings → PERSONAL. • Show Wi-Fi usage: Set the device to show your data usage via Wi-Fi. • Mobile hotspots: Select mobile hotspots to prevent apps that are running in the background from using them. SIM card manager (dual SIM models) Activate your SIM or USIM cards and customise the SIM card settings. On the Settings screen, tap SIM card manager. • Voice call: Select a SIM or USIM card for voice calls. • Video call: Select a SIM or USIM card for video calls. • Data service network: Select a SIM or USIM card for data service. • Dual SIM always on: Set the device to allow incoming calls from the other SIM or USIM card during a call. When this feature is enabled, you may incur additional charges for call forwarding depending on the region or service provider. Settings 81 Location Change settings for location information permissions. On the Settings screen, tap Location, and then tap the Location switch to activate it. • Mode: Select a method to collect your location data. • RECENT LOCATION REQUESTS: View which apps request your current location information and their battery usage. • LOCATION SERVICES: View the location services your device is using. Printing Configure settings for printer plug-ins installed on the device. You can search for available printers or add one manually to print files. On the Settings screen, tap Printing. More networks Customise settings to control networks. On the Settings screen, tap More networks. Default messaging app Select the default app to use for messaging. VPN Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs). Settings 82 Mobile networks • Mobile data: Set the device to use data connections on any mobile network. • Data roaming: Set the device to use data connections when you are roaming. • Access Point Names: Set up access point names (APNs). • Network mode SIM 1 / Network mode SIM 2 (dual SIM models): Select a network type. Network mode (single SIM models): Select a network type. • Network operators: Search for available networks and manually register a network. DEVICE Sound Change settings for various sounds on the device. On the Settings screen, tap Sound. • Volume: Adjust the volume level for call ringtones, music and videos, system sounds, and notifications. • Ringtones (dual SIM models): – Ringtones: Add or select a ringtone for incoming calls. – Notifications: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages and missed calls. • Ringtones (single SIM models): Add or select a ringtone for incoming calls. • Vibrate when ringing: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls. • Dialling keypad tone: Set the device to sound when you tap the buttons on the keypad. • Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when you select an app or option on the touch screen. • Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when you lock or unlock the touch screen. Settings 83 Display Change the display settings. On the Settings screen, tap Display. • Wallpaper: – Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen. – Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen. – Home and lock screens: Select a background image for the Home screen and the locked screen. • Notification panel: Customise the items that appear on the notifications panel. – Brightness adjustment: Set the device to display the brightness adjustment bar on the notifications panel. – Set the quick setting buttons: Rearrange the quick setting buttons displayed on the notifications panel. • Brightness: Set the brightness of the display. • Auto rotate screen: Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Daydream: Set the device to launch a screensaver when the device is charging or connected to a desktop dock. • Font style: Change the font type for display text. • Font size: Change the font size. Settings 84 Lock screen Change settings for the locked screen. On the Settings screen, tap Lock screen. • Screen lock: Change the screen lock method. The following options may vary depending on the screen lock feature selected. • Dual clock: Set the device to show the dual clock. • Show date: Set the device to show the date with the clock. • Camera shortcut: Set the device to show the camera shortcut on the locked screen. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Owner information: Enter your information that is shown with the clock. • Unlock effect: Select an effect that you see when you unlock the screen. • Help text: Set the device to show the help text on the locked screen. Call Customise the settings for calling features. On the Settings screen, tap Call. • Set up call reject messages: Add or edit the message sent when you reject a call. • Answering/ending calls: – Pressing the home key: Set the device to answer a call when you press the Home button. – Pressing the power key: Set the device to end a call when pressing the Power button. Settings 85 • Additional settings: – Caller ID: Display your caller ID to other parties for outgoing calls. – Call forwarding: Divert incoming calls to another number. – Auto area code: Set the device to automatically insert a prefix (area or country code) before a phone number. – Call barring: Block incoming or outgoing calls. – Call waiting: Allow incoming call alerts when a call is in progress. – Fixed Dialling Numbers: Activate or deactivate FDN mode to restrict calls to numbers in the FDN list. Enter the PIN2 supplied with your SIM or USIM card. • Ringtones and keypad tones: – Ringtones: Add or select a ringtone for incoming calls. – Vibrate when ringing: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls. – Dialling keypad tone: Set the device to sound when buttons on the keypad are tapped. • Hide my video: Select an image to be shown to the other party. • Voicemail (dual SIM models): – Voicemail service: Select or set your voicemail service provider. – Voicemail settings: Enter the number to access the voicemail service. Obtain this number from the service provider. • Voicemail service (single SIM models): Select or set your voicemail service provider. • Voicemail settings (single SIM models): Enter the number to access the voicemail service. Obtain this number from the service provider. Application manager View and manage the apps on your device. On the Settings screen, tap Application manager. Settings 86 PERSONAL Add account Add email or SNS accounts. On the Settings screen, tap Add account. Backup and reset Change the settings for managing settings and data. On the Settings screen, tap Backup and reset. • Back up my data: Set the device to back up settings and app data to the Google server. • Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account. • Automatic restore: Set the device to restore settings and app data when the apps are reinstalled on the device. • Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data. Accessibility Use this feature to improve accessibility to the device. On the Settings screen, tap Accessibility. • Direct access: Set the device to open selected accessibility menus when you press the Home button three times quickly. • Answering/ending calls: – Pressing the home key: Set the device to answer a call when you press the Home button. – Pressing the power key: Set the device to end a call when pressing the Power button. • Single tap mode: Set the device to control incoming calls or notifications by tapping the button instead of dragging it. • SERVICES: View accessibility services installed on the device. Settings 87 • TalkBack: Activate TalkBack, which provides voice feedback. To view help information to learn how to use this feature, tap Settings → Launch “Explore by touch” tutorial. • Speak passwords: Set the device to read the password aloud when you enter the password while TalkBack is activated. • Font size: Change the font size. • Negative colours: Reverse the display colours to improve visibility. • Magnification gestures: Set the device to magnify the screen and to zoom in on a specific area. • Accessibility shortcut: Set the device to activate TalkBack when you press and hold the Power button, and then tap and hold the screen with two fingers. • Text-to-speech options: – PREFERRED TTS ENGINE: Select an engine for the text-to-speech feature. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . – Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. – Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. – Default language status: View the status of the current language set for the text-to speech feature. • Flash notification: Set the flash to blink when you have incoming calls, new messages, or notifications. • Turn off all sounds: Set the device to mute all device sounds, such as media sounds, and the caller’s voice during a call. • Google subtitles (CC): Set the device to display closed captions on content supported by Google and to change the closed caption settings. • Mono audio: Set the device to switch the sound output from stereo to mono when a headset is connected. • Sound balance: Set the device to adjust the sound balance when using a headset. • Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen. • Interaction control: Activate interaction control mode to restrict the device’s reaction to inputs while using apps. Settings 88 SYSTEM Language and input Change the settings for text input. Some options may not be available depending on the selected language. On the Settings screen, tap Language and input. Language Select a display language for all menus and apps. Default Select a default keyboard type for text input. Samsung keyboard To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap . The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider. • English(UK): Select a default keyboard layout. • Select input languages: Select languages for text input. • Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings. • Auto replacement: Set the device to correct misspelled and incomplete words by tapping the space bar or punctuation mark. • Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark. • Auto spacing: Set the device to automatically insert a space between words. • Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space bar. Settings 89 • Keyboard swipe: – None: Set the device to deactivate the keyboard swipe feature. – Continuous input: Set the device to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard. • Sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched. • Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped. • Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings. Google voice typing To change the voice input settings, tap . • Choose input languages: Select languages for text input. • Block offensive words: Set the device to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in voice inputs. • Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. Voice search • Language: Select a language for voice recognition. • Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current action. • “Ok Google” Detection: Set the device to begin voice recognition when you say the wake-up command while using the search app. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. • Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Bluetooth headset: Set the device to allow voice input of search keywords via the Bluetooth headset microphone when a Bluetooth headset is connected. Settings 90 Text-to-speech options • PREFERRED TTS ENGINE: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . • Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. • Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. • Default language status: View the status of the default language for the text-to-speech feature. Pointer speed Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device. Date and time Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date. On the Settings screen, tap Date and time. If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date is reset. • Automatic date and time: Automatically update the time and date when moving across time zones. • Automatic time zone: Set the device to receive time zone information from the network when you move across time zones. • Set date: Set the current date manually. • Set time: Set the current time manually. • Select time zone: Set the home time zone. • Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format. • Select date format: Select a date format. Settings 91 Ultra power saving mode Extend standby time and reduce battery consumption by displaying a simpler layout and allowing limited access to an app. Refer to Ultra power saving mode for more information. On the Settings screen, tap Ultra power saving mode, and then tap the Ultra power saving mode switch to activate it. The estimated maximum standby time shows the time remaining before the battery power runs out if the device is not used. Standby time may vary depending on your device settings and operating conditions. Battery View the amount of battery power consumed by your device. On the Settings screen, tap Battery. • Display battery percentage: Set the device to display the remaining battery life. Storage View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card. On the Settings screen, tap Storage. Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it. The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default apps occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may change when you upgrade the device. Settings 92 Security Change settings for securing the device and the SIM or USIM card. On the Settings screen, tap Security. • Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow device administrators to apply new policies to the device. • Unknown sources: Set the device to allow the installation of apps from unknown sources. • Verify apps: Set the device to check the apps for harmful content before installing them. • Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the password each time you turn on the device. Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an hour to encrypt your data. • Encrypt external SD card: Set the device to encrypt files on a memory card. If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the device. • Remote controls: Set the device to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account. • SIM Change Alert: Activate or deactivate the Find my mobile feature which helps locate the device when lost or stolen. • Go to website: Access the Find my mobile website (findmymobile.samsung.com). You can track and control your lost or stolen device from the Find my mobile website. • Set up SIM card lock: – Lock SIM card: Activate or deactivate the PIN lock feature to require the PIN before using the device. – Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN used to access SIM or USIM data. • Make passwords visible: Set the device to display passwords as they are entered. Settings 93 • Security update: Set the device to check and download security updates. • Storage type: Set a storage type for credential files. • Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various apps. • Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage. • Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password. About device Access device information, edit the device name, or update device software. On the Settings screen, tap About device. 94 Troubleshooting Before contacting a Samsung Service Centre, please attempt the following solutions. Some situations may not apply to your device. When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: • Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. • PIN: When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by using the Lock SIM card menu. • PUK: Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. • PIN2: When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. For more information, contact your service provider. Your device displays network or service error messages • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. While moving, error messages may appear repeatedly. • You cannot access some options without a subscription. For more information, contact your service provider. Your device does not turn on • When the battery is completely discharged, your device will not turn on. Fully charge the battery before turning on the device. • The battery may not be inserted properly. Insert the battery again. • Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and insert the battery again. Troubleshooting 95 The touch screen responds slowly or improperly • If you attach a protective cover or optional accessories to the touch screen, the touch screen may not function properly. • If you are wearing gloves, if your hands are not clean while touching the touch screen, or if you tap the screen with sharp objects or your fingertips, the touch screen may malfunction. • The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. • Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. • Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version. • If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, visit a Samsung Service Centre. Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close apps or reinsert the battery and turn on the device to regain functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button for more than 7 seconds to restart it. If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything. Before performing the factory data reset, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. If the problem is still not resolved, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Calls are not connected • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number. Others cannot hear you speaking on a call • Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone. • Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth. • If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected. Troubleshooting 96 Sound echoes during a call Adjust the volume by pressing the Volume button or move to another area. A cellular network or the Internet is often disconnected or audio quality is poor • Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna. • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. You may have connectivity problems due to issues with the service provider’s base station. Move to another area and try again. • When using the device while moving, wireless network services may be disabled due to issues with the service provider’s network. The battery icon is empty Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery. The battery does not charge properly (For Samsung-approved chargers) • Ensure that the charger is connected properly. • If the battery terminals are dirty, the battery may not charge properly or the device may turn off. Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and try charging the battery again. • The batteries in some devices are not user-replaceable. To have the battery replaced, visit a Samsung Service Centre. The battery depletes faster than when first purchased • When you expose the battery to very cold or very hot temperatures, the useful charge may be reduced. • Battery consumption increases when you use messaging features or some apps, such as games or the Internet. • The battery is consumable and the useful charge will get shorter over time. Troubleshooting 97 Your device is hot to the touch When you use apps that require more power or use apps on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. Error messages appear when launching the camera Your device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera app. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: • Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged. • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera app after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Photo quality is poorer than the preview • The quality of your photos may vary, depending on the surroundings and the photography techniques you use. • If you take photos in dark areas, at night, or indoors, image noise may occur or images may be out of focus. Error messages appear when opening multimedia files If you receive error messages or multimedia files do not play when you open them on your device, try the following: • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file. • Ensure that the file formats are supported by the device. If a file format is not supported, such as DivX or AC3, install an app that supports it. To confirm the file formats that your device supports, visit www.samsung.com. Troubleshooting 98 • Your device supports photos and videos captured with the device. Photos and videos captured by other devices may not work properly. • Your device supports multimedia files that are authorised by your network service provider or providers of additional services. Some content circulated on the Internet, such as ringtones, videos, or wallpapers, may not work properly. Another Bluetooth device is not located • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device. • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to. • Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a computer • Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device. • Ensure that you have the proper driver installed and updated on your computer. • If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. • Ensure that you have Samsung Kies or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer. Your device cannot find your current location GPS signals may be obstructed in some locations, such as indoors. Set the device to use Wi-Fi or a mobile network to find your current location in these situations. Troubleshooting 99 Data stored in the device has been lost Always make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. Otherwise, you cannot restore data if it is corrupted or lost. Samsung is not responsible for the loss of data stored in the device. A small gap appears around the outside of the device case • This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of parts may occur. • Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly. Copyright Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics This guide is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this guide may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics. Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model ___________ Serial No. ____________ user manual LED TV [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 1 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:33 Warning! Important Safety Instructions (Please read the Safety Instructions before using your TV.) CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER ALL SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. This symbol indicates that high voltage is present inside. It is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any internal part of this product. This symbol indicates that this product has included important literature concerning operation and maintenance. The slots and openings in the cabinet and in the back or bottom are provided for necessary ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of this apparatus and to protect it from overheating, these slots and openings must never be blocked or covered. - Do not place this apparatus in a confined space, such as a bookcase or built-in cabinet, unless proper ventilation is provided. - Do not place this apparatus near or over a radiator or heat register, or where it is exposed to direct sunlight. - Do not place vessels (vases etc.) containing water on this apparatus, as this can result in a fire or electric shock. Do not expose this apparatus to rain or place it near water (near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool etc.). If this apparatus accidentally gets wet, unplug it and contact an authorised dealer immediately. This apparatus uses batteries. In your community, there might be environmental regulations that require you to dispose of these batteries properly. Please contact your local authorities for disposal or recycling information. Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords or adaptors beyond their capacity, since this can result in fire or electric shock. Power-supply cords should be placed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular attention to cords at the plug end, at wall outlets, and at the point where they exit from the appliance. To protect this apparatus from a lightning storm, or when left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the set due to lightning and power line surges. Before connecting the AC power cord to the DC adaptor outlet, make sure that the voltage designation of the DC adaptor corresponds to the local electrical supply. Never insert anything metallic into the open parts of this apparatus. This may cause a danger of electric shock. To avoid electric shock, never touch the inside of this apparatus. Only a qualified technician should open this apparatus. Be sure to plug in the power cord until it is firmly seated. When unplugging the power cord from a wall outlet, always pull on the power cord's plug. Never unplug it by pulling on the power cord. Do not touch the power cord with wet hands. If this apparatus does not operate normally - in particular, if there are any unusual sounds or smells coming from it - unplug it immediately and contact an authorised dealer or service centre. Be sure to pull the power plug out of the outlet if the TV is to remain unused or if you are to leave the house for an extended period of time (especially when children, elderly or disabled people will be left alone in the house). - Accumulated dust can cause an electric shock, an electric leakage, or a fire by causing the power cord to generate sparks and heat or by causing the insulation to deteriorate. Be sure to contact an authorised service centre for information if you intend to install your TV in a location with heavy dust, high or low temperatures, high humidity, chemical substances, or where it will operate 24 hours a day such as in an aerial port, a train station, etc. Failure to do so may lead to serious damage to your TV. Use only a properly grounded plug and wall outlet. - An improper ground may cause electric shock or equipment damage. (Class l Equipment only.) To turn off this apparatus completely, disconnect it from the wall outlet. Be sure to have the wall outlet and power plug readily accessible. Do not allow children to hang onto the product. Store the accessories (battery, etc.) in a location safely out of the reach of children. Do not install the product in an unstable location such as a shaky shelf or a slanted floor or in a location exposed to vibration. Do not drop or strike the product. If the product is damaged, disconnect the power cord and contact a service centre. To clean this apparatus, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and wipe the product with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use any chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol, thinners, insecticide, aerial fresheners, lubricants, or detergents. These chemicals can damage the appearance of the TV or erase the printing on the product. Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or overheat the batteries. There is danger of an explosion if you replace the batteries used in the remote with the wrong type of battery. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. WARNING - TO PREVENT THE SPREAD OF FIRE, KEEP CANDLES OR OTHER ITEMS WITH OPEN FLAMES AWAY FROM THIS PRODUCT AT ALL TIMES. * Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from the actual product appearance. Product design and specifications may change without notice. CIS languages (Russian, Ukrainian, Kazakhs) are not available for this product, since this is manufactured for customers in EU region. English - 2 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 2 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:34 What's in the Box? Remote Control & Batteries (AAA x 2) Regulatory Guide User Manual Power Cord Warranty Card (Not available in some locations) CI Card Adapter Cable Guide Wall mount Adapter - Make sure that the following items are included with your TV. If there are any items missing, contact your local dealer. - The colours and shapes of the items differ with the model. - Cables not supplied with this product can be purchased separately. - Open the box and check for any accessory items hidden behind or inside the packing materials. An administration fee may be charged in the following situations: (a) An engineer is called out at your request, but there will be no defect with the product (i.e., where the user manual has not been read). (b) You bring the unit to a repair centre, but there will be no defect identified the product (i.e., where the user manual has not been read). You will be informed of the administration fee amount before a technician visits. Warning: Screens can be damaged from direct pressure when handled incorrectly. We recommend lifting the TV at the edges, as shown. Do Not Touch This Screen! Using the TV Controller You can use the TV Controller on the back of the TV instead of the remote control to control most of the functions of your TV. Control Stick The Control Stick is located on the lower left corner of the back of the TV. Control Menu : Opens Smart Hub. : Selects a source. : Opens the menu. : Turns off the TV. Remote control sensor English English - 3 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 3 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:35 TV Camera Connection - The TV camera is sold separately. - Make sure to connect only the TV camera to the TV CAMERA port. Connecting to a COMMON INTERFACE slot (Your TV viewing Card Slot) - Turn the TV off to connect or disconnect a CI card or CI card adapter. - For more information how to use "CI or CI+ CARD", see the e-Manual chapter, "System and Support > Connecting to a TV Viewing Card slot". Attaching the CI Card Adapter A CI Card Adapter that lets the TV use two different CI Cards is available, depending on the model. We recommend that you attach the CI Card adapter and insert the CI card (viewing card) before you mount the TV on the wall because it may be difficult and dangerous to do this when it is on the wall. Using the “CI or CI+ CARD” To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted. English - 4 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 4 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:35 The Remote Control E-MANUAL: Opens the e-Manual. EXTRA: Displays related information about the current programme. AD/SUBT.: Displays the Accessibility Shortcuts. P.MODE / PICTURE: Changes the picture mode. P.SIZE / PIC SIZE: Change the picture size. SEARCH: Launches the Search function. Displays and selects available video sources. Turns the Sports Mode on or off. Turns the sound on/off. Launches Smart Hub applications. Refer to the e-Manual chapter, Smart Features > Smart Hub. Changes the current channel. Displays the Electronic Programme Guide (EPG). Turns the TV on/off. Gives direct access to channels. Adjusts the volume. Launches the Channel List. Alternately selects Teletext ON, Double, Mix or OFF. Returns to the previous channel. Displays the menu on the screen. TOOLS: Quickly selects frequently used functions. INFO: Displays information about the current programme or content. RETURN: Returns to the previous menu or channel. EXIT: Exits the menu. Use these buttons according to the directions on the TV screen. Use these buttons with specific features. Use these buttons according to the directions on the TV screen. Moves the focus, and changes the values seen on the TV's menu. E (Enter): Selects or runs a focused item. - Press and hold to display the Guide. N The button names above may be differ from the actual names. N The remote control may differ by its model. Installing batteries into the remote control Match the polarity of the batteries to the symbols on the battery compartment. - Use the remote control within 7m the TV. - Bright light may affect the performance of the remote control. Avoid using near bright fluorescent lights or neon signs. - The colour and shape of the remote may vary depending on the model. English English - 5 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 5 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:36 Connecting to a Network Connecting the TV to a network gives you access to online services, such as Smart Hub, as well as software updates. Network Connection - Wireless Connect the TV to the Internet using a standard router or modem. Wireless IP Router or Modem with a DHCP Server LAN Cable (Not Supplied) The LAN Port on the Wall Network Connection - Wired TV Rear Panel Connect your TV to your network using a LAN cable. - Use a Category 7 cable for the connection. English - 6 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 6 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:37 The e-Manual The embedded e-Manual contains information about the key features of your TV. - You can download and view a printable version of the e-Manual on the Samsung website. Displaying the e-Manual: • Press the E-MANUAL button on the remote control. • On the TV’s menu, select Support > e-Manual. Using the buttons available on the main screen of the e-Manual Search Select an item from the search results to load the corresponding page. Index Select a keyword to navigate to the relevant page. Recent pages Select a topic from the list of recently viewed topics. Accessing the associated menu screen from an e-Manual topic page Try Now Access the associated menu item and try out the feature directly. Link Access a topic referred to on an e-Manual topic page. Accessing the associated e-Manual topic from a menu screen Press the E-MANUAL button on the remote control to read the e-Manual topic about a current screen menu function. - The e-Manual cannot be accessed from some menu screens. Updating the e-Manual to the latest version You can update the e-Manual in the same way you update apps. Initial setup The initial setup dialogue box appears when the TV is first activated. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the initial setup process. You can manually perform this process at a later time in the System > Setup menu. - If you connect any device to HDMI1 before starting the installation, the Channel Source will be changed to Set-top box automatically. - If you do not want to select Set-top box, please select Aerial. English English - 7 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 7 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:38 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting If the TV seems to have a problem, first review this list of possible problems and solutions. Alternatively, review the Troubleshooting Section in the e-Manual. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit “www.samsung.com” and click on Support, or contact the call centre listed on the back cover of this manual. - This TFT LED panel is made up of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. There may be, however, a few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product. - To keep your TV in optimum condition, upgrade to the latest software. Use the Update now or Auto update functions on the TV's menu (MENU > Support > Software Update > Update now or MENU > Support > Software Update > Auto Update). Issues Solutions and explanations The TV is not powered on. Make sure that the power cord is connected and that the remote has live batteries and is functioning properly. If the power cord is properly connected and the remote control is operating normally, there might arise a problem with the antenna cable connection, or the cable/set-top box might not be turned on. Check the antenna connection or turn on the cable/ set-top box. The TV won’t turn on. Make sure that the AC power cord is securely plugged in to the TV and the wall outlet. Make sure that the wall outlet is working. Try pressing the P button on the TV to make sure that the problem is not with the remote. If the TV turns on, refer to “The remote control does not work” below. There is no picture/video. Check the cable connections. Remove and reconnect all cables connected to the TV and external devices. Set the video outputs of your external devices (Cable/set-top box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) to match the TV's input connections. For example, if an external device’s output is HDMI, connect it to an HDMI input on the TV. Make sure that your connected devices are powered on. Be sure to select the correct input source. Reboot the connected device by unplugging it and reconnecting the device's power cable. The remote control does not work. Replace the remote control batteries. Make sure that the batteries are installed with their poles (+/–) in the correct direction. Clean the sensor’s transmission window on the remote. Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 1.5~1.8 m away. The Cable or set-top box remote control doesn’t turn on/off the TV or adjust the volume. Programme the cable or set-top box remote control to operate the TV. Refer to the Cable or set-top box user manual for the SAMSUNG TV code. English - 8 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 8 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:38 Changing the TV’s password (System > Change PIN) 1. Run Change PIN and then enter the current password in the password field. The default password is “0-0-0-0” (France: “1- 1-1-1”). 2. Enter a new password and then enter it again to confirm it. The password change is complete. - If you forgot your PIN code, press the buttons in the following sequence to reset the PIN to “0-0-0-0” (France: “1-1-1-1”): For the Standard Remote Control: In Standby mode: MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (On) Eco Sensor and screen brightness Eco Sensor adjusts the brightness of the TV automatically. This feature measures the light in your room and optimises the brightness of the TV automatically to reduce power consumption. If you want to turn this off, go to MENU > System > Eco Solution > Eco Sensor. - If the screen is too dark while you are watching TV in a dark environment, it may be due to the Eco Sensor. - Do not block the sensor with any object. This can decrease picture brightness. Still image warning Avoid displaying still images (such as jpeg picture files), still image elements (such as TV channel logos, stock or news crawls at the screen bottom etc.), or programmes in panorama or 4:3 image format on the screen. If you constantly display still pictures, it can cause image burn-in on the LED screen and affect image quality. To reduce the risk of this adverse effect, please follow the recommendations below: • Avoid displaying the still image for long periods. • Always try to display any image in full screen. Use the picture format menu of the TV set for the best possible match. • Reduce brightness and contrast to avoid the appearance of after-images. • Use all TV features designed to reduce image retention and screen burn. Refer to the e-Manual for details. Caring for the TV - If a sticker was attached to the TV screen, some debris can remain after you remove the sticker. Please clean the debris off before watching TV. - The exterior and screen of the TV can get scratched during cleaning. Be sure to wipe the exterior and screen carefully using a soft cloth to prevent scratches. Do not spray water or any liquid directly onto the TV. Any liquid that goes into the product may cause a failure, fire, or electric shock. Turn off the TV, then gently wipe away smudges and fingerprints on the screen with a micro-fiber cloth. Clean the body of the TV with a soft cloth dampened with a small amount of water. Do not use flammable liquids (benzene, thinners, etc.) or a cleaning agent. For stubborn smudges, spray a small amount of screen cleaner on the cloth. English English - 9 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 9 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:38 TV Installation Mounting the TV on a wall If you mount this product on a wall, follow the instructions exactly as recommended by the manufacturer. Unless it is correctly mounted, the product may slide or fall, thus causing serious injury to a child or adult and serious damage to the product. Installing the wall mount kit You can mount the TV on the wall using a wall mount kit (sold separately). For models providing wall mount adapters, install them as shown in the figures below before installing the wall mount kit. - Refer to the installation manual included with the Samsung wall mount kit. Before you install the screws for the wall mount, put the Styrofoam that came with the TV's packaging on the TV to protect it. Then, lay the TV down and attach the screws. - The Styrofoam is not provided for the 40-inch or less TVs. To mount both a soundbar and the TV onto a wall using the wall mount, mount the soundbar onto the TV first, and then mount the TV/Soundbar combination onto the wall mount. For detailed information, see the instructions provided with the soundbar. - The soundbar installation with the wall mount may not be supported for the specific region or model. TV Wall mount Bracket C Wall mount Adapter For detailed information about installing the wall mount, see the instructions provided with the wall mount kit. We recommend that you contact a technician for assistance when installing the wall mount bracket. We do not advise you to do it yourself. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any damage to the product or injury to yourself or others if you choose to install the wall mount on your own. VESA wall mount kit notes and specifications You can install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. Before attaching the wall mount to surfaces other than plaster board, contact your nearest dealer for additional information. If you install the TV on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury. Product Family TV size in inches VESA screw hole specs (A * B) in millimetres C (mm) Standard Screw Quantity LED-TV [Curved] 32 200 X 200 27.6 ~ 32.6 40 27.4 ~ 32.4 M8 4 48 ~ 55 400 X 400 27.4 ~ 32.4 English - 10 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 10 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:39 Do not install your wall mount kit while your TV is turned on. This may result in personal injury from electric shock. Do not use screws that are longer than the standard length or do not comply with VESA standard screw specifications. Screws that are too long may cause damage to the inside of the TV set. • For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications, the length of the screws may differ depending on the wall mount specifications. • Do not fasten the screws too firmly. This may damage the product or cause the product to fall, leading to personal injury. Samsung is not liable for these kinds of accidents. • Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non-VESA or non-specified wall mount is used or the consumer fails to follow the product installation instructions. • Do not mount the TV at more than a 15 degree tilt. • Always have two people mount the TV onto a wall. Arranging the cables with the Cable guide Providing proper ventilation for your TV When you install your TV, maintain a distance of at least 10 cm between the TV and other objects (walls, cabinet sides, etc.) to ensure proper ventilation. Failing to maintain proper ventilation may result in a fire or a problem with the product caused by an increase in its internal temperature. When you install your TV with a stand or a wall mount, we strongly recommend you use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only. Using parts provided by another manufacturer may cause difficulties with the product or result in injury caused by the product falling. Installation with a stand Installation with a wall mount 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm English English - 11 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 11 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:40 Attaching the TV to the Stand Make sure you have all the accessories shown, and that you assemble the stand following the provided assembly instructions. Safety Precaution: Securing the TV to the wall Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children do not hang on or destabilize the TV. This action may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death. Follow all safety precautions provided in the Safety Flyer included with your TV. For added stability and safety, you can purchase and install the anti-fall device as described below. Preventing the TV from falling These are general instructions. The clamps, screws, and string are not supplied by Samsung. They must be purchased separately. We suggest consulting an installation service or professional TV installer for specific hardware and anti-fall hardware installation. 1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall. Confirm that the screws have been firmly installed onto the wall. - You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of wall. 2. Remove the screws from the back centre of the TV, put the screws into the clamps, and then fasten the screws onto the TV again. - Screws may not be supplied with the product. In this case, please purchase the screws of the following specifications. 3. Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a durable, heavy-duty string, and then tie the string tightly. - Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards. - Connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are at the same height as or lower than the clamps fixed on the TV. - Untie the string before moving the TV. 4. Make sure that all connections are properly secured. Periodically check the connections for any sign of fatigue or failure. If you have any doubt about the security of your connections, contact a professional installer. English - 12 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 12 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:40 Specifications and Other Information Specifications Display Resolution 1920 x 1080 Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F) 10% to 80%, non-condensing -20°C to 45°C (-4°F to 113°F) 5% to 95%, non-condensing Stand Swivel (Left / Right) 0˚ Model Name UE32J6300 / UE32J6370 UE40J6300 / UE40J6370 Screen Size (Diagonal) 32 inches (80 cm) 40 inches (101 cm) Screen Curvature 3,000R 3,000R Sound (Output) 20 W (L: 10 W, R: 10 W) Dimensions (W x H x D) Body With stand 730.3 x 428.2 x 91.5 mm 730.3 x 485.0 x 207.5 mm 915.9 x 533.6 x 104.1 mm 915.9 x 599.6 x 288.0 mm Weight Without Stand With Stand 5.2 kg 5.6 kg 7.6 kg 8.6 kg Model Name UE48J6300 / UE48J6370 UE55J6300 / UE55J6370 Screen Size (Diagonal) 48 inches (121 cm) 55 inches (138 cm) Screen Curvature 3,000R 4,200R Sound (Output) 20 W (L: 10 W, R: 10 W) Dimensions (W x H x D) Body With stand 1082.2 x 628.2 x 118.7 mm 1082.2 x 693.3 x 310.5 mm 1239.1 x 715.8 x 113.7 mm 1239.1 x 781.6 x 310.5 mm Weight Without Stand With Stand 11.3 kg 12.3 kg 16.1 kg 17.1 kg - The design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. - For information about the power supply, and about power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product. - Typical power consumption is measured according to IEC 62087 Ed.2 Decreasing power consumption When you shut the TV off, it enters Standby mode. In Standby mode, it continues to draw a small amount of power. To decrease power consumption, unplug the power cord when you don't intend to use the TV for a long time. English English - 13 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 13 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:41 Licences The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Recommendation - EU Only Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this TV is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The official Declaration of Conformity may be found at http://www.samsung.com, go to Support > Search Product Support and enter the model name. This equipment may only be used indoors. This equipment may be operated in all EU countries. Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Correct disposal of the batteries in this product (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. English - 14 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 14 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:42 This page is intentionally left blank. [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 15 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:42 Avertissement ! Consignes de sécurité importantes (Veuillez lire les consignes de sécurité avant d'utiliser le téléviseur.) ATTENTION RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION - NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION : POUR REDUIRE LE RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION, NE RETIREZ PAS LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). AUCUNE DES PIECES SITUEES A L'INTERIEUR DU PRODUIT NE PEUT ETRE REPAREE PAR L'UTILISATEUR. POUR TOUT DEPANNAGE, ADRESSEZ-VOUS A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Ce symbole indique la présence de haute tension à l'intérieur de ce produit. Il est dangereux de toucher les pièces situées à l'intérieur de ce produit. Ce symbole indique qu'une documentation importante relative au fonctionnement et à l'entretien est fournie avec le produit. Les fentes et les ouvertures aménagées dans le boîtier ainsi qu'à l'arrière et en dessous de l'appareil assurent la ventilation de ce dernier. Afin de garantir le bon fonctionnement de l'appareil et d'éviter les risques de surchauffe, ces fentes et ouvertures ne doivent être ni obstruées ni couvertes. - Ne placez pas l'appareil dans un environnement clos tel qu'une bibliothèque ou une armoire encastrée, sauf si une ventilation adéquate est prévue. - Ne placez pas l'appareil à proximité ou au-dessus d'un radiateur ou d'une bouche d'air chaud, ni dans un endroit exposé à la lumière directe du soleil. - Ne placez pas de récipients contenant de l'eau (vases, etc.) sur l'appareil afin d'éviter tout risque d'incendie ou de choc électrique. N'exposez pas l'appareil à la pluie et ne le placez pas à proximité d'une source d'eau (baignoire, lavabo, évier, bac de lavage, sous-sol humide ou piscine, par exemple). Si l'appareil vient à être mouillé par accident, débranchez-le et contactez immédiatement un revendeur agréé. Cet appareil fonctionne sur piles. Dans un souci de préservation de l'environnement, la réglementation locale en vigueur peut prévoir des mesures spécifiques de mise au rebut des piles usagées. Veuillez contacter les autorités compétentes afin d'obtenir des informations sur la mise au rebut ou le recyclage des piles. Evitez de surcharger les prises murales, les rallonges et les adaptateurs, car cela entraîne un risque d'incendie ou de choc électrique. Les cordons d'alimentation doivent être déroulés de sorte qu'aucun objet placé sur ou contre eux ne les chevauche ni les pince. Accordez une attention particulière aux cordons au niveau de l'extrémité des fiches, des prises murales et de la sortie de l'appareil. En cas d'orage, d'absence ou de non utilisation de votre appareil pendant une longue période, débranchez-le de la prise murale, de même que l'antenne ou le système de câbles. Ces précautions éviteront que l'appareil ne soit endommagé par la foudre ou par des surtensions. Avant de raccorder le cordon d'alimentation CA à la prise de l'adaptateur CC, vérifiez que la tension indiquée sur ce dernier correspond bien à la tension délivrée par le réseau électrique local. N'insérez jamais d'objets métalliques dans les parties ouvertes de cet appareil Vous pourriez vous électrocuter. Afin d'éviter tout risque d'électrocution, ne mettez jamais les doigts à l'intérieur de l'appareil. Seul un technicien qualifié est habilité à ouvrir cet appareil. Veillez à brancher correctement et complètement le cordon d'alimentation. Lorsque vous débranchez le cordon d'alimentation d'une prise murale, tirez toujours sur la fiche du cordon d'alimentation. Ne le débranchez jamais en tirant sur le cordon d'alimentation. Ne touchez pas le cordon d'alimentation si vous avez les mains mouillées. Si l'appareil ne fonctionne pas normalement, en particulier s'il émet des odeurs ou des sons anormaux, débranchez-le immédiatement et contactez un revendeur ou un centre de dépannage agréé. Si vous prévoyez de ne pas utiliser le téléviseur ou de vous absenter pendant une période prolongée, veillez à retirer la fiche d'alimentation de la prise (en particulier si des enfants, des personnes âgées ou des personnes handicapées restent seuls au domicile). - L'accumulation de poussière peut amener le cordon d'alimentation à produire des étincelles et de la chaleur ou l'isolation à se détériorer, entraînant un risque de fuite électrique, d'électrocution et d'incendie. Si vous prévoyez d'installer le téléviseur dans des endroits exposés à la poussière, à des températures faibles ou élevées, à une forte humidité, à des substances chimiques ou s'il fonctionnera 24/24 heures, comme dans un aéroport ou une gare ferroviaire, contactez un centre de service agréé pour obtenir des informations. Le non-respect de ce qui précède peut gravement endommager le téléviseur. N'utilisez que des fiches et des prises murales correctement reliées à la terre. - Une mise à la terre incorrecte peut entraîner des chocs électriques ou endommager l'appareil (appareils de classe I uniquement). Pour éteindre complètement cet appareil, débranchez-le de la prise murale. Assurez-vous que la prise murale et la fiche d'alimentation sont facilement accessibles. Ne laissez pas les enfants se suspendre à l'appareil. Rangez les accessoires (pile, etc.) dans un endroit hors de portée des enfants. N'installez pas l'appareil dans un endroit instable, comme sur une étagère bancale, sur une surface inclinée ou dans un endroit exposé à des vibrations. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber le produit ni à lui donner des coups. Si le produit est endommagé, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation et contactez un centre de service. Pour nettoyer l'appareil, retirez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale et nettoyez le produit à l'aide d'un chiffon doux et sec. N'utilisez aucune substance chimique, telle que la cire, le benzène, l'alcool, des solvants, des insecticides, des désodorisants, des lubrifiants ou des détergents. Ces substances chimiques peuvent altérer l'aspect du téléviseur ou effacer les imprimés se trouvant sur celui-ci. N'exposez pas l'appareil aux gouttes ni aux éclaboussures. Ne jetez pas les piles au feu. Les piles ne doivent pas être court-circuitées, démontées ni subir de surchauffe. Un risque d'explosion existe si vous remplacez les piles de la télécommande par des piles d'un autre type. Ne les remplacez que par des piles du même type. ATTENTION : POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE D'INCENDIE, TENEZ TOUJOURS CE PRODUIT A DISTANCE DES BOUGIES OU AUTRES FLAMMES OUVERTES. * Les schémas et illustrations contenus dans ce manuel de l'utilisateur sont fournis uniquement à titre de référence. L'aspect réel du produit peut être différent. La conception et les spécifications du produit sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. Les langues de la CEI (russe, ukrainien, kazakh) ne sont pas disponibles pour ce produit, car il est fabriqué pour des clients de l'UE. Français - 2 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 2 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:42 Contenu de la boîte Télécommande et piles (AAA x 2) Guide réglementaire Guide d'utilisation Cordon d'alimentation Carte de garantie (non disponible dans tous les pays) Adaptateur de carte CI Guide de câblage Adaptateur pour support mural - Vérifiez que les éléments suivants sont inclus avec votre téléviseur. S'il manque des éléments, contactez votre revendeur local. - Les couleurs et les formes des éléments varient en fonction du modèle. - Il est possible d'acheter séparément les câbles non fournis avec ce produit. - Ouvrez la boîte et vérifiez qu'aucun accessoire n'est caché derrière ou dans l'emballage. Des frais d'administration peuvent vous être facturés dans les situations suivantes : (a) Un technicien intervient à votre demande alors que le produit ne comporte aucun défaut (c.-à-d. vous n'avez pas lu le manuel d'utilisation). (b) Vous amenez le produit dans un centre de réparation alors que le produit ne comporte aucun défaut (c.-à-d. vous n'avez pas lu le manuel d'utilisation). Le montant des frais d'administration vous sera communiqué avant la visite du technicien. Avertissement : les écrans peuvent être endommagés par une pression directe lorsqu'ils sont incorrectement manipulés. Il est recommandé de soulever le téléviseur par les bords, comme indiqué. Ne touchez pas cet écran ! Utilisation du contrôleur du téléviseur Vous pouvez utiliser le contrôleur du téléviseur qui se trouve à l'arrière de l'appareil plutôt que la télécommande pour contrôler la majorité des fonctions de votre téléviseur. Stick de commande Le stick de commande est situé à l'arrière du téléviseur, dans le coin inférieur gauche. Menu de commande : permet d'ouvrir Smart Hub. : permet de sélectionner une source. : permet d'ouvrir le menu. : permet d'éteindre le téléviseur. Capteur de la télécommande Français Français - 3 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 3 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:43 Connexion de la caméra TV - La caméra TV est vendue séparément. - Veillez à ne connecter que la caméra TV au port TV CAMERA. Connexion à un port COMMON INTERFACE (logement pour votre carte permettant de regarder la télévision) - Mettez le téléviseur hors tension ou déconnectez la carte CI ou l'adaptateur de carte CI. - Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la CARTE CI ou CI+, consultez le chapitre « Système et assistance > Connexion à un logement de carte de visionnage TV » du manuel électronique. Connexion de l'adaptateur de carte CI Un adaptateur de carte CI, permettant au téléviseur d'utiliser deux cartes CI différentes, est disponible selon le modèle. Il est conseillé de connecter l'adaptateur de carte CI et d'insérer la carte CI (carte permettant de regarder la télévision) avant d'installer le téléviseur sur le mur parce qu'il peut être difficile et dangereux de procéder une fois celui-ci fixé au mur. Utilisation de la carte d'interface commune CI ou CI+ Pour pouvoir regarder des chaînes payantes, vous devez avoir inséré la carte d'interface commune "CI ou CI+". Français - 4 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 4 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:44 La télécommande E-MANUAL : permet d'ouvrir le manuel électronique. EXTRA : permet d'afficher des informations sur le programme en cours. AD/SUBT. : permet d'afficher Raccourcis d'accessibilité. P.MODE / PICTURE : permet de modifier le mode d'image. P.SIZE / PIC SIZE : permet de régler le format de l'image. SEARCH : permet de démarrer la fonction Rech.. Permet d'afficher et de sélectionner les sources vidéo disponibles. Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le Mode Sport. Permet d'activer et de désactiver le son. Permet de lancer les applications Smart Hub. Consultez le chapitre du e-Manual intitulé Fonctions Smart > Smart Hub. Permet de changer de chaîne. Permet d'afficher le Guide électronique des programmes (EPG). Permet d'allumer et d'éteindre le téléviseur. Permet d'accéder directement aux chaînes. Permet de régler le volume. Permet de lancer la Liste des chaînes. Permet de sélectionner successivement les options Teletext ON, Double, Mix et OFF. Permet de revenir à la chaîne précédente. Permet d'afficher le menu à l'écran. TOOLS: permet de sélectionner rapidement les fonctions fréquemment utilisées. INFO: permet d'afficher des informations sur le programme ou contenu actuel. RETURN : permet de revenir à la chaîne ou au menu précédent. EXIT: permet de quitter le menu. Utilisez ces boutons conformément aux instructions affichées sur l'écran du téléviseur. Utilisez ces boutons avec des fonctionnalités spécifiques. Utilisez ces boutons conformément aux instructions affichées sur l'écran du téléviseur. Permet de déplacer la sélection et de modifier les valeurs affichées sur le menu du téléviseur. E (Entrée) : permet de sélectionner ou d'exécuter l'option sélectionnée. - Appuyez longuement pour afficher la Guide. N Les noms des boutons qui figurent au-dessus peuvent être différents. N La télécommande peut varier selon le modèle. Mise en place des piles dans la télécommande Respectez les polarités indiquées par les symboles dans le logement des piles. - Utilisez la télécommande à une distance maximale de 7 mètres du téléviseur. - Une lumière intense peut affecter le bon fonctionnement de la télécommande. Evitez de l'utiliser à proximité d'une lampe fluorescente ou d'une enseigne au néon. - La couleur et la forme de la télécommande peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. Français Français - 5 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 5 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:45 Connexion à un réseau La connexion du téléviseur à un réseau vous permet d'accéder à des services en ligne comme Smart Hub ainsi qu'à des mises à jour logicielles. Connexion réseau - Sans fil Connectez le téléviseur à Internet à l'aide d'un routeur ou modem standard. Routeur IP ou modem sans fil avec serveur DHCP Câble LAN (non fourni) Port LAN mural Connexion réseau - Câble Panneau arrière du téléviseur Connectez votre téléviseur à votre réseau à l'aide d'un câble LAN. - Utilisez un câble de catégorie 7 pour effectuer cette connexion. Français - 6 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 6 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:46 e-Manual L'e-Manual intégré contient des informations sur les principales fonctionnalités de votre téléviseur. - Vous pouvez télécharger et consulter une version imprimable de l'e-Manual sur le site Web de Samsung. Affichage de l'e-Manual : • Appuyez sur la touche E-MANUAL de la télécommande. • Dans le menu du téléviseur, sélectionnez Assistance > e-Manual. Utilisation des boutons de l'écran principal de l'e-Manual Rech. Choisissez un élément parmi les résultats de la recherche pour charger la page correspondante. Index Sélectionnez un mot-clé dans la liste pour accéder à la page appropriée. Page ouverte Sélectionnez une rubrique dans la liste des rubriques récemment consultées. Accès à l'écran de menu associé depuis une page de l'e-Manual Essayer Permet d'accéder à l'option de menu associée et d'essayer directement cette fonctionnalité. Associer Permet d'accéder à une rubrique à laquelle une page de l'e-Manual fait référence. Accès à la rubrique associée de l'e-Manual depuis un écran de menu Appuyez sur la touche E-MANUAL de la télécommande pour lire la rubrique du manuel électronique concernant une fonction du menu apparaîssant sur l'écran actuel. - L'e-Manual n'est pas accessible depuis tous les écrans de menu. Mise à jour de l'e-Manual vers la dernière version Vous pouvez mettre l'e-Manual à jour de la même manière que vous mettez à jour des applications. Configuration initiale La boîte de dialogue de configuration initiale s'affiche lors de la première activation du téléviseur. Suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran pour terminer la procédure de configuration initiale. Vous pouvez effectuer manuellement cette opération ultérieurement dans le menu Système > Configuration. - Si vous connectez un périphérique sur HDMI1 avant de commencer l'installation, la Canal Source passe automatiquement sur Boîtier décodeur. - Si vous ne souhaitez pas sélectionner Boîtier décodeur, sélectionnez Antenne. Français Français - 7 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 7 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:46 Résolution des problèmes et entretien Résolution des problèmes En cas de problème, commencez par consulter la liste des problèmes potentiels et de leurs solutions. Vous pouvez également vous référer à la section Résolution des problèmes du manuel électronique. Si aucune de ces solutions de dépannage ne s'applique à votre problème, rendez-vous sur le site "www.samsung.com/fr" et cliquez sur Assistance, ou contactez le centre d'appels dont les coordonnées figurent sur la dernière page de ce manuel. - Ce téléviseur LED TFT utilise des sous-pixels dont la fabrication nécessite une technologie sophistiquée. Il se peut toutefois que quelques points clairs ou sombres apparaissent à l'écran. Ils n'ont aucune incidence sur la performance du produit. - Pour maintenir votre téléviseur dans des conditions optimales, mettez-le à niveau avec le dernier logiciel disponible. Utilisez les fonctions MàJ maintenant ou Mise à jour auto dans le menu du téléviseur (MENU > Assistance > Mise à jour du logiciel > MàJ maintenant ou MENU > Assistance > Mise à jour du logiciel > Mise à jour auto). Problèmes Solutions et explications Le téléviseur n'est pas allumé. Vérifiez que le cordon d'alimentation est connecté, que les piles de la télécommande sont bien chargées et que la télécommande fonctionne correctement. Si le cordon d'alimentation est correctement connecté et si la télécommande fonctionne normalement, le problème provient peut-être du branchement au câble de l'antenne, ou de l'alimentation du décodeur câble/ boîtier décodeur. Vérifiez la connexion de l'antenne ou mettez sous tension le décodeur câble/ boîtier décodeur. Le téléviseur ne s'allume pas. Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation secteur est correctement branché au téléviseur et à la prise murale. Vérifiez que la prise murale est opérationnelle. Appuyez sur le bouton P du téléviseur pour vous assurer que le problème ne vient pas de la télécommande. Si le téléviseur s'allume, reportez-vous au problème « La télécommande ne fonctionne pas » ci-après. Aucune image/vidéo. Vérifiez le branchement des câbles. Débranchez et rebranchez tous les câbles reliés au téléviseur et aux périphériques externes. Faites correspondre la sortie vidéo de vos périphériques externes (décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) avec les connexions d'entrée du téléviseur. Par exemple, si la sortie d'un appareil externe est HDMI, elle doit être connectée à une entrée HDMI du téléviseur. Vérifiez que les appareils connectés sont sous tension. Veillez à sélectionner la source appropriée du téléviseur. Redémarrez le périphérique connecté en débranchant puis en rebranchant son câble d'alimentation. La télécommande ne fonctionne pas. Remplacez les piles de la télécommande. Assurez-vous que la polarité (+/-) des piles est respectée. Nettoyez la lentille de la télécommande. Essayez de diriger directement la télécommande vers le téléviseur à une distance comprise entre 1,5 et 1,8 m. La télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur ne permet pas d'allumer ou d'éteindre le téléviseur, ni de régler le volume. Programmez la télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur de telle sorte qu'elle puisse contrôler le téléviseur. Consultez le manuel de l'utilisateur du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur pour obtenir le code du téléviseur SAMSUNG. Français - 8 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 8 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:47 Modification du mot de passe du téléviseur (Système > Modifier PIN) 1. Exécutez Modifier PIN, puis entrez le mot de passe actuel dans le champ approprié. Le mot de passe par défaut est “0-0- 0-0” (pour la France: “1-1-1-1”). 2. Saisissez un nouveau mot de passe, puis saisissez-le de nouveau pour le confirmer. La modification du mot de passe est terminée. - Si vous avez oublié le code PIN, appuyez sur les touches dans l'ordre suivant pour redéfinir le code sur “0-0-0-0” (pour la France: “1-1-1-1”): Pour la télécommande standard: en mode veille : MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Activé) Capteur Eco et luminosité de l'écran La fonction Capteur Eco règle automatiquement la luminosité de l'écran du téléviseur. Cette fonction mesure la luminosité de votre pièce et optimise automatiquement celle de votre téléviseur afin de réduire la consommation d'énergie. Si vous souhaitez la désactiver, accédez à MENU > Système > Solution Eco > Capteur Eco. - Si l'écran est trop sombre lorsque vous regardez la télévision dans l'obscurité, cela peut être dû au Capteur Eco. - Ne bloquez pas le capteur avec un objet quelconque. Cela pourrait diminuer la luminosité de l'image. Avertissement relatif aux images fixes Evitez d'afficher à l'écran des images fixes (par ex. des fichiers image au format jpeg), des éléments d'images fixes (logos de programme de télévision, bandeaux de cotations ou d'infos au bas de l'écran, etc.) ou des images panoramiques ou au format 4:3. L'affichage permanent d'images fixes peut entraîner des phénomènes de brûlure d'écran et altérer la qualité de l'image. Pour atténuer les risques de ces conséquences négatives, suivez scrupuleusement les recommandations ci-dessous : • Evitez d'afficher l'image fixe pendant de longues périodes. • Essayez de toujours afficher les images en mode plein écran. Utilisez le menu de format d'image du téléviseur pour obtenir la meilleure configuration. • Réduisez la luminosité et le contraste pour éviter l'apparition d'images rémanentes. • Utilisez toutes les fonctions conçues pour réduire la rémanence et les brûlures d'écran. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l'eManual. Entretien du téléviseur - Si un autocollant était apposé à l'écran, des traces peuvent rester après que vous l'avez enlevé. Nettoyez-les avant d'utiliser le téléviseur. - Le nettoyage peut rayer l'écran et l'extérieur du téléviseur. Veillez à effectuer le nettoyage avec précaution à l'aide d'un chiffon doux pour éviter les rayures. Veillez à ne pas pulvériser d'eau ou tout autre liquide directement sur le téléviseur. Tout liquide qui entre dans le produit peut engendrer une défaillance, un incendie ou une électrocution. Eteignez le téléviseur, puis nettoyez avec précaution les tâches et les traces de doigts se trouvant sur l'écran à l'aide d'un chiffon en microfibre. Nettoyez le téléviseur (hormis l'écran) à l'aide d'un chiffon doux humidifié avec un peu d'eau. N'utilisez pas de liquide inflammable (benzène, diluants, etc.) ni de produit d'entretien. Si des tâches sont difficiles à enlever, humidifiez le chiffon avec un peu de nettoyant pour écran. Français Français - 9 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 9 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:47 Installation du téléviseur Fixation du téléviseur à un mur Si vous fixez ce produit à un mur, suivez à la lettre les instructions fournies par le fabricant. S'il n'est pas fixé correctement, le produit peut glisser ou tomber, infligeant des blessures graves à des enfants ou des adultes ainsi que des dommages au produit. Installation du kit de montage mural Vous pouvez fixer le téléviseur au mur à l'aide du kit de montage mural (vendu séparément). Pour les modèles proposant un adaptateur de montage mural, procédez à l'installation illustrée ci-dessous avant de fixer le kit de montage mural. - Reportez-vous au Manuel d'installation inclus dans le kit de montage mural Samsung. Avant de fixer les vis pour le montage mural, placez le polystyrène de l'emballage du téléviseur sur celui-ci pour le protéger. Couchez le téléviseur et fixez les vis. - Le polystyrène n'est pas fourni pour les téléviseurs de moins de 40 pouces. Pour fixer une barre de son en plus du téléviseur au mur, montez d'abord la barre de son sur le téléviseur, puis fixez l'ensemble téléviseur/barre de son au kit de montage mural. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec la barre de son. - L'installation de la barre de son à l'aide du support mural peut ne pas être possible dans certaines régions ou sur certains modèles. Téléviseur Support mural C Adaptateur pour support mural Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du support mural, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec le kit de montage mural. Nous vous recommandons de faire appel à un technicien pour installer la fixation murale. Il n'est pas conseillé de le faire par vous-même. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenue responsable d'un endommagement du produit ou d'une blessure si vous choisissez d'effectuer vous-même l'installation murale. Kit de montage mural VESA - Remarques et spécifications Vous pouvez installer le support mural sur un mur solide et perpendiculaire au sol. Avant de le fixer sur une autre surface que des plaques de plâtre, veuillez contacter votre revendeur le plus proche pour obtenir des informations supplémentaires. Si vous installez le téléviseur au plafond ou sur un mur incliné, il risque de tomber et de provoquer de graves blessures. Famille de produits Taille du téléviseur en pouces Spécifications VESA pour trou de vis (A * B) en millimètres C (mm) Vis standard Quantité Téléviseur LED [Incurvé] 32 200 X 200 27,6 ~ 32,6 40 27,4 ~ 32,4 M8 4 48 ~ 55 400 X 400 27,4 ~ 32,4 Français - 10 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 10 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:48 N'installez pas le kit de montage mural lorsque le téléviseur est allumé. Vous risqueriez de vous électrocuter. N'utilisez pas de vis plus longues que la longueur standard ou non conformes aux caractéristiques des vis VESA standard. Des vis trop longues pourraient endommager l'intérieur du téléviseur. • Pour les fixations murales non conformes aux spécifications des vis VESA standard, la longueur des vis peut varier, selon les caractéristiques de la fixation murale. • Ne serrez pas les vis trop fermement. Cela pourrait endommager l'appareil ou provoquer sa chute, entraînant des blessures. Samsung ne peut être tenue pour responsable de ce type d'accident. • Samsung ne peut être tenue responsable de tout endommagement du produit ou de toute blessure corporelle dans le cas de l'utilisation d'un autre support mural qu'un support VESA ou d'un support mural non spécifié, ou si l'utilisateur ne suit pas les instructions d'installation du produit. • N'inclinez pas le téléviseur de plus de 15 degrés. • Deux personnes sont nécessaires pour fixer le téléviseur au mur. Fixation des câbles à l'aide du guide de câblage Ventilation adaptée de votre téléviseur Lorsque vous installez votre téléviseur, maintenez une distance d'au moins 10 cm entre le téléviseur et d'autres objets (murs, côtés d'armoire, etc.) pour permettre une ventilation adéquate. Le fait de ne pas garantir une ventilation adaptée peut entraîner une augmentation de la température interne du produit, ce qui peut l'endommager ou provoquer un incendie. Lors de l'installation de votre téléviseur sur un pied ou un support mural, nous vous conseillons fortement d'utiliser uniquement des pièces fournies par Samsung Electronics. L'utilisation de pièces fournies par un autre fabricant peut entraîner une défaillance du produit ou sa chute, ce qui pourrait vous blesser. Installation sur un socle Installation sur un support mural 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm Français Français - 11 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 11 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:48 Fixation du téléviseur sur le socle Vérifiez que vous disposez de tous les accessoires illustrés et veillez à monter le socle en respectant les instructions de montage fournies. Précautions de sécurité : fixation du téléviseur au mur Attention : si vous tirez ou poussez le téléviseur ou si vous grimpez dessus, il risque de tomber. Veillez notamment à ce que vos enfants ne se suspendent pas au téléviseur ni le déséquilibrent. Cela pourrait faire basculer le téléviseur et occasionner des blessures graves, voire entraîner la mort. Respectez toutes les précautions de sécurité indiquées dans la brochure relative à la sécurité fournie avec votre téléviseur. Pour une stabilité et une sécurité accrues, vous pouvez acheter et installer le dispositif antichute comme décrit ci-dessous. Conseils pour éviter toute chute du téléviseur Ces instructions sont d'ordre général. Les colliers, les vis et le cordon ne sont pas fournis par Samsung. Vous devez les acheter séparément. Nous vous conseillons de contacter un service d'installation ou un installateur professionnel pour des installations spécifiques avec un dispositif antichute. 1. Glissez les vis dans les colliers, puis fixez-les solidement au mur. Assurez-vous que les vis sont fermement fixées au mur. - Selon le type de mur, il est possible que vous ayez besoin de matériel supplémentaire, tel que des chevilles. 2. Retirez les vis situées sur la partie centrale arrière du téléviseur, placez les vis dans les colliers, puis fixez-les à nouveau sur le téléviseur. - Il se peut que les vis ne soient pas fournies avec le produit. Dans ce cas, achetez des vis présentant les caractéristiques suivantes. 3. Reliez les colliers fixés au téléviseur et ceux fixés au mur à l'aide d'un cordon solide, puis nouez-le fermement. - Placez le téléviseur à proximité du mur afin qu'il ne bascule pas vers l'arrière. - Placez le cordon de façon à ce que les colliers fixés au mur soient placés à la même hauteur ou plus bas que ceux fixés au téléviseur. - Détachez le cordon avant de déplacer le téléviseur. 4. Assurez-vous que toutes les connexions sont fixées correctement. Vérifiez régulièrement que les connexions ne présentent aucun signe d'usure. Si vous avez un doute quant à la sécurité des connexions, contactez un installateur professionnel. Français - 12 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 12 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:49 Spécifications et informations supplémentaires Spécifications Résolution de l'affichage 1920 x 1080 Conditions ambiantes Température de fonctionnement Humidité de fonctionnement Température de stockage Humidité de stockage 10°C à 40°C (50°F à 104°F) 10 à 80 %, sans condensation -20°C à 45°C (-4°F à 113°F) 5 à 95 %, sans condensation Socle pivotant (gauche/droite) 0˚ Nom du modèle UE32J6300 / UE32J6370 UE40J6300 / UE40J6370 Taille de l'écran (diagonale) 32 pouces (80 cm) 40 pouces (101 cm) Courbure de l'écran 3,000R 3,000R Son (Sortie) 20 W (G: 10 W, D: 10 W) Dimensions (L x H x P) Corps Avec socle 730,3 x 428,2 x 91,5 mm 730,3 x 485,0 x 207,5 mm 915,9 x 533,6 x 104,1 mm 915,9 x 599,6 x 288,0 mm Poids Sans socle Avec socle 5,2 kg 5,6 kg 7,6 kg 8,6 kg Nom du modèle UE48J6300 / UE48J6370 UE55J6300 / UE55J6370 Taille de l'écran (diagonale) 48 pouces (121 cm) 55 pouces (138 cm) Courbure de l'écran 3,000R 4,200R Son (Sortie) 20 W (G: 10 W, D: 10 W) Dimensions (L x H x P) Corps Avec socle 1082,2 x 628,2 x 118,7 mm 1082,2 x 693,3 x 310,5 mm 1239,1 x 715,8 x 113,7 mm 1239,1 x 781,6 x 310,5 mm Poids Sans socle Avec socle 11,3 kg 12,3 kg 16,1 kg 17,1 kg - La conception et les spécifications peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. - Pour plus d'informations sur les caractéristiques d'alimentation et de consommation électrique, reportez-vous à l'étiquette fixée au produit. - La consommation de courant normale est mesurée selon la norme CEI 62087 Ed.2. Réduction de la consommation d'énergie Lorsque vous éteignez le téléviseur, il passe en mode veille. En mode veille, le téléviseur continue à consommer une petite quantité de courant. Pour réduire la consommation d'énergie, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation lorsque vous ne prévoyez pas d'utiliser le téléviseur pendant une période prolongée. Français Français - 13 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 13 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:49 Licences The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Recommandation - UE uniquement Par la présente, Samsung Electronics déclare que ce téléviseur satisfait aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC. La déclaration de conformité est accessible à l'adresse http://www.samsung.com/fr, en cliquant sur Assistance, puis en entrant le nom du modèle dans le champ de saisie Recherche d'assistance pour vos produits. Cet équipement ne doit être utilisé qu'en intérieur. Cet équipement peut fonctionner dans tous les pays de l'UE. Instructions de mise au rebut de ce produit (déchets d'équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans les pays pratiquant la collecte sélective de déchets) Ce symbole présent sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne doivent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques pour l'environnement et la santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d'un développement durable. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les utilisateurs professionnels doivent contacter leur fournisseur et consulter les conditions générales du contrat d'achat. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne doivent pas être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux. Mise au rebut des piles de ce produit (Applicable dans les pays pratiquant la collecte sélective de déchets) Ce symbole présent sur le manuel, l'emballage ou les piles indique que celles-ci ne doivent pas être jetées avec les autres déchets ménagers. L'indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la pile ou l'accumulateur contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si les piles ne sont pas correctement mises au rebut, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l'environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et de favoriser la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer les piles des autres types de déchets et à les recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des piles et accumulateurs. Français - 14 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 14 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:50 This page is intentionally left blank. [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 15 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:50 Achtung! Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise (Lesen Sie sorgfältig die Sicherheitshinweise, bevor Sie das Fernsehgerät verwenden.) ACHTUNG STROMSCHLAGGEFAHR – NICHT ÖFFNEN ACHTUNG: ENTFERNEN SIE NIEMALS DIE ABDECKUNG (ODER RÜCKWAND) DES GERÄTS. ANDERNFALLS BESTEHT STROMSCHLAGGEFAHR. IM GERÄTEINNEREN BEFINDEN SICH KEINE VOM BENUTZER ZU WARTENDEN TEILE. REPARATUREN DÜRFEN NUR VON QUALIFIZIERTEM KUNDENDIENSTPERSONAL DURCHGEFÜHRT WERDEN. Dieses Symbol weist auf eine hohe Spannung im Innern des Geräts hin. Das Berühren von Teilen im Geräteinneren ist gefährlich. Dieses Symbol weist darauf hin, dass diesem Gerät wichtige Anweisungen zum Betrieb und zur Wartung beigefügt sind. Die Schlitze und Öffnungen im Gehäuse und in der Rückwand oder im Boden sind wichtig und dienen der Belüftung. Um den zuverlässigen Betrieb des Geräts zu gewährleisten und es vor Überhitzung zu schützen, dürfen diese Öffnungen keinesfalls blockiert oder bedeckt werden. - Stellen Sie das Gerät nicht an Orten mit beengten Platzverhältnissen auf, wie z. B. in einem Bücherregal oder einem Einbauschrank. Dies ist nur dann zulässig, wenn für ausreichende Belüftung gesorgt wird. - Außerdem darf das Gerät keinesfalls in der Nähe oder oberhalb eines Heizstrahlers oder -körpers aufgestellt werden oder an Orten, an denen es direkter Sonneneinstrahlung ausgesetzt ist. - Stellen Sie keine mit Flüssigkeit gefüllten Behälter (Vasen usw.) auf das Gerät, da dies zu einem Brand oder Stromschlag führen kann. Setzen Sie das Gerät keinesfalls Regen aus, und stellen Sie es nicht in der Nähe von Wasser auf (Badewanne, Küchenspüle, feuchter Keller, Schwimmbecken usw.). Falls das Gerät dennoch Nässe ausgesetzt war, trennen Sie es von der Stromversorgung und wenden Sie sich umgehend an den nächstgelegenen Händler. Für dieses Gerät werden Batterien benötigt. Entsorgen Sie die Batterien ordnungsgemäß und in Übereinstimmung mit den für Sie geltenden Umweltschutzbestimmungen. Bitte wenden Sie sich bei Fragen zur ordnungsgemäßen Entsorgung an Ihre örtlichen Behörden. Überlasten Sie Steckdosen, Verlängerungskabel und Netzteile keinesfalls, da dies zu einem Brand oder Stromschlag führen kann. Netzkabel müssen so verlegt werden, dass niemand auf das Kabel treten kann oder es durch Gegenstände gequetscht wird, die auf dem Kabel stehen oder gegen das Kabel drücken. Insbesondere ist auf Stecker, Netzteile und die Kabeldurchführung am Gerätegehäuse zu achten. Trennen Sie das Gerät aus Sicherheitsgründen bei einem Gewitter oder bei längerer Nutzungspause vom Netz und von der Antenne bzw. vom Kabelsystem. Auf diese Weise werden Schäden durch Blitzschlag oder Spannungsstöße vermieden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Nennspannung des Gleichstromnetzteils für die örtliche Stromversorgung geeignet ist, bevor Sie das Netzkabel an die Stromversorgung anschließen. Führen Sie niemals Metallgegenstände in die Öffnungen des Geräts ein. Dies kann zu Stromschlägen führen. Berühren Sie zur Vermeidung von Stromschlägen keinesfalls Bauteile im Inneren des Geräts. Das Gerät darf nur von einem qualifizierten Techniker geöffnet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Netzstecker fest in der Steckdose sitzt. Ziehen Sie das Netzkabel nie am Kabel selbst, sondern stets am Stecker aus der Steckdose. Ziehen Sie niemals am Kabel, um den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose zu ziehen. Berühren Sie das Netzkabel niemals mit feuchten Händen. Wenn das Gerät nicht einwandfrei funktioniert, insbesondere beim Auftreten ungewöhnlicher Geräusche oder Gerüche aus dem Inneren, trennen Sie es unverzüglich von der Stromversorgung und wenden Sie sich umgehend an Ihren nächstgelegenen Händler oder das nächste Kundendienstzentrum. Ziehen Sie unbedingt den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose, wenn das Gerät längere Zeit nicht verwendet werden soll oder Sie längere Zeit außer Haus sind (insbesondere wenn Kinder und ältere Personen allein im Haus bleiben). - Staubablagerungen können Stromschläge, Kurzschlüsse oder Brände verursachen, da sie zu Funkenbildung, übermäßiger Erwärmung und Beschädigung der Isolierung am Netzkabel führen können. Wenden Sie sich für weiterführende Informationen an ein autorisiertes Kundendienstzentrum, wenn das Gerät an einem Ort mit hoher Konzentration an Staubpartikeln, außergewöhnlich hohen oder niedrigen Temperaturen, hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit oder in unmittelbarer Nähe zu Chemikalien aufgestellt oder z. B. an einem Bahnhof oder Flughafen im Dauerbetrieb verwendet werden soll. Eine nicht fachgerechte Aufstellung kann zu schweren Schäden am Gerät führen. Verwenden Sie nur ordnungsgemäß geerdete Stecker und Steckdosen. - Eine fehlerhafte Erdung kann zu Stromschlägen oder Schäden am Gerät führen. (Nur Geräte der Klasse I.) Um dieses Gerät vollständig abzuschalten, müssen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose ziehen. Daher müssen Steckdose und Netzstecker jederzeit leicht zugänglich sein. Achten Sie darauf, dass sich Kinder nicht an das Gerät hängen. Lagern Sie die Zubehörteile (Batterien usw.) an einem sicheren Ort außerhalb der Reichweite von Kindern. Stellen Sie das Gerät nicht auf instabilem Untergrund wie z. B. einem wackligen Regal, einem abschüssigen Boden oder einem Ort auf, wo es Vibrationen ausgesetzt ist. Lassen Sie das Gerät nicht fallen, und setzen Sie es keiner Schlag- oder Stoßeinwirkung aus. Wenn das Gerät beschädigt ist, trennen Sie es vom Stromnetz und wenden Sie sich an ein Kundendienstzentrum. Ziehen Sie zum Reinigen den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose, und wischen Sie das Gerät mit einem weichen, trockenen Tuch ab. Verwenden Sie keine Chemikalien wie Wachs, Benzol, Alkohol, Verdünner, Insektizide, Luftverbesserer, Schmiermittel oder Reinigungsmittel. Diese Chemikalien können die Oberfläche des Geräts beschädigen und aufgedruckte Kennzeichnungen lösen bzw. entfernen. Setzen Sie das Gerät niemals Regen oder Feuchtigkeit aus. Entsorgen Sie Batterien niemals in einem Feuer. Schließen Sie die Batterien nicht kurz, nehmen Sie sie nicht auseinander und setzen Sie sie keiner Hitze aus. Wenn Sie die für die Fernbedienung mitgelieferten Batterien durch neue Batterien des falschen Typs ersetzen, besteht Explosionsgefahr. Setzen Sie nur Batterien des gleichen oder eines gleichwertigen Typs ein. ACHTUNG: SORGEN SIE DAFÜR, DASS DAS GERÄT NIEMALS IN DIE NÄHE VON KERZEN, OFFENEM FEUER ODER SONSTIGEN GEGENSTÄNDEN MIT OFFENEN FLAMMEN GELANGT. ANDERNFALLS BESTEHT BRANDGEFAHR. * Die Abbildungen und Illustrationen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Information und können vom tatsächlichen Aussehen des Geräts abweichen. Änderungen an Ausführung und technischen Daten vorbehalten. Einige GUS-Sprachen (Russisch, Ukrainisch, Kasachisch) stehen für dieses Produkt nicht zur Verfügung, da das Gerät für Kunden in der EU hergestellt wurde. Deutsch - 2 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 2 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:51 Lieferumfang Fernbedienung & 2 Batterien (Typ AAA) Vorschriftenhandbuch Benutzerhandbuch Netzkabel Garantiekarte (nicht überall verfügbar) CI-Kartenadapter Kabelführung Adapter für die Wandhalterung - Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die aufgeführten Teile im Lieferumfang des Geräts enthalten sind. Wenden Sie sich bei fehlenden Teilen an Ihren Händler. - Farben und Formen der Teile sind modellabhängig. - Nicht im Lieferumfang enthaltene Kabel sind separat erhältlich. - Öffnen Sie die Verpackung und überprüfen Sie das gesamte Verpackungsmaterial, damit Sie keine Teile übersehen. Für Reparaturen an Ihrem Gerät fallen Gebühren an, wenn: (a) auf Ihren Wunsch ein Techniker zu Ihnen geschickt wird, und es liegt kein Defekt des Geräts vor (d. h. wenn das Benutzerhandbuch nicht gelesen wurde) (b) Sie das Gerät in eine Reparaturwerkstatt bringen, und es liegt kein Defekt des Geräts vor (d. h. wenn das Benutzerhandbuch nicht gelesen wurde) Die Höhe eventuell anfallender Gebühren wird Ihnen vor dem Besuch eines Technikers mitgeteilt. Warnung: Der Bildschirm kann aufgrund direkter Krafteinwirkung während eines unsachgemäßen Transports beschädigt werden. Wir empfehlen daher, das Gerät beim Tragen wie in der Abbildung gezeigt an den Ecken zu halten. Fassen Sie das Gerät nicht am Bildschirm an! Verwenden des TV-Controllers Sie können die meisten Funktionen des Fernsehgeräts anstatt mit der Fernbedienung auch mit dem TV-Controller an der Rückseite des Geräts steuern. Bedienknopf Der Bedienknopf befindet sich in der linken unteren Ecke auf der Rückseite des Geräts. Bedienknopfmenü : Hiermit öffnen Sie Smart Hub. : Hiermit wählen Sie eine Quelle aus. : Hiermit öffnen Sie das Menü. : Hiermit schalten Sie das Fernsehgerät aus. Fernbedienungssensor Deutsch Deutsch - 3 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 3 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:52 Anschließen der TV-Kamera - Die TV-Kamera ist separat erhältlich. - Schließen Sie nur die TV-Kamera an den Anschluss TV CAMERA an. Verbinden mit dem COMMON INTERFACESteckplatz (Fernsehen mit Ihrer PayTV-Karte) - Schalten Sie den Fernseher aus, wenn Sie den CI-Kartenadapter einsetzen oder herausnehmen möchten. - Weitere Informationen zur Verwendung von „CI“- oder „CI+“-Karten finden Sie im e-Manual unter „System und Unterstützung > Fernsehen mit einer CI-Karte“. Befestigen des CI-Kartenadapters Je nach Modell steht ein CI-Kartenadapter zur Verfügung, mit dem zwei verschiedene CI-Karten mit dem Fernsehgerät verwendet werden können. Wir empfehlen, dass Sie den CI-Kartenadapter und die CI-Karte (Smartcard) anschließen, ehe Sie das Fernsehgerät an der Wand anbringen, denn wenn es erst an der Wand befestigt ist, kann dies schwierig und gefährlich sein. Verwenden der „CI“- oder „CI+“-Karte Um Bezahlsender zu sehen, müssen Sie eine „CI“- oder „CI+“-Karte einsetzen. Deutsch - 4 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 4 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:52 Die Fernbedienung E-MANUAL: Hiermit öffnen Sie das e-Manual. EXTRA: Hiermit zeigen Sie Informationen zur aktuellen Sendung an. AD/SUBT.: Hiermit öffnen Sie das Fenster Schnelltasten für Barrierefreiheit. P.MODE / PICTURE: Hiermit ändern Sie den Bildmodus. P.SIZE / PIC SIZE: Hiermit ändern Sie das Bildformat. SEARCH: Hiermit starten Sie die SuchenFunktion. Hiermit können Sie die verfügbaren Videosignalquellen anzeigen und auswählen. Hiermit aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren Sie die Funktion Sport-Modus. Hiermit schalten Sie den Ton ein oder aus. Hiermit starten Sie Smart HubAnwendungen. Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie im Kapitel SmartFunktionen > Smart Hub im e-Manual. Hiermit wechseln Sie den Sender. Hiermit zeigen Sie den elektronischen Programmführer (EPG) an. Hiermit schalten Sie das Gerät ein bzw. aus. Hiermit können Sie direkt auf die Sender zugreifen. Hiermit stellen Sie die Lautstärke ein. Hiermit öffnen Sie die Senderliste. Hiermit schalten Sie zwischen „Videotext EIN“, „Doppel“, „Mix“ oder „AUS“ um. Hiermit wechseln Sie zum vorherigen Sender. Hiermit öffnen Sie das Bildschirmmenü. TOOLS: Hiermit können Sie häufig verwendete Funktionen schnell auswählen. INFO: Hiermit können Sie Informationen über die gerade ausgestrahlte digitale Sendung oder den Inhalt anzeigen. RETURN: Hiermit kehren Sie zum vorherigen Menü oder Sender zurück. EXIT: Hiermit schließen Sie das Menü. Verwenden Sie diese Tasten entsprechend den Anweisungen auf dem Fernsehbildschirm. Verwenden Sie diese Tasten im Zusammenhang mit bestimmten Funktionen. Verwenden Sie diese Tasten entsprechend den Anweisungen auf dem Fernsehbildschirm. Hiermit verschieben Sie den Fokus und ändern die auf dem Gerät angezeigten Menüwerte. E (Eingabe): Wählt oder führt ein markiertes Element aus. - Halten Sie diese Taste gedrückt, um die TV-Programm anzuzeigen. N Die obigen Tastennamen können von den tatsächlichen Bezeichnungen abweichen. N Das Aussehen der Fernbedienung ist modellabhängig. Einsetzen der Batterien in die Fernbedienung Legen Sie die Batterien entsprechend den Symbolen im Batteriefach ein. Achten Sie auf die Polung. - Sie können die Fernbedienung bis zu einer Entfernung von maximal 7 m zum Fernsehgerät einsetzen. - Helles Licht kann die Leistung der Fernbedienung verschlechtern. Vermeiden Sie die Verwendung der Fernbedienung in der Nähe von Leuchtstoffröhren oder Neonschildern. - Form und Farbe der Fernbedienung können je nach Modell unterschiedlich sein. Deutsch Deutsch - 5 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 5 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:53 Verbinden mit einem Netzwerk Durch Verbinden des Geräts mit einem Netzwerk erhalten Sie Zugriff auf Software-Updates und Online-Dienste wie Smart Hub. Netzwerkverbindung – Drahtlos Verbinden Sie das Gerät über einen Standardrouter oder ein Modem mit dem Internet. IP-Drahtlosrouter oder Drahtlosmodem mit DHCP-Server LAN-Kabel (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten) LAN-Anschluss an der Wand Netzwerkverbindung – Kabel Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts Verbinden Sie das Gerät über ein LAN-Kabel mit Ihrem Netzwerk. - Verwenden Sie ein CAT7-Kabel für die Verbindung. Deutsch - 6 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 6 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:54 Das e-Manual Das integrierte e-Manual enthält Informationen über die wichtigsten Funktionen Ihres Fernsehgeräts. - Eine druckbare Version des e-Manual können Sie auf der Website von Samsung herunterladen und anzeigen. Anzeigen des e-Manual: • Drücken Sie auf der Fernbedienung die Taste E-MANUAL. • Wählen Sie im Menü des Fernsehgeräts Unterstützung > e-Manual aus. Verwenden der Schaltflächen auf der Startseite des e-Manual Suchen Wählen Sie einen Treffer in der Liste mit den Suchergebnissen aus, um die entsprechende Seite zu laden. Index Wählen Sie ein Stichwort aus, um zur entsprechenden Seite zu navigieren. Geöffnete Seite Wählen Sie ein Thema aus der Liste der kürzlich angesehenen Themen aus. Zugreifen auf ein Menüfenster von einer Themenseite im e-Manual Jetzt test. Hiermit können Sie auf einen zugehöriges Menüelement zugreifen und eine Funktion direkt ausprobieren. Verknüpfung Hiermit können Sie auf ein anderes Thema zugreifen, auf das auf einer Themenseite im e-Manual verwiesen wird. Zugreifen auf ein zugehöriges Thema im e-Manual von einem Menüfenster Drücken Sie die Taste E-MANUAL auf der Fernbedienung, um das mit dem aktuellen Menüfenster verbundene Thema im e-Manual zu öffnen. - Über manche Menüfenster kann nicht auf das e-Manual zugegriffen werden. Aktualisieren des e-Manuals auf die neuste Version Sie können das e-Manual in der gleichen Weise wie Apps aktualisieren. Anfangseinstellung Wenn Sie das Gerät erstmals einschalten, wird das Dialogfenster für die Anfangseinstellungen geöffnet. Führen Sie die Anfangseinstellungen entsprechend den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm durch. Sie können dieses Verfahren auch zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt manuell mit Hilfe des Menüs System > Einstell. durchführen. - Wenn Sie vor der Installation ein Gerät an den Eingang HDMI1 anschließen, wechselt der Sender Quelle automatisch zu „Set-Top-Box“. - Wenn Sie die Option „Set-Top-Box“ nicht verwenden möchten, wählen Sie stattdessen TV-Empf. aus. Deutsch Deutsch - 7 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 7 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:55 Fehlerbehebung und Wartung Fehlerbehebung Wenn das Fernsehgerät scheinbar ein Problem aufweist, schlagen Sie zunächst in dieser Liste der möglichen Probleme und Lösungen nach. Schlagen Sie alternativ im e-Manual unter „Fehlerbehebung“ nach. Wenn keiner dieser Tipps zur Fehlerbehebung weiterhilft, rufen Sie die Website „www.samsung.com“ auf, und klicken Sie dort auf „Unterstützung“ oder wenden Sie sich an das auf der letzten Seite dieser Bedienungsanleitung angegebene Callcenter. - Der Bildschirm dieses TFT-LED-Geräts arbeitet mit Subpixeln und wurde mit Hilfe hochentwickelter Fertigungstechnologien produziert. Allerdings kann es vorkommen, dass einige wenige Pixel zu hell oder zu dunkel sind. Diese Pixelfehler haben keinen Einfluss auf die Geräteleistung. - Aktualisieren Sie die Firmware auf die neuste Version, um die optimale Leistung Ihres Fernsehgeräts zu erhalten. Nutzen Sie dazu die Funktion Jetzt aktualisieren oder Automatisches Update im Menü Ihres Fernsehgeräts (MENU > Unterstützung > Software-Update > Jetzt aktualisieren oder MENU > Unterstützung > Software-Update > Automatisches Update). Probleme Lösungen und Erklärungen Das Gerät kann nicht eingeschaltet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Netzkabel korrekt angeschlossen ist, dass die Batterien der Fernbedienung nicht leer sind und dass diese ordnungsgemäß funktioniert. Wenn das Netzkabel richtig angeschlossen ist und die Fernbedienung normal funktioniert, kann ein Problem mit dem Anschluss des Antennenkabels bestehen, oder der Kabelreceiver bzw. die Set-Top-Box ist nicht eingeschaltet. Überprüfen Sie den Antennenanschluss oder schalten Sie den Kabelreceiver bzw. die Set-Top-Box ein. Der Fernseher kann nicht eingeschaltet werden. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Netzkabel sicher mit der Wandsteckdose und dem Fernsehgerät verbunden ist. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Netzsteckdose Strom liefert. Drücken Sie die Taste P am Fernsehgerät, um auszuschließen, dass ein Problem mit der Fernbedienung vorliegt. Wenn das Fernsehgerät eingeschaltet wird, lesen Sie den Abschnitt „Die Fernbedienung funktioniert nicht“ weiter unten. Kein Bild/Video. Überprüfen Sie die Kabelverbindungen. Unterbrechen Sie kurzzeitig alle Kabelverbindungen zwischen dem Fernsehgerät und den externen Geräten. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Videoausgänge Ihrer externen Geräte (Kabelreceiver/Set-Top-Box, DVD-, Blu-ray-Player usw.) zu den Eingangsanschlüssen des Fernsehgeräts passen. Zum Beispiel: Wenn der HDMI-Ausgang des externen Geräts verwendet wird, schließen Sie es an den HDMI-Eingangs Ihres Fernsehers an. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die angeschlossenen Geräte eingeschaltet sind. Achten Sie darauf, dass Sie die richtige Eingangsquelle eingestellt haben. Ziehen Sie kurzzeitig das Netzkabel des angeschlossenen Geräts, um es neu zu starten. Die Fernbedienung funktioniert nicht. Ersetzen Sie die Batterien der Fernbedienung. Achten Sie beim Einsetzen der Batterien auf die richtige Polung (+/-). Reinigen Sie das Sendefeld der Fernbedienung. Versuchen Sie, die Fernbedienung aus einer Entfernung von 1,5 bis 1,8 m aus direkt auf das Fernsehgerät zu richten. Mit der Fernbedienung des Kabelreceivers bzw. der Set-Top-Box kann das Gerät nicht ein-/ ausgeschaltet werden, und die Lautstärke kann nicht eingestellt werden. Programmieren Sie die Fernbedienung des Kabelreceivers bzw. der Set-Top-Box so, dass sie das Fernsehgerät anspricht. Den Code für das Samsung-Fernsehgerät finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung des Kabelreceivers bzw. der Set-Top-Box. Deutsch - 8 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 8 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:55 Ändern des Kennworts für das Fernsehgerät (System > PIN ändern) 1. Führen Sie die Funktion PIN ändern aus, und geben Sie dann im Kennwortfeld das aktuelle Kennwort ein. Das Standardkennwort lautet „0-0-0-0” (für Frankreich auf: „1-1-1-1”). 2. Geben Sie ein neues Kennwort ein, und bestätigen Sie es durch erneute Eingabe. Das Kennwort wurde geändert. - Wenn Sie den PIN-Code vergessen haben, drücken Sie die Tasten auf der Fernbedienung in der angegebenen Reihenfolge, um die PIN auf „0-0-0-0” (für Frankreich auf: „1-1-1-1”) zurückzusetzen: Für die Standardfernbedienung: Im Standby-Modus: MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Ein) Öko-Sensor und Bildschirmhelligkeit Mit Hilfe der Öko-Sensor-Funktion kann die Helligkeit des Fernsehgeräts automatisch eingestellt werden. Mit dieser Funktion werden die Lichtverhältnisse im Zimmer automatisch gemessen, und die Helligkeit des Bildschirms wird optimiert, um den Energieverbrauch zu senken. Wenn Sie die Funktion deaktivieren möchten, navigieren Sie zu MENU > System > Öko-Lösung > Öko-Sensor. - Wenn der Bildschirm zu dunkel wird, während Sie das Gerät in einer dunklen Umgebung verwenden, kann dies am ÖkoSensor liegen. - Achten Sie darauf, dass der Sensor nicht verdeckt wird. Dadurch kann sich die Helligkeit des Bilds verringern. Warnung bei Standbildern Vermeiden Sie längeres Anzeigen von Standbildern (wie z. B. JPEG-Bilddateien) oder Standbildelementen (wie z. B. Senderlogos, Laufschriften mit Aktieninformationen oder Nachrichten am unteren Bildschirmrand usw.) und das Anzeigen von Sendungen im Panorama- oder 4:3-Format. Durch lang anhaltendes Anzeigen von Standbildern kann es zum Einbrennen der Bildern auf dem LED-Bildschirm kommen, wodurch die Bildqualität beeinträchtigt wird. Um diese Gefahr zu vermindern, befolgen Sie bitte die nachfolgenden Empfehlungen: • Vermeiden Sie die Anzeige von Standbildern über einen längeren Zeitraum. • Versuchen Sie immer, Bilder als Vollbild anzuzeigen. Verwenden Sie das Bildformatmenü des Fernsehgeräts, um bestmögliche Übereinstimmung zu erzielen. • Durch Reduzieren von Helligkeit und Kontrast tragen Sie dazu bei, das Entstehen von Nachbildern zu vermeiden. • Verwenden Sie alle Funktionen des Fernsehgeräts, mit denen Nachbilder und Einbrennen reduziert werden. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im e-Manual. Pflegen des Fernsehgeräts - Wenn am Fernsehbildschirm ein Aufkleber angebracht wurde, können beim Entfernen des Aufklebers einige wenige Rückstände zurückbleiben. Bitte entfernen Sie diese Rückstände, ehe Sie das Gerät verwenden. - Beim Reinigen können Kratzer auf dem Gehäuse und dem Bildschirm des Geräts entstehen. Wischen Sie das Gehäuse und den Bildschirm vorsichtig mit einem weichen Tuch ab, um Kratzer zu vermeiden. Spritzen Sie weder Wasser noch Reinigungsmittel direkt auf das Gerät. Jede Flüssigkeit, die in das Gerät eindringt, kann zu einer Funktionsstörung, einem Brand oder einem Stromschlag führen. Schalten Sie das Fernsehgerät aus. Wischen Sie Schmutzflecken und Fingerabdrücke auf dem Bildschirm dann vorsichtig mit einem Mikrofasertuch weg. Reinigen Sie die Gehäuse des Geräts mit einem weichen Tuch, das Sie mit einer kleinen Menge Wasser angefeuchtet haben. Verwenden Sie keine entzündlichen Flüssigkeiten (z. B. Benzol, Verdünner) oder Reinigungsmittel. Geben Sie bei hartnäckigen Flecken eine geringe Menge Bildschirmreiniger auf das Tuch. Deutsch Deutsch - 9 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 9 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:56 Installation des Fernsehgeräts Montieren des Geräts an der Wand Wenn das Gerät an einer Wand montiert werden soll, müssen die Anweisungen des Herstellers unbedingt eingehalten werden. Wenn das Gerät nicht ordnungsgemäß montiert ist, könnte es herunterfallen, ein Kind oder einen Erwachsenen ernsthaft verletzen oder beschädigt werden. Anbringen der Wandhalterung Zur Befestigung des Fernsehgeräts an einer Wand ist eine Wandhalterung (separat erhältlich) erforderlich. Bei Modellen mit Wandhalterungsdaptern bringen Sie zuerst den Adapter (siehe nachfolgende Abbildungen) und dann die Wandhalterung an. - Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie in der Installationsanleitung für die Samsung-Wandhalterung. Ehe Sie die Schrauben für die Wandhalterung befestigen, legen Sie etwas von dem Styropor von der Verpackung auf das Fernsehgerät. Damit schützen Sie es. Legen Sie das Fernsehgerät auf eine weiche Unterlage, und befestigen Sie die Schrauben. - Das Styropormaterial wird bei Fernsehgeräten bis 40 Zoll nicht mitgeliefert. Um sowohl eine Soundbar als auch das Fernsehgerät mit der Wandhalterung an der Wand zu befestigen, bringen Sie zuerst die Soundbar am Fernsehgerät an. Befestigen Sie anschließend das mit der Soundbar verbundene Fernsehgerät an der Wandhalterung. Weitere Informationen entnehmen Sie den Anweisungen, die der Soundbar beiliegen. - Die Verwendung einer Soundbar in Kombination mit einer Wandhalterung ist unter Umständen je nach Region oder Modell nicht möglich. TV Wandhalterungselement C Adapter für die Wandhalterung Detaillierte Informationen zum Montieren der Wandhalterung finden Sie in den Anweisungen, die im Lieferumfang der Wandhalterung enthalten sind. Wir empfehlen Ihnen, sich beim Anbringen der Wandhalterung von einem Techniker helfen zu lassen. Wir raten davon ab, dies selbst zu erledigen. Samsung Electronics haftet nicht für Schäden an Geräten, Gegenständen oder Personen, wenn die Montage der Wandhalterung vom Kunden selbst durchgeführt wird. Hinweise und Spezifikationen zur VESA-Wandhalterung Montieren Sie die Wandhalterung an einer festen Wand, die senkrecht zum Boden steht. Bevor Sie die Wandhalterung an anderen Flächen als Gipskarton anbringen, wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren nächstgelegenen Händler, um weitere Informationen einzuholen. Bei Montage des Fernsehgeräts an einer Decke oder schrägen Wand kann das Fernsehgerät herunterfallen und Verletzungen verursachen. Produktfamilie Bildschirmdiagonale in Zoll Daten der VESAGewindebohrung (A * B) in mm C (mm) Standardschraube Menge LEDFernsehgerät [Gewölbt] 32 200 X 200 27,6 ~ 32,6 40 27,4 ~ 32,4 M8 4 48 ~ 55 400 X 400 27,4 ~ 32,4 Deutsch - 10 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 10 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:56 Befestigen Sie die Wandhalterung nicht, während das Fernsehgerät eingeschaltet ist. Sie könnten dabei einen Stromschlag erhalten und sich verletzen. Verwenden Sie keine Schrauben, die länger sind als in der VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schrauben angegeben. Zu lange Schrauben können Schäden an den inneren Bauteilen des Fernsehgeräts verursachen. • Bei Wandhalterungen, die nicht der VESA-Standardspezifikation für Schrauben entsprechen, hängt die Länge der Schrauben von den Spezifikationen der Wandhalterung ab. • Ziehen Sie die Schrauben nicht zu fest an. Dadurch kann das Gerät beschädigt werden oder herunterfallen und so Verletzungen verursachen. Samsung haftet nicht bei derartigen Unfällen. • Samsung haftet nicht für Geräteschäden oder Verletzungen, wenn eine Wandhalterung verwendet wird, die nicht dem VESA-Standard entspricht oder nicht spezifiziert ist, oder wenn der Verbraucher die Montageanleitung für das Produkt nicht befolgt. • Montieren Sie das Fernsehgerät nicht in einem Winkel von mehr als 15 Grad. • Nehmen Sie die Wandmontage des Fernsehgeräts nur zu zweit vor. Ordnen der Kabel mit Hilfe des Kabelhalters Ausreichende Belüftung Ihres Geräts Halten Sie beim Aufstellen des Geräts einen Abstand von mindestens 10 cm zu anderen Objekten (Wänden, Schrankwänden usw.) ein, um eine ausreichende Belüftung zu gewährleisten. Wenn Sie nicht für eine ausreichende Lüftung sorgen, können aufgrund des Temperaturanstiegs im Innern des Geräts ein Brand oder ein Problem mit dem Gerät die Folge sein. Wenn Sie einen Standfuß oder eine Wandhalterung einsetzen, empfehlen wir Ihnen dringend, ausschließlich Teile von Samsung Electronics zu verwenden. Wenn Sie Teile eines anderen Herstellers verwenden, kann es zu Problemen mit dem Gerät oder zu Verletzungen kommen, weil das Gerät herunterfällt. Installation mit Standfuß Installation mit Wandhalterung 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm Deutsch Deutsch - 11 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 11 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:57 Befestigen des Fernsehgeräts am Standfuß Vergewissern Sie sich, dass Ihnen alle abgebildeten Zubehörteile zur Verfügung stehen, und montieren Sie den Standfuß gemäß den Anweisungen in der mitgelieferten Montageanleitung. Sicherheitshinweis: Befestigen des Geräts an der Wand Achtung: Das Fernsehgerät kann umkippen, wenn Sie daran ziehen, es schieben oder sich daran festhalten. Stellen Sie insbesondere sicher, dass sich keine Kinder an das Fernsehgerät hängen oder es in sonstiger Weise destabilisieren. Dies kann dazu führen, dass das Gerät herunterfällt und schwere oder tödliche Verletzungen verursacht. Beachten Sie alle Anweisungen der Ihrem Fernsehgerät beigefügten Sicherheitshinweise. Für mehr Stabilität und Sicherheit können Sie wie unten beschrieben den Kippschutz erwerben und anbringen. Verwenden des Kippschutzes Dies sind allgemeine Anweisungen. Die Halterungen, Schrauben und das Kabel werden nicht von Samsung mitgeliefert, sondern müssen separat erworben werden. Wir empfehlen Ihnen, hinsichtlich spezieller Werkzeuge und zur Montage des Kippschutzes einen Installationsdienst in Anspruch zu nehmen oder sich an einen professionellen Fernsehtechniker zu wenden. 1. Stecken Sie die Schrauben durch die Halterungen, und befestigen Sie sie sicher an der Wand. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Schrauben gut halten. - Je nach Ausführung der Wand benötigen Sie zum Befestigen weiteres Material, wie z. B. Dübel. 2. Entfernen Sie die Schrauben in der Mitte auf der Rückseite des Fernsehgeräts. Setzen Sie diese Schrauben in die Halterungen ein, und befestigen Sie die Schrauben dann wieder am Fernsehgerät. - Die Schrauben werden möglicherweise nicht zusammen mit dem Gerät geliefert. Kaufen Sie in diesem Fall Schrauben entsprechend den folgenden Angaben. 3. Verbinden Sie die Halterungen an der Wand und die Halterung am Fernsehgerät mit einem stabilen und reißfesten Kabel miteinander, und ziehen Sie es dann fest. - Stellen Sie das Fernsehgerät in der Nähe der Wand auf, damit es nicht nach hinten kippen kann. - Achten Sie darauf, dass die Halterungen an der Wand auf derselben Höhe oder tiefer liegen als die Halterungen am Gerät, wenn Sie die mit dem Kabel miteinander verbinden. - Lösen Sie das Kabel, ehe Sie das Fernsehgerät bewegen. 4. Stellen Sie sicher, das alle Verbindungen fest sitzen. Kontrollieren Sie die Verbindungen regelmäßig auf Anzeichen von Abnutzung und Verschleiß. Bei Zweifeln hinsichtlich der Sicherheit Ihrer Halterungen wenden Sie sich an einen professionellen Installationsbetrieb. Deutsch - 12 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 12 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:57 Technische Daten und weitere Informationen Technische Daten Bildschirmauflösung 1920 x 1080 Umgebungsbedingungen Temperatur (im Betrieb) Luftfeuchtigkeit (im Betrieb) Temperatur (bei Lagerung) Luftfeuchtigkeit (bei Lagerung) 10 °C bis 40 °C (50 °F bis 104 °F) 10 % bis 80 %, nicht kondensierend -20 °C bis 45 °C (-4 °F bis 113 °F) 5 % bis 95 %, nicht kondensierend Drehbarer Standfuß (Links / Rechts) 0˚ Modellbezeichnung UE32J6300 / UE32J6370 UE40J6300 / UE40J6370 Bildschirmgröße (Diagonal) 32 Zoll (80 cm) 40 Zoll (101 cm) Bildschirmwölbung 3,000R 3,000R Ton (Ausgang) 20 W (L: 10 W, R: 10 W) Abmessungen (B × H × T) Gehäuse Mit Standfuß 730,3 x 428,2 x 91,5 mm 730,3 x 485,0 x 207,5 mm 915,9 x 533,6 x 104,1 mm 915,9 x 599,6 x 288,0 mm Gewicht Ohne Standfuß Mit Standfuß 5,2 kg 5,6 kg 7,6 kg 8,6 kg Modellbezeichnung UE48J6300 / UE48J6370 UE55J6300 / UE55J6370 Bildschirmgröße (Diagonal) 48 Zoll (121 cm) 55 Zoll (138 cm) Bildschirmwölbung 3,000R 4,200R Ton (Ausgang) 20 W (L: 10 W, R: 10 W) Abmessungen (B × H × T) Gehäuse Mit Standfuß 1082,2 x 628,2 x 118,7 mm 1082,2 x 693,3 x 310,5 mm 1239,1 x 715,8 x 113,7 mm 1239,1 x 781,6 x 310,5 mm Gewicht Ohne Standfuß Mit Standfuß 11,3 kg 12,3 kg 16,1 kg 17,1 kg - Änderung der technischen Daten und des Gerätedesigns vorbehalten. - Die technischen Daten zur benötigten Netzspannung und Informationen zum Energieverbrauch finden Sie auf dem Etikett am Gerät. - Der typische Stromverbrauch wird gemäß IEC 62087 Ed.2 gemessen. Verringern des Stromverbrauchs Wenn Sie das Gerät ausschalten, wechselt es in den Standby-Modus. Im Standby-Modus verbraucht es weiterhin eine gewisse Menge an Strom. Wenn Sie das Fernsehgerät längere Zeit nicht verwenden, sollten Sie daher den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose ziehen, um den Stromverbrauch zu senken. Deutsch Deutsch - 13 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 13 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:58 Lizenzen The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Empfehlung - Nur EU Hiermit erklärt Samsung Electronics, dass dieses Fernsehgerät mit allen wesentlichen Anforderungen und sonstigen relevanten Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG konform ist. Die offizielle Konformitätserklärung finden Sie unter http://www.samsung.com. Wechseln Sie dort zu Support > Produktsuche, und geben Sie den Modellnamen ein. Dieses Gerät ist ausschließlich für die Verwendung in geschlossenen Räumen geeignet. Dieses Gerät kann in allen Ländern in der EU verwendet werden. Ordnungsgemäße Entsorgung dieses Geräts (Elektro- & Elektronik-Altgeräte) (Anwendbar in Ländern mit Systemen zur getrennten Sammlung von Wertstoffen). Diese Kennzeichnung auf dem Gerät, dem Zubehör oder der Dokumentation bedeutet, dass das Gerät sowie das elektronische Zubehör (z. B. Ladegerät, Headset, USB-Kabel) am Ende ihrer Lebensdauer nicht im normalen Hausmüll entsorgt werden dürfen. Entsorgen Sie diese Geräte bitte getrennt von anderen Abfällen, um der Umwelt bzw. der menschlichen Gesundheit nicht durch unkontrollierte Müllbeseitigung zu schaden. Recyceln Sie das Gerät, um die nachhaltige Wiederverwertung von stofflichen Ressourcen zu fördern. Private Nutzer sollten den Händler, bei dem das Produkt gekauft wurde, oder die zuständigen Behörden kontaktieren, um in Erfahrung zu bringen, wie sie das Gerät auf umweltfreundliche Weise recyceln können. Gewerbliche Nutzer wenden sich an ihren Lieferanten und überprüfen die Konditionen ihres Kaufvertrags. Dieses Gerät und seine elektronischen Zubehörteile dürfen nicht zusammen mit anderem Gewerbemüll entsorgt werden. Ordnungsgemäße Entsorgung der Batterien in diesem Gerät (Anwendbar in Ländern mit Systemen zur getrennten Sammlung von Wertstoffen). Diese Kennzeichnung auf der Batterie, dem Handbuch oder der Verpackung bedeutet, dass die Batterien am Ende ihrer Lebensdauer nicht im normalen Hausmüll entsorgt werden dürfen. Die Kennzeichnung mit den chemischen Symbolen „Hg“, „Cd“ oder „Pb“ bedeutet, dass die Batterie Quecksilber, Cadmium oder Blei in Mengen enthält, die die Grenzwerte der EU-Direktive 2006/66 übersteigen. Wenn Batterien nicht ordnungsgemäß entsorgt werden, können diese Substanzen die Gesundheit von Menschen oder die Umwelt gefährden. Zum Schutz der natürlichen Ressourcen und zur Förderung der Wiederverwertung von Materialien trennen Sie die Batterien von anderem Müll, und führen Sie sie Ihrem örtlichen Recyclingsystem zu. Deutsch - 14 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 14 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:59 This page is intentionally left blank. [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 15 2015-03-27 오후 3:59:59 Waarschuwing! Belangrijke veiligheidsvoorschriften (Lees de instructies door voordat u de televisie gebruikt.) LET OP NIET OPENEN, KANS OP ELEKTRISCHE SCHOKKEN LET OP: VERWIJDER DE BEHUIZING (OF ACHTERZIJDE) NIET, OM ELEKTRISCHE SCHOKKEN TE VOORKOMEN. DIT APPARAAT BEVAT GEEN ONDERDELEN DIE DE GEBRUIKER ZELF KAN REPAREREN. LAAT ONDERHOUD UITVOEREN DOOR BEVOEGD PERSONEEL. Dit symbool geeft aan dat de spanning binnen in het apparaat hoog is. Elk contact met onderdelen binnen in het product is gevaarlijk. Dit symbool geeft aan dat er belangrijke informatie over het gebruik en onderhoud is meegeleverd met dit product. De sleuven en openingen in de kast en aan de achterzijde of onderzijde zijn aangebracht voor de noodzakelijke ventilatie. Om een betrouwbare werking van dit apparaat te verzekeren en het tegen oververhitting te beschermen, mogen deze sleuven en openingen nooit worden geblokkeerd of afgedekt. - Plaats het apparaat niet in een kleine ruimte, zoals een boekenkast of inbouwkast, tenzij er voldoende ventilatie aanwezig is. - Plaats het apparaat niet dicht bij of boven op een radiator of verwarmingsrooster, of op een plek waar het aan zonlicht blootstaat. - Plaats geen vloeistofhoudende objecten (vazen e.d.) op het apparaat, aangezien dit risico oplevert op brand of elektrische schokken. Stel dit apparaat niet bloot aan regen en installeer het niet in de buurt van water (bij een badkuip, wasbak, aanrecht of wasmachine, in een vochtige kelder, in de buurt van een zwembad enz.). Als dit apparaat per ongeluk nat wordt, haalt u de stekker uit het stopcontact en neemt u onmiddellijk contact op met een erkende dealer. Dit apparaat maakt gebruik van batterijen. In uw gemeenschap zijn wellicht milieuvoorschriften van kracht die vereisen dat u deze batterijen op gepaste wijze afvoert. Neem contact op met de plaatselijke overheidsinstantie voor informatie over wegwerpen of recycling. Voorkom overbelasting van stopcontacten, verlengsnoeren en adapters om de kans op brand of elektrische schokken zoveel mogelijk uit te sluiten. Elektriciteitssnoeren dienen zodanig te worden gelegd dat er niet op wordt getrapt en dat ze niet worden afgeknepen doordat er voorwerpen op of tegenaan worden geplaatst. Let met name op de stekker, het stopcontact en het punt waar de snoeren het apparaat verlaten. Bij onweer of wanneer u het apparaat langere tijd niet gebruikt, haalt u de stekker uit het stopcontact en verwijdert u de antenne of de kabel. Dit voorkomt schade aan het apparaat als gevolg van bliksem en stroompieken. Controleer of het voltage van de gelijkstroomadapter (DC) met het lokale stroomnet overeenkomt voordat u het wisselstroomsnoer (AC) op de DC-adapter aansluit. Steek nooit metalen voorwerpen in de openingen van het apparaat. Hierdoor loopt u het risico een elektrische schok te krijgen. Raak nooit de binnenkant van het apparaat aan. Dit om het risico op een elektrische schok te voorkomen. Dit apparaat mag alleen door gekwalificeerde technici worden geopend. Zorg dat de stekker correct en stevig is aangesloten. Wanneer u de stekker uit het stopcontact trekt, houd dan altijd de stekker zelf vast en niet het snoer. Trek nooit aan het netsnoer. Raak het netsnoer niet aan met natte handen. Als dit apparaat niet naar behoren werkt en met name als het ongebruikelijke geluiden en geurtjes afgeeft, haalt u onmiddellijk de stekker uit het stopcontact en neemt u contact op met een erkende dealer of erkend servicecentrum. Haal altijd de stekker uit het stopcontact als de tv langere tijd ongebruikt blijft of als u voor langere tijd van huis gaat (met name als er kinderen, bejaarden of gehandicapten alleen in huis achterblijven). - Ophoping van stof kan resulteren in een elektrische schok, weglekkend stroom of brand doordat het netsnoer vonken afgeeft en verhit raakt of het isolatiemateriaal beschadigd raakt. Neem contact op met een erkend servicecentrum als u het apparaat installeert in een omgeving met veel stof, hoge of lage temperaturen of een hoge vochtigheidsgraad, op een plaats waar gewerkt wordt met chemische oplossingen of waar het apparaat 24 uur per dag in werking is, zoals een luchthaven of treinstation. Als u dit niet doet, kan er schade aan het apparaat ontstaan. Gebruik uitsluitend een goed geaarde stekker en stopcontact. - Verkeerde aarding kan een elektrische schok of schade aan het apparaat veroorzaken. (Alleen apparatuur van klasse 1.) Haal de stekker uit het stopcontact als u het apparaat helemaal wilt uitschakelen. Zorg dat u eenvoudig bij het stopcontact en de stekker kan. Laat kinderen niet op het apparaat leunen. Bewaar de accessoires (batterij enz.) op een veilige plaats buiten het bereik van kinderen. Plaats het apparaat niet op een instabiele locatie (zoals een losse plank, een schuin aflopende ondergrond of een locatie waar het apparaat wordt blootgesteld aan trillingen). Laat het product niet vallen en stoot er niet tegenaan. Als het apparaat is beschadigd, moet u het apparaat uitschakelen, de stekker uit het stopcontact halen en contact opnemen met een servicecentrum. Reinig dit apparaat door het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen en veeg het product schoon met een zachte, droge doek. Gebruik geen chemische middelen zoals was, benzeen, alcohol, verdunningsmiddelen, insectenwerende middelen, luchtverfrissers, smeermiddelen of reinigingsmiddelen. Dergelijke chemische stoffen kunnen lelijke plekken veroorzaken op de televisie of ervoor zorgen dat de opdruk erop wordt verwijderd. Stel dit apparaat niet bloot aan water of andere vloeistoffen. Werp de batterijen niet in het vuur. De batterijen mogen niet worden gedemonteerd, kortgesloten of oververhit. Er bestaat explosiegevaar als u de gebruikte batterijen uit de afstandsbediening vervangt door het verkeerde type batterij. Vervang batterijen alleen door andere van hetzelfde type. WAARSCHUWING - HOUD KAARSEN OF ANDERE ZAKEN MET OPEN VUUR TE ALLEN TIJDE UIT DE BUURT VAN DIT APPARAAT, OM BRAND TE VOORKOMEN. * De afbeeldingen en illustraties in deze gebruiksaanwijzing dienen alleen ter referentie en kunnen afwijken van het werkelijke uiterlijk van het product. Het ontwerp en de specificaties van het product kunnen zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving worden gewijzigd. GOS-talen (Russisch, Oekraïens, Kazachs) zijn niet beschikbaar voor dit product aangezien het is vervaardigd voor klanten in de EU. Nederlands - 2 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 2 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:00 Inhoud van de verpakking Afstandsbediening & batterijen (AAA x 2) Handleiding inzake voorschriften Gebruiksaanwijzing Netsnoer Garantiekaart (niet op alle locaties beschikbaar) CI-kaartadapter Kabelgids Hulpstuk voor wandmontage - Controleer of de volgende onderdelen bij uw tv zijn meegeleverd. Neem contact op met de verkoper als er onderdelen ontbreken. - De vorm en kleur van de onderdelen kunnen per model verschillen. - Niet-meegeleverde kabels kunnen apart worden aangeschaft. - Open de doos en controleer of er geen accessoires achter of in het verpakkingsmateriaal zijn verborgen. In de volgende gevallen kunnen administratiekosten in rekening worden gebracht: (a) Als op uw verzoek een monteur wordt gestuurd maar het product niet defect is (wanneer u hebt nagelaten deze gebruiksaanwijzing te lezen). (b) Als u het apparaat naar een reparatiecentrum brengt maar het product niet defect is (wanneer u hebt nagelaten deze gebruiksaanwijzing te lezen). U wordt over de hoogte van de administratiekosten geïnformeerd voordat er een monteur langskomt. Waarschuwing: Schermen kunnen beschadigd raken door directe druk als er niet correct mee wordt omgegaan. Het wordt aanbevolen de televisie bij het optillen aan de randen vast te houden, zoals weergegeven. Raak dit scherm niet aan! De controller van de tv gebruiken U kunt de controller van de tv aan de achterkant van de televisie gebruiken in plaats van de afstandsbediening om de meeste functies van uw televisie te bedienen. Bedieningsstick De Bedieningsstick bevindt zich in de linkeronderhoek van de achterkant van de televisie. Menu Beheer : Hiermee opent u Smart Hub. : Hiermee selecteert u een bron. : Hiermee opent u het menu. : Hiermee schakelt u de televisie uit. Sensor voor de afstandsbediening Nederlands Nederlands - 3 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 3 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:01 Televisiecamera aansluiten - De televisiecamera wordt afzonderlijk verkocht. - Zorg dat u alleen de televisiecamera aansluit op de TV CAMERA-poort. CI-KAART AANSLUITEN (uw kaart om televisie te kijken) - Schakel de televisie uit om een CI-kaart aan te sluiten of los te koppelen. - Voor meer informatie over het gebruik van CI- of CI+-kaart raadpleegt u het hoofdstuk "Systeem en ondersteuning > Aansluiten op een kaartsleuf voor televisieweergave" in de e-Manual. De CI-kaartadapter bevestigen Er is een CI-kaartadapter leverbaar zodat bij de tv, afhankelijk van het model, twee verschillende CI-kaarten kunnen worden gebruikt. Het wordt aanbevolen de CI-kaartadapter te bevestigen en de CI-kaart te plaatsen voordat u de televisie aan de wand bevestigt, want het kan lastig en gevaarlijk zijn om dit te doen wanneer de tv aan de wand hangt. De CI- of CI+-kaart gebruiken Voor betaalde kanalen moet een CI- of CI+-kaart zijn geplaatst. Nederlands - 4 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 4 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:01 De afstandsbediening E-MANUAL: Hiermee wordt de e-Manual geopend. EXTRA: Hiermee wordt verwante informatie weergegeven over het huidige programma. AD/SUBT.: Hiermee wordt Toegankelijkheidssnelkoppelingen weergegeven. P.MODE / PICTURE: Hiermee wijzigt u de beeldmodus. P.SIZE / PIC SIZE: Het beeldformaat instellen. SEARCH: Hiermee voert u de functie Zoeken uit. Hiermee kunt u de beschikbare videobronnen weergeven en selecteren. Hiermee schakelt u Sportmodus in of uit. Hiermee kunt u het geluid in-/ uitschakelen. Hiermee worden Smart Hub-toepassingen geopend. Zie in de e-Manual het hoofdstuk, Slimme functies > Smart Hub. Hiermee wordt van kanaal gewisseld. Hiermee wordt de EPG (elektronische programmagids) weergegeven. Hiermee wordt de televisie in- of uitgeschakeld. Biedt rechtstreeks toegang tot kanalen. Hiermee wordt het volume geregeld. Hiermee word de Kanalenlijst geopend. Hiermee selecteert u Teletekst AAN, Dubbel, Mix of UIT. Hiermee wordt teruggegaan naar het vorige kanaal. Hiermee geeft u het menu weer op het scherm. TOOLS: Hiermee kunnen veelgebruikte functies snel worden geselecteerd. INFO: Hiermee geeft u informatie weer over het actuele programma of de inhoud ervan. RETURN: Hiermee wordt teruggegaan naar het vorige menu of kanaal. EXIT: Hiermee wordt het menu afgesloten. Gebruik deze toetsen volgens de aanwijzingen op het televisiescherm. Gebruik deze toetsen bij speciale functies. Gebruik deze toetsen volgens de aanwijzingen op het televisiescherm. Hiermee verplaatst u de focus en wijzigt u de waarden die in het menu van de televisie worden weergegeven. E (Invoeren): Hiermee selecteert u een gemarkeerd item of voert u het uit. - Houd ingedrukt om deGidsweer te geven. N De werkelijke namen van de bovenstaande toetsen kunnen verschillen. N De afstandsbediening kan verschillen afhankelijk van het model. Batterijen in de afstandsbediening plaatsen Pas de polariteit van de batterijen aan de symbolen op het batterijvak aan. - Gebruik de afstandsbediening binnen een afstand van 7 meter van de televisie. - Fel licht kan de werking van de afstandsbediening beïnvloeden. Vermijd gebruik in de nabijheid van felle tl-lichten of neonborden. - De vorm en kleur van de afstandsbediening kunnen afhankelijk van het model variëren. Nederlands Nederlands - 5 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 5 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:02 Verbinden met een netwerk Als u de televisie met een netwerk verbindt, krijgt u toegang tot online diensten zoals Smart Huben tot software-updates. Netwerkverbinding - Draadloos Maak verbinding met internet op de televisie via een standaardrouter of -modem. Draadloze IP-router of modem met een DHCP-server LAN-kabel (niet meegeleverd) De LAN-aansluiting aan de wand Netwerkverbinding - Bekabeld Achterpaneel van tv Maak verbinding met het netwerk via een LAN-kabel. - Gebruik een categorie 7-kabel voor de verbinding. Nederlands - 6 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 6 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:03 De e-Manual De ingebouwde e-Manual (elektronische handleiding) bevat informatie over de belangrijkste functies van uw televisie. - Op de website van Samsung kunt u een afdrukbaar exemplaar van de elektronische handleiding downloaden en bekijken. De e-Manual weergeven: • Druk op de toets E-MANUAL op de afstandsbediening. • Selecteer Ondersteuning > e-Manual op het televisiemenu. Gebruik de beschikbare toetsen op het hoofdscherm van de e-Manual Zoeken Kies een item in de lijst met resultaten om de bijbehorende pagina weer te geven. Index Selecteer een trefwoord om naar de relevante pagina te gaan. Geopende pagina Selecteer een onderwerp in de lijst met onlangs bekeken onderwerpen. Het bijbehorende menuscherm van een onderwerp uit de e-Manual openen Probeer nu Open het bijbehorende menu-item en probeer de functie direct uit. Koppelen Open een in de e-Manual genoemd onderwerp. Het bijbehorende onderwerp uit de e-Manual van een menuscherm openen Druk op de toets E-MANUAL op de afstandsbediening om het e-Manual-onderwerp over de huidige functie in het schermmenu te lezen. - De e-Manual is niet toegankelijk vanuit bepaalde menu's. De e-Manual bijwerken met de nieuwste versie U kunt de e-Manual op dezelfde manier bijwerken als apps. Eerste instelling Wanneer de televisie voor het eerst wordt aangezet, wordt het dialoogvenster voor de eerste instelling weergegeven. Volg de instructies op het scherm om het eerste installatieproces te beëindigen. Gebruikers kunnen op een later tijdstip dit proces handmatig uitvoeren via het menu Systeem > Instellingen. - Als u een willekeurig apparaat aansluit op HDMI1 voordat u de installatie start, wordt Kanaal Bron automatisch gewijzigd in Settopbox. - Als u Settopbox niet wilt selecteren, selecteert u Antenne. Nederlands Nederlands - 7 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 7 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:03 Problemen oplossen en onderhoud Problemen oplossen Als er een probleem met de televisie lijkt te zijn, bekijkt u eerst deze lijst met mogelijke problemen en oplossingen. U kunt daarnaast ook het gedeelte "Problemen oplossen" in de e-Manual doornemen. Als geen van de tips in deze lijst van toepassing zijn, gaat u naar "www.samsung.com" en klikt u daar op Ondersteuning, of neemt u contact op met een van de callcenters die u op de achterkant van deze handleiding vindt. - Het paneel van dit TFT LED-scherm bestaat uit subpixels die met geavanceerde technologie zijn geproduceerd. Het scherm kan echter enkele heldere of donkere pixels bevatten. Deze pixels zijn niet van invloed op de prestaties van het product. - U kunt uw televisie in optimale conditie houden door een upgrade naar de nieuwste firmware uit te voeren. Gebruik de functies Nu bijwerken of Automatische update op het menu van de tv (MENU > Ondersteuning > Software-update > Nu bijwerken of MENU > Ondersteuning > Software-update > Automatische update). Problemen Oplossingen en uitleg De tv is niet ingeschakeld. Controleer of het netsnoer is aangesloten en of de afstandsbediening volle batterijen heeft en correct werkt. Als het netsnoer correct is aangesloten en de afstandsbediening normaal werkt, kan het probleem bij de antenneaansluiting liggen of is de kabelbox/settopbox mogelijk niet ingeschakeld. Controleer de antenneaansluiting of schakel de kabelbox/settopbox in. De tv kan niet worden ingeschakeld. Controleer of het netsnoer correct is aangesloten op de televisie en het stopcontact. Controleer of het stopcontact werkt. Druk op de knop P op de televisie om te controleren of het probleem niet bij de afstandsbediening ligt. Als de tv wordt ingeschakeld, raadpleegt u "De afstandsbediening werkt niet" hieronder. Er is geen beeld/video. Controleer de kabelaansluitingen. Koppel alle kabels los die op de televisie en externe apparaten zijn aangesloten en sluit deze vervolgens weer aan. Stel de video-uitgangen van de externe apparaten (kabelbox/settopbox, dvd, Blu-ray, enz.) zo in dat deze overeenkomen met de ingangen van de televisie. Als bijvoorbeeld de HDMI-uitgang van een extern apparaat wordt gebruikt, sluit deze dan op de HDMI-ingang van de tv aan. Controleer of de aangesloten apparaten zijn ingeschakeld. Zorg dat u de juiste ingangsbron selecteert. Start het aangesloten apparaat opnieuw op door het netsnoer van het apparaat los te koppelen en vervolgens opnieuw aan te sluiten. De afstandsbediening werkt niet. Vervang de batterijen van de afstandsbediening. Zorg dat de batterijen met de polen (+/–) in de juiste richting zijn geplaatst. Reinig het venster van de zender op de afstandsbediening. Richt de afstandsbediening vanaf circa 1,5 tot 1,8 meter afstand rechtstreeks op de televisie. De tv kan niet worden inof uitgeschakeld met de afstandsbediening van de kabelbox/settopbox of het volume kan niet worden geregeld. Programmeer de afstandsbediening voor de kabelbox/settopbox zodanig dat deze werkt voor de tv. Raadpleeg de gebruiksaanwijzing van uw kabelbox/settopbox voor de code voor de SAMSUNG-televisie. Nederlands - 8 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 8 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:04 De toegangscode van de televisie wijzigen (Systeem > PIN wijzigen) 1. Voer PIN wijzigen uit en geef de huidige toegangscode op in het veld voor de toegangscode. Het standaardwachtwoord is “0-0-0-0” (voor Frankrijk: “1-1-1-1”). 2. Voer een nieuwe toegangscode in en herhaal deze ter bevestiging. De toegangscode is nu gewijzigd. - Als u de toegangscode bent vergeten, drukt u achtereenvolgens op de volgende toetsen zodat de code opnieuw wordt ingesteld op “0-0-0-0” (voor Frankrijk : “1-1-1-1”): Voor standaardafstandsbediening: in de standby-stand: MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Aan) Eco-sensor en helderheid van het scherm Eco-sensor past de helderheid van de tv automatisch aan. Deze functie meet het licht in de ruimte en optimaliseert de helderheid van de televisie automatisch om het energieverbruik te verminderen. Als u dit wilt uitschakelen, gaat u naar MENU > Systeem > ECO-oplossing > ECO-sensor. - Als het scherm te donker is wanneer u televisie kijkt in een donkere omgeving, wordt dit mogelijk veroorzaakt door de ECOsensor. - Zorg ervoor dat de sensor niet wordt geblokkeerd. Hierdoor kan de helderheid van het beeld worden verminderd. Waarschuwing over stilstaand beeld Vermijd de weergave van stilstaande beelden (zoals JPEG-afbeeldingsbestanden) of statische beeldelementen (zoals het logo van televisiezenders, balken met aandelenkoersen of nieuws onder aan het scherm) of programma's in panorama- of 4:3-formaat op het scherm. Wanneer er langdurig statische beelden op het LED-scherm worden weergegeven, kan het beeld inbranden. Dit kan ten koste gaan van de beeldkwaliteit. Volg de onderstaande aanbevelingen op om de kans hierop te verkleinen: • Vermijd langdurige weergave van stilstaand beeld. • Probeer altijd beelden schermvullend weer te geven. Gebruik het menu voor het beeldformaat van de televisie om een optimale keuze te maken. • Verminderen van contrast en helderheid helpt inbranden van het scherm te voorkomen. • Gebruik alle televisiefuncties die zijn bedoeld om beeldretentie en het inbranden van het scherm tegen te gaan. Raadpleeg de e-Manual voor nadere details. De televisie verzorgen - Als u stickers van het televisiescherm verwijdert, blijven er mogelijk wat resten achter. Verwijder de resten van het scherm voordat u gaat televisiekijken. - Bij het reinigen van de behuizing en het scherm van de tv kunnen er krassen ontstaan. Zorg ervoor dat u de behuizing en het scherm voorzichtig afneemt met een zachte doek om krassen te voorkomen. Spuit geen water of een andere vloeistof rechtstreeks op de televisie. Vloeistoffen die in het product terechtkomen kunnen een storing, brand of elektrische schok veroorzaken. Schakel de televisie uit en veeg vlekken en vingerafdrukken op het scherm voorzichtig weg met een microvezeldoek. Reinig de behuizing van de televisie met een zachte doek die licht met water is bevochtigd. Gebruik geen ontvlambare vloeistoffen (zoals wasbenzine, thinner, enz.) of een reinigingsmiddel. Spuit voor hardnekkige vlekken een kleine hoeveelheid schermreiniger op de doek. Nederlands Nederlands - 9 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 9 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:04 Installatie van de televisie De televisie aan de wand monteren Als u dit product aan de wand monteert, mag dit uitsluitend gebeuren op de wijze zoals door de fabrikant wordt aanbevolen. Als het niet juist is bevestigd, kan het product verschuiven of vallen, wat ernstig letsel bij kinderen en volwassen en ernstige schade aan het product kan veroorzaken. De wandmontageset installeren Met de wandmontageset (afzonderlijk verkrijgbaar) kunt u de televisie aan de muur bevestigen. Bij modellen met meegeleverde hulpstukken voor wandbevestiging, installeer ze als onderstaand afgebeeld voordat u de wandmontageset installeert. - Raadpleeg de installatiegids die bij de Samsung-wandmontageset is meegeleverd. Plaats het piepschuim uit de verpakking van de tv op de televisie om deze te beschermen voordat u de schroeven voor de wandbevestiging monteert. Leg dan de tv neer en bevestig de schroeven. - Er wordt geen piepschuim geleverd bij televisies van 40 inch of kleiner. Als u de soundbar en de tv met behulp van de wandbevestiging wilt monteren, moet u de soundbar eerst aan de tv monteren en vervolgens de tv/soundbar-combinatie aan de wandmontage. Zie voor gedetailleerde informatie de instructies die bij de soundbar zijn geleverd. - Installatie van de soundbar met behulp van de wandbevestiging wordt mogelijk niet ondersteund voor de specifieke regio of model. Beugel voor Televisie wandmontage C Hulpstuk voor wandmontage Zie de instructies bij de wandmontageset als u wilt weten hoe u de wandmontageset installeert. Wij adviseren u contact op te nemen met een technicus voor assistentie bij het installeren van de wandbeugel. Wij raden aan dat u dit niet zelf doet. Samsung Electronics is niet verantwoordelijk voor schade aan het product of voor verwondingen die u zelf of anderen oplopen wanneer u besluit de wandmontageset zelfstandig te installeren. Notities en specificaties voor de wandmontageset (VESA) U kunt de wandmontageset op een stevige wand plaatsen die loodrecht op de vloer staat. Wanneer u de wandbevestiging aan andere oppervlakken dan gipsplaat wilt bevestigen, neemt u contact op met de dichtstbijzijnde dealer. Als u de tv aan het plafond of een schuine wand monteert, kan de tv vallen en leiden tot zwaar lichamelijk letsel. Productgroep Afmeting van de tv in inches Specificatie van de VESAschroefgaten (A * B) in millimeters C (mm) Standaardschroef Hoeveelheid LED-televisie [Gebogen] 32 200 X 200 27,6 ~ 32,6 40 27,4 ~ 32,4 M8 4 48 ~ 55 400 X 400 27,4 ~ 32,4 Nederlands - 10 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 10 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:05 Plaats de wandbevestigingsset niet terwijl de tv is ingeschakeld. Dit kan leiden tot lichamelijk letsel door elektrische schokken. Gebruik geen schroeven die langer zijn dan de standaardafmeting of die niet aan de standaard VESAnormen voor schroeven voldoen. Schroeven die te lang zijn, kunnen de binnenkant van de televisie beschadigen. • Voor wandmontagesets die niet voldoen aan de standaardspecificaties voor VESA-schroeven, kan de lengte van de schroeven afwijken, afhankelijk van de specificaties voor wandmontage. • Draai de schroeven niet te vast. Dit zou ertoe kunnen leiden dat het product beschadigt raakt of valt, wat kan resulteren in lichamelijk letsel. Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor dit soort ongelukken. • Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor productschade of lichamelijk letsel wanneer een niet-VESA of nietgespecificeerde wandbevestiging is gebruikt of wanneer de consument de installatie-instructies voor het product niet in acht heeft genomen. • Bevestig de televisie niet in een hoek van meer dan 15 graden. • Bevestig de tv altijd met twee mensen aan de wand. De kabels opbergen met behulp van de kabelgids Zorgen voor geschikte ventilatie voor uw tv Houd bij het installeren van uw tv een afstand van ten minste 10 cm aan tussen de tv en andere voorwerpen (wanden, zijkanten van de kast enzovoort) zodat er een goede ventilatie mogelijk is. Wanneer u niet voor een goede ventilatie zorgt, kan dit door een stijging van de interne temperatuur resulteren in brand of andere problemen met het product. Wij adviseren dringend om bij gebruik van een voet of wandbevestiging alleen onderdelen te gebruiken die door Samsung Electronics zijn geleverd. Het gebruik van onderdelen van een andere fabrikant kan leiden tot problemen met het product of zelfs tot lichamelijk letsel doordat het product kan vallen. Plaatsing op een voet Plaatsing met een wandmontage 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm Nederlands Nederlands - 11 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 11 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:06 De televisie op de voet bevestigen Controleer of alle weergegeven accessoires aanwezig zijn en monteer de voet volgens de meegeleverde montage-instructies. Veiligheidsmaatregelen: De tv vastzetten aan de wand Let op: als u duwt of trekt aan de televisie of op de televisie klimt, kan deze vallen. Zorg er vooral voor dat u kinderen niet over de televisie heen hangen of deze omver duwen. Als de televisie omvalt, kan dit tot ernstig letsel of de dood leiden. Neem alle voorzorgsmaatregelen in acht die in de veiligheidsfolder bij uw televisie worden genoemd. Om stabiliteits- en veiligheidsredenen kunt u de antivalvoorziening aanschaffen en installeren, zoals hieronder beschreven. Voorkomen dat de televisie omvalt Dit zijn algemene instructies. De beugels, schroeven en draad worden niet door Samsung meegeleverd. Die moeten apart worden aangeschaft. Raadpleeg een installatieservice of professionele televisie-installateur voor de installatie van specifieke hardware en antivalmateriaal. 1. Plaats de schroeven in de beugels en bevestig deze stevig aan de wand. Controleer of de schroeven stevig in de wand zijn gedraaid. - Afhankelijk van het wandtype hebt u mogelijk extra materiaal nodig om het geheel te verankeren. 2. Verwijder de schroeven in het midden aan de achterkant van de tv, steek de schroeven door de beugels en draai de schroeven weer vast in de tv. - Het is mogelijk dat de schroeven niet bij het product worden meegeleverd. In dat geval moet u schroeven met de volgende specificaties aanschaffen. 3. Verbind de beugels die aan de tv zijn bevestigd met een duurzame, sterke draad aan de beugels die aan de muur zijn bevestigd en knoop de draad stevig vast. - Plaats de televisie dicht bij de muur zodat deze niet achterover kan vallen. - Breng de draad zodanig aan dat de beugels die aan de wand zijn bevestigd zich op gelijke hoogte of lager dan de beugels op de televisie bevinden. - Haal de draad los voordat u de televisie verplaatst. 4. Controleer of alle bevestigingen goed zijn aangebracht. Controleer de bevestigingspunten regelmatig op tekenen van moeheid of verzwakking. Neem bij twijfel over de veiligheid van de bevestiging contact op met een professionele installateur. Nederlands - 12 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 12 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:06 Technische gegevens en overige informatie Technische gegevens Beeldresolutie 1920 x 1080 Omgevingsvereisten Bedrijfstemperatuur Luchtvochtigheid bij in gebruik Opslagtemperatuur Luchtvochtigheid bij opslag 10 °C tot 40 °C (50 °F tot 104 °F) 10% tot 80%, niet-condenserend -20 °C tot 45 °C (-4 °F tot 113 °F) 5% tot 95%, niet-condenserend Draaivoet (links/rechts) 0˚ Modelnaam UE32J6300 / UE32J6370 UE40J6300 / UE40J6370 Schermformaat (diagonaal) 32 inch (80 cm) 40 inch (101 cm) Schermbuiging 3,000R 3,000R Geluid (Uitgang) 20 W (L: 10 W, R: 10 W) Afmetingen (B x H x D) Behuizing Met voet 730,3 x 428,2 x 91,5 mm 730,3 x 485,0 x 207,5 mm 915,9 x 533,6 x 104,1 mm 915,9 x 599,6 x 288,0 mm Gewicht Zonder voet Met voet 5,2 kg 5,6 kg 7,6 kg 8,6 kg Modelnaam UE48J6300 / UE48J6370 UE55J6300 / UE55J6370 Schermformaat (diagonaal) 48 inch (121 cm) 55 inch (138 cm) Schermbuiging 3,000R 4,200R Geluid (Uitgang) 20 W (L: 10 W, R: 10 W) Afmetingen (B x H x D) Behuizing Met voet 1082,2 x 628,2 x 118,7 mm 1082,2 x 693,3 x 310,5 mm 1239,1 x 715,8 x 113,7 mm 1239,1 x 781,6 x 310,5 mm Gewicht Zonder voet Met voet 11,3 kg 12,3 kg 16,1 kg 17,1 kg - De vormgeving en specificaties kunnen zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving worden gewijzigd. - Zie voor informatie over de stroomvoorziening en het energieverbruik het etiket op het product. - Standaard stroomverbruik gemeten overeenkomstig IEC 62087 Ed.2 Het verlagen van het energieverbruik Als u de televisie uitzet, gaat deze naar de Stand-bymodus. In de Stand-bymodus blijft de tv een kleine hoeveelheid stroom verbruiken. U kunt het stroomverbruik verminderen door het netsnoer los te koppelen als u de televisie gedurende lange tijd niet van plan bent te gebruiken. Nederlands Nederlands - 13 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 13 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:06 Licenties The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Aanbeveling - alleen EU Hierbij verklaart Samsung Electronics dat deze televisie voldoet aan de essentiële vereisten en overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC. De officiële conformiteitsverklaring kunt u vinden op http://www.samsung.com. Ga naar Ondersteuning > Zoek product ondersteuning en voer de naam van het model in. De apparatuur is uitsluitend geschikt voor binnengebruik. Deze apparatuur kan in alle EU-landen worden gebruikt. Juiste afvoer van dit product (afvalverwerking van elektrische & elektronische apparatuur) (Van toepassing in landen met afzonderlijke inzamelsystemen) Dit label op het product, de accessoires of de documentatie bij dit product duidt erop dat het product en de bijbehorende elektronische accessoires (bijvoorbeeld de oplader, heetste of UBS-kabel) aan het eind van de levensduur niet mogen worden afgevoerd met het huishoudelijk afval. Om milieuverontreiniging of problemen voor de volksgezondheid als gevolg van ongeregelde afvalverwerking te voorkomen, dient u deze items van het andere afval te scheiden zodat de materialen op verantwoorde wijze kunnen worden hergebruikt. Thuisgebruikers moeten contact opnemen met de winkel waar ze het product gekocht hebben of met de plaatselijke overheidsinstanties als ze willen weten waar en hoe ze deze items op milieuvriendelijke wijze kunnen recyclen. Zakelijke gebruikers dienen contact op te nemen met de leverancier en de voorwaarden en bepalingen van het koopcontract te raadplegen. Dit product en de bijbehorende elektronische accessoires mogen niet samen met ander commercieel afval worden afgevoerd. Juiste afvoer van de batterijen in dit product (Van toepassing in landen met afzonderlijke inzamelsystemen) Wanneer dit symbool op de batterij, de handleiding of de verpakking wordt weergegeven, wordt daarmee aangegeven dat de batterijen in dit product aan het einde van de levensduur niet samen met het gewone huishoudelijk afval mogen worden afgevoerd. Wanneer u de chemische symbolen Hg, Cd of Pb ziet, betekent dit dat de batterij respectievelijk kwik, cadmium of lood boven de referentieniveaus in EU-richtlijn 2006/66 bevat. Als batterijen niet op de juiste wijze worden afgevoerd, kunnen deze stoffen schade aanrichten aan het milieu of de menselijke gezondheid. Om de natuurlijke hulpbronnen te beschermen en hergebruik van materiaal te bevorderen, moet u batterijen scheiden van andere soorten afval en deze via uw plaatselijke, gratis batterij-inzamelsysteem recyclen. Nederlands - 14 [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 14 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:08 This page is intentionally left blank. [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 15 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:08 This page is intentionally left blank. [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 16 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:08 This page is intentionally left blank. [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 17 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:08 © 2015 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. BN68-07076N BN68-07076N-00 Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre. Country Customer Care Centre Web Site AUSTRIA 0800-SAMSUNG (0800-7267864) www.samsung.com/at/support BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/be/support (Dutch) www.samsung.com/be_fr/support (French) BOSNIA 055 233 999 www.samsung.com/support BULGARIA 800 111 31 , Безплатна телефонна линия www.samsung.com/bg/support CROATIA 072 726 786 www.samsung.com/hr/support CZECH 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz/support Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak, s.r.o. V Parku 2343/24, 148 00 - Praha 4 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com/dk/support FINLAND 030-6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi/support FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com/fr/support GERMANY 0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw. 0180 6 7267864* (*0,20 €/Anruf aus dem dt. Festnetz, aus dem Mobilfunk max. 0,60 €/Anruf) www.samsung.com/de/support CYPRUS 8009 4000 only from landline, toll free GREECE 80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726 7864) only from land line www.samsung.com/gr/support (+30) 210 6897691 from mobile and land line HUNGARY 0680SAMSUNG (0680-726-786) 0680PREMIUM (0680-773-648) http://www.samsung.com/hu/support ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/it/support LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/support MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 www.samsung.com/support SLOVENIA 080 697 267 (brezplačna številka) 090 726 786 (0,39 EUR/min) klicni center vam je na voljo od ponedeljka do petka od 9. do 18. ure. www.samsung.com/si/support NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min) www.samsung.com/nl/support NORWAY 815 56480 www.samsung.com/no/support POLAND 801-172-678* lub +48 22 607-93-33 * * (koszt połączenia według taryfy operatora) www.samsung.com/pl/support PORTUGAL 808 20 7267 www.samsung.com/pt/support ROMANIA 08008 726 78 64 (08008 SAMSUNG) Apel GRATUIT www.samsung.com/ro/support SERBIA 011 321 6899 www.samsung.com/rs/support SLOVAKIA 0800 - SAMSUNG (0800-726 786) www.samsung.com/sk/support SPAIN 0034902172678 www.samsung.com/es/support SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (0771-SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/se/support SWITZERLAND 0800 726 78 64 (0800-SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/ch/support (German) www.samsung.com/ch_fr/support (French) UK 0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk/support EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com/ie/support LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com/lt/support LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com/lv/support ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/ee/support TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com/tr/support [UJ6300-XN-ZF]BN68-07076N-00L04.indb 18 2015-03-27 오후 4:00:08 E-MANUAL Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model______________ Serial No.______________ Contents Quick Guides Using Smart Hub 1 Connecting to the Internet 1 Setting up Smart Hub 1 Using Smart Hub Controlling the TV with Your Voice 2 Setting up Voice Recognition 3 Controlling the TV with your voice Controlling the TV with Your Motion 4 Setting up Motion Control 5 Controlling the TV using motions Using the Samsung Smart Control 6 Operating the TV with the POINTER button 7 Setting up the Samsung Smart Control 7 Pairing the TV to the Samsung Smart Control Improving the Viewing Experience of Sports Events 8 Activating Sports Mode Editing Channels 9 Running the Edit Channel function 9 Rearranging or deleting channels Connections Connecting an Antenna (Aerial) Connecting to the Internet 11 Establishing a wired Internet connection 12 Establishing a wireless Internet connection Connecting to a Network via a Mobile Dongle Troubleshooting Internet Connectivity Issues 15 Troubleshooting wired Internet connectivity issues 16 Troubleshooting wireless Internet connectivity issues Connecting Video Devices 17 Connecting with an HDMI cable 18 Connecting with a component cable 18 Connecting with a composite (A/V) cable Audio Input and Output Connections 19 Connecting with an HDMI (ARC) cable 20 Connecting with a digital audio (optical) cable 20 Connecting with headphones 20 Connecting with an audio cable Connecting a Computer 21 Connecting through the HDMI port 22 Connecting with an HDMI-to-DVI cable 22 Connecting through your home network Connecting a Mobile Device 23 Connecting with an MHL-to-HDMI Cable 24 Using Screen Mirroring 25 Connecting mobile devices without a wireless router (Wi-Fi Direct) 26 Connecting a mobile device via Samsung Smart View 2.0 Pairing a laptop to the TV - Wireless PC Mirroring (or KINO TV) Changing the input signal with external devices Connection Notes! 28 Connection notes for HDMI 29 Connection notes for audio devices 29 Connection notes for computers 29 Connection notes for mobile devices 30 Connection notes for Wireless PC Mirroring (or KINO TV) Remote Control and Peripherals About the Samsung Smart Control Using the Samsung Smart Control 33 Operating the TV with the POINTER button 33 Operating the TV with the directional buttons and the Enter button 34 Displaying and using the On-Screen Remote 35 Pairing the TV to the Samsung Smart Control Controlling External Devices with the TV Remote - Using the Universal Remote 36 Setting up the universal remote control II Using the Tools menu on the TV screen Controlling the TV with a Keyboard 38 Connecting a keyboard 39 Using the keyboard Controlling the TV with a Mouse 40 Connecting a USB mouse 40 Using a mouse Connecting a Bluetooth Gamepad Entering Text using the On-Screen QWERTY Keypad 41 Using additional functions Smart Features Smart Hub 43 Removing or pinning an item in the Recent group 43 Launching Smart Hub automatically 43 Testing Smart Hub connections 44 Using the Smart Hub tutorial 44 Resetting Smart Hub Using Smart Hub with a Samsung Account 45 Creating a Samsung account 46 Signing in to a Samsung account 46 Linking your Samsung account to external service accounts 47 Changing and adding information to a Samsung account 47 Deleting a Samsung account from the TV Using the GAMES Service 48 Managing Games with the pop-up Options menu 48 Viewing the Detailed Information screen 49 Installing and running a game 49 Managing downloaded or purchased games Using the Apps Service 51 Managing Downloaded Apps with the pop-up Options menu 52 Installing an app 52 Enabling automatic apps updates 53 Removing an app from the TV 53 Locking and unlocking apps 53 Updating apps 53 Rearranging apps 53 Rating purchased apps 53 Using other app features and functions Using the e-Manual 54 Launching the e-Manual 54 Using the buttons in the e-Manual Using the web browser 55 Browsing preferences Using the MY CONTENT Service 56 Read before playing media content 57 Playing multimedia content in a computer or mobile device 57 Playing media content saved on a USB device 58 Buttons and functions available while viewing photos 59 Buttons and functions available while viewing videos 61 Buttons and functions available while playing music 62 Listening to music in HD quality 62 Functions on the media content list screen Using the NewsON Service 63 News 63 Weather Controlling the TV with Your Voice 65 Read before using voice recognition 65 Learning voice recognition basics 66 Using imperative voice recognition 66 Using interactive voice recognition at a short distance Controlling the TV using Motions (Motion Control) 67 Testing ambient illumination using the TV camera 68 Activating motion control 71 Changing the motion control screen layout II III TV Viewing Viewing Digital Broadcast Information at a Glance 73 Using the guide 74 Checking current programme info 74 Changing the broadcast signal 74 Checking digital channel signal info and strength Recording Programmes 75 Recording programmes 76 Using the functions available while recording a programme 76 Using the buttons on the remote control while recording a programme 77 Managing the schedule recording list 77 Viewing recorded programmes 79 Managing recorded files Setting Up a Schedule Viewing 80 Setting up a schedule viewing for a channel 81 Editing a schedule viewing 81 Cancelling a schedule viewing Using Timeshift 82 Using the buttons on the remote control while using Timeshift Using the Channel List Registering, Removing, and Editing Channels 84 Registering and removing channels 84 Editing registered channels 85 Enabling / Disabling password protection on channels 85 Locking / Unlocking channels 85 Changing channel numbers Creating a Personal Favourites List 86 Registering channels as favourites 86 Viewing and selecting channels on Favourites lists only Editing a Favourites List 87 Using the Edit Favourites screen menu items Making Sports programmes More Realistic with Sports Mode 89 Enabling sports mode 90 Extracting highlights automatically 90 Using the functions available while watching sports in sports mode 92 Viewing a game recorded in sports mode Watching a Movie with Optimised Picture and Sound - African Cinema Mode TV-Viewing Support Features 93 Watching TV broadcasts with subtitles 94 Reading digital text 94 Scanning for available channels 94 Selecting aerial connection type 95 Selecting the broadcast audio language 95 Audio Description 95 Genre Selection 95 Using adult genre Using the Channel Settings 96 Setting the country (area) 96 Tuning broadcast signals manually 97 Fine-Tuning the screen 97 Transferring channel list 97 Deleting CAM operator profile 98 Setting satellite system 98 Changing teletext language 98 Showing common interface menu Picture and Sound Adjusting the Picture Quality 99 Choosing a picture mode 100 Adjusting the picture quality 101 Adjusting advanced settings 102 Adjusting picture options Picture Support Functions 104 Viewing a picture-in-picture (PIP) 105 Changing the picture size and position 106 Listening to audio only (Picture Off) 106 Resetting the picture mode settings IV Adjusting the Sound Quality 107 Choosing a sound mode 108 Applying sound effects Using the Sound Support Functions 109 Selecting speakers 109 Specifying the TV's installation type 109 Listening to TV sound through a Samsung Bluetooth audio device 110 Listening to the TV through Bluetooth headphones 110 Listening to TV sound through a Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speaker 112 Enabling digital audio output 113 Resetting all sound settings System and Support Setting the Time and Using the Timer 114 Setting the current time 116 Using the timers Using the Screen Burn Protection and Energy Saving Functions 118 Preventing screen burn 118 Reducing the energy consumption of the TV Using Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 119 Setting up Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 119 Using Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Updating the TV’s Software 121 Updating the TV’s software to the latest version 121 Updating the TV automatically 122 Updating the TV manually Protecting the TV from Hacking and Malicious Code 122 Checking the TV and connected storage for malicious code 123 Configuring additional functions Using Other Functions 124 Running the accessibility functions quickly 124 Adjusting the menu transparency 124 White text on black background (high contrast) 124 Enlarging font (for the visually impaired) 125 Listening to the TV through Bluetooth headphones (for the hearing impaired) 125 Changing the menu language 125 Setting up a password 125 Checking Notifications 126 Programme Rating Lock 126 Enabling game mode 126 Richer colours and superior picture quality (BD Wise) 126 Enabling/Disabling sound feedback 127 Locking/Unlocking the Control Stick 127 Showing/Hiding the Samsung logo while booting 127 Enabling the TV to boot faster 127 Removing Flickering 128 Registering the TV as a DivX-certified device (watching for pay DivX movies) 128 Restoring the TV to the factory settings 128 Using the TV as a display model (for retail stores) Running Data Service Automatically HbbTV Using a TV Viewing Card (“CI or CI+ Card”) 130 Connecting the “CI or CI+ Card” via COMMON INTERFACE slot 131 Connecting the “CI or CI+ Card” via COMMON INTERFACE slot with the CI CARD Adapter 132 Using the “CI or CI+ Card” Teletext Feature IV V Troubleshooting Getting Support 135 Support through Remote Management 136 Finding the contact information for service There Is a Problem with the Picture 137 Testing the picture I Can't Hear the Sound Clearly 139 Testing the sound There Is a Problem with the Broadcast My Computer Won't Connect I Can't Connect to the Internet Data Service The Schedule Recording/Timeshift Function Isn't Working Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Isn't Working I Have Trouble Launching/Using Apps My File Won't Play I Want to Reset the TV Other Issues Precautions and Notes Before Using the Recording and Timeshift Functions 146 Before using the recording and schedule recording functions 147 Before using the timeshift function S Recommendation disclaimer 148 S Recommendation with voice interaction 148 S Recommendation Read Before Using Voice Recognition, or Motion Control 149 Precautions for Voice Recognition and Motion Control 150 Requirements for using Voice Recognition, or Motion Control Read Before Using Apps Read Before Using the Web Browser Read Before Playing Photo, Video, or Music Files 155 Limitations on use of photo, video, and music files 156 Supported external subtitles 156 Supported internal subtitles 157 Supported image formats and resolutions 157 Supported music formats and codecs 158 Supported video codecs Restrictions 160 Restrictions to PIP (Picture-in-Picture) 160 Flexible CI Read After Installing the TV 161 Picture sizes and input signals 161 Installing an anti-theft lock 162 Read before setting up a wireless Internet connection Read Before Connecting a Computer (Supported Resolutions) 163 IBM 163 MAC 164 VESA DMT Supported Resolutions for Video Signals 165 CEA-861 165 DVI Read Before Using Bluetooth Devices 166 Restrictions on using Bluetooth Licence Glossary VI 1 Using Smart Hub Connecting to the Internet (MENU/123) MENU Network Network Settings Connect the TV to the Internet wired or wirelessly. Setting up Smart Hub Press the button on your remote control. When you start Smart Hub for the first time, the Set Up Smart Hub screen appears. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the required settings and complete the setup. Welcome to Smart Hub The easiest way to access and discover live TV, movies, apps, games and more. Set Up Smart Hub Learn More Using Smart Hub Enjoy the multiple functions provided by Smart Hub on a single screen. " For more information, refer to "Smart Hub." Quick Guides You can learn quickly how to run the most useful functions in operating the TV. Learn how to use Smart Hub and Sports Mode to enjoy the TV quickly. 2 Controlling the TV with Your Voice " This function is only supported for S9 series models. Setting up Voice Recognition (MENU/123) MENU System Voice Recognition Finish the settings required for voice recognition, such as the language to use and whether to use Use TV Voice. System Accessibility Setup Sports Mode Menu Language English Smart Security Universal remote setup Voice Recognition " Your TV's menu may differ from the image above, depending on the model. 2 3 Controlling the TV with your voice (MENU/123) MENU System Voice Recognition Press and hold the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control. The Voice Recognition screen appears. When the icon appears on the screen, speak commands slowly, in a moderately loud voice, into the microphone on the Samsung Smart Control. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " For more information, refer to "Controlling the TV with Your Voice." 4 Controlling the TV with Your Motion " This function is only supported for S9 series models. Setting up Motion Control (MENU/123) MENU System Motion Control Perform Motion Control Environment Test, then finish the settings required to run motion control, such as how to adjust Pointer Speed and whether to show Animated Motion Guide. System Setup Sports Mode Menu Language English Smart Security Universal remote setup Voice Recognition Motion Control On " Your TV's menu may differ from the image above, depending on the model. 4 5 Controlling the TV using motions (MENU/123) MENU System Motion Control Motion Control 1. Set Motion Control to On. 2. Face the TV camera, raise your hand to a comfortable position, and then move your index finger to the left or right slowly with it fully extended upwards. 3. Move your hand left or right slowly to move the pointer to a function. 4. Curl your index finger down to select a function, and then raise it again to run the selected function. " Motion Control is available in either direction control or motion pointing mode. " To use this function, the optional TV camera must be connected to the dedicated USB port at the back of the TV. " For more information, refer to "Controlling the TV using Motions (Motion Control)." 6 Using the Samsung Smart Control " This function is only supported for S9 series models or for J6300, J6330, J6390 series models within CIS region. Operating the TV with the POINTER button Place a finger on the POINTER button and move the Samsung Smart Control. The pointer on the screen moves in the direction you moved the Samsung Smart Control. Move the pointer to one of the following icons on the screen, and then press the POINTER button. ● : Displays the On-Screen Remote. ● : Allows you to adjust the volume or select speakers. ● : Displays the channel list. ● : Launches Smart Hub. 6 7 Setting up the Samsung Smart Control (MENU/123) MENU System Smart Control Settings Configure the basic settings for using the Samsung Smart Control. System Menu Language English Smart Security Universal remote setup Time Notifications Device Manager Smart Control Settings " Your TV's menu may differ from the image above, depending on the model. Pairing the TV to the Samsung Smart Control When you turn on the TV for the first time, the Samsung Smart Control pairs to the TV automatically. If the Smart Control does not pair to the TV automatically, point it at the remote control sensor of the TV, then press the ① and ② buttons on the Samsung Smart Control simultaneously for 3 seconds or more. 8 Improving the Viewing Experience of Sports Events Activating Sports Mode (MENU/123) MENU System Sports Mode Set Sports Mode to On. The TV automatically configures the picture and sound settings so that they are suitable for football events. System Accessibility Setup Sports Mode Menu Language English Smart Security Universal remote setup Time " Your TV's menu may differ from the image above, depending on the model. You can zoom in the screen while you are using the sports mode. Move the focus to the part of screen to magnify. " For more information, refer to "Making Sports programmes More Realistic with Sports Mode." " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. 8 9 Editing Channels Running the Edit Channel function (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Edit Channel Broadcasting Auto Tuning Aerial Terrestrial Channel List Guide Schedule Manager Edit Channel Edit Favourites " Your TV's menu may differ from the image above, depending on the model. Rearranging or deleting channels (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Edit Channel Change Number or Delete You can rearrange the order of channels or delete channels. To change the order of a channel, select it and then select Change Number. To delete a channel, select it and then select Delete. " Certain channels are not available depending on the channel type. 10 Connecting an Antenna (Aerial) Connect the TV to an antenna or a cable outlet to receive broadcast signals. Connect a cable from an antenna or cable outlet to the ANT IN connector, as shown in the image below. " An antenna connection is not necessary if you connect a cable box or satellite receiver. It is best to connect the both connectors using a Multi-Switch or DiSEqC. Switch, etc and to set Aerial Connection Type to Dual Oscillator. " A connection method may differ with the models. " DVB-T2 system may not be available in specific geographical areas. Connections You can enjoy broadcasts, Internet and external device's screen on the TV by connecting an antenna and external device. Connect an antenna, video device, external audio device, computer, or mobile device to the TV. 10 11 Connecting to the Internet Establishing a wired Internet connection Using LAN cables There are three ways to connect the TV to your Internet access points, as shown in the following illustrations: ● Wall-mounted LAN Outlet LAN ● External Modem LAN ● ① IP Router + ② External Modem LAN 1 2 " We recommend using Cat 7 LAN cables to link your TV to the Internet Access Points. " The TV will not be able to connect to the Internet if the network speed is below 10Mbps. 12 Connecting to a wired Internet network automatically (MENU/123) MENU Network Network Settings Try Now Automatically connect to an available network. 1. Select Wired. 2. Once network connection is successful, you will see a confirmation message. If it fails, try again or connect manually. Establishing a wireless Internet connection Connecting to a wireless internet network automatically (MENU/123) MENU Network Network Settings Make sure that you have the wireless router's SSID (name) and password settings before attempting to connect. 1. Select Wireless. The TV automatically displays a list of available wireless networks. 2. Select a network. If the network you want doesn't appear in the list, select Add Network, and then enter the network's SSID (name) manually. 3. If your network is security enabled, enter the password. If your network is not security-enabled, the TV will bypass the on-screen keyboard and attempt to connect right away. 12 13 Connecting to a wireless internet network with WPS (MENU/123) MENU Network Network Settings If the router has a WPS(wi-fi protected setup) push button, you can use it to connect the TV to the router automatically. 1. Select Wireless. The TV automatically displays a list of available wireless networks. 2. Select Stop and then select WPS. 3. Press the WPS or PBC buttons on your wireless router in less than two minutes. 4. The TV is connected to the network automatically. Checking the internet connection status (MENU/123) MENU Network Network Status Try Now Network Network Status Network Settings Wi-Fi Direct Multimedia Device Settings Screen Mirroring Device Name [TV] Samsung Voice Recognition " Your TV's menu may differ from the image above, depending on the model. View the current network and Internet status. Changing the name of the TV on a network (MENU/123) MENU Network Device Name Try Now You can change a name for the TV that will appear on mobile devices and laptop computers. 1. Select Device Name from the Network menu. 2. Select a name from the list that appears. Alternatively, select User Input to enter a name manually. 14 Connecting to a Network via a Mobile Dongle You can make the TV to connect to a network via a mobile device by connecting a mobile dongle to the TV. Connect the mobile dongle to the USB port in the TV. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " When you use a large mobile dongle(Data Card), USB devices may not work properly due to interferences among the USB ports, or the wireless network may not work properly due to interferences from the peripherals and surroundings. In this case, use a USB extension cable. " Channel-bound Apps & Ticker is not available when you set up mobile network. " If you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet service provider. The mobile service providers and their devices that support this function are as follows: ● Vodacom (Model No: K4605) ● MTN (Model No: E3131S, E3251) ● Safaricom (Model No: E303) 14 15 Troubleshooting Internet Connectivity Issues Troubleshooting wired Internet connectivity issues Try Now No network cable found Make sure that the network cable is plugged in. If it is connected, make sure that the router is turned on. If it is on, try turning if off and on again. IP auto setting failed Do the following or configure the IP Settings manually. 1. Make sure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router, and reset the router. 2. If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. Unable to connect to the network 1. Check all IP Settings. 2. Make sure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router. Then, unplug the router and plug it back in. 3. If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider. Connected to a local network, but not to the Internet 1. Make sure that the Internet LAN cable is connected to the router's external LAN port. 2. Check the DNS values in IP Settings. 3. If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. Network setup is complete, but unable to connect to the Internet If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. 16 Troubleshooting wireless Internet connectivity issues Wireless network connection failed If a selected wireless router is not found, go to Network Settings and select the correct router. Unable to connect to a wireless router 1. Check if the router is turned on. If it is, turn it off and on again. 2. Enter the correct password if required. IP auto setting failed Do the following or configure the IP Settings manually. 1. Make sure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router. Then, unplug the router and plug it back in. 2. Enter the correct password if required. 3. If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. Unable to connect to the network 1. Check all IP Settings. 2. Enter the correct password if required. 3. If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. Connected to a local network, but not to the Internet 1. Make sure that the Internet LAN cable is connected to the router's external LAN port. 2. Check the DNS values in IP Settings. 3. If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. Network setup is complete, but unable to connect to the Internet If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. 16 17 Connecting Video Devices Your TV has a variety of connectors for video input from external devices. Below is a list of featured connectors shown in descending order of picture quality. ● HDMI ● Component ● Composite (A/V) Connect a video device to the TV with an HDMI connector for the best picture quality. If the device does not have an HDMI connector, try a component connector. Connecting with an HDMI cable The following types of HDMI cables are recommended: ● High-Speed HDMI Cable ● High-Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI input connector of the TV and the HDMI output connector of the device as shown in the image below. " Set Edit Device Type to DVI PC for a computer connected with a HDMI-to-DVI cable, and PC for a computer connected with HDMI cable. Also, set Edit Device Type to DVI Devices for an A/V device with a HDMI-to-DVI cable. 18 Connecting with a component cable Connect the component cable to the component input connectors of the TV and the component output connectors of the device as shown in the image below. Make sure the cable colours match the connector colours. Connecting with a composite (A/V) cable Connect the AV cable to the AV input connectors of the TV and the AV output connectors of the device as shown in the image below. Make sure the cable colours match the connector colours. 18 19 Audio Input and Output Connections Your TV has a variety of connections for audio input from external devices. The connections are listed below. ● HDMI/ARC (Audio Return Channel) ● Digital Audio (Optical) ● Audio (Analogue) Connecting with an HDMI (ARC) cable ARC(Audio Return Channel) lets the TV output digital sound to an audio device and input digital sound from the same audio device through one HDMI cable. ARC is only available through the HDMI (ARC) port and only when the TV is connected to an ARC-enabled AV receiver. Connect an HDMI cable to the HDMI (ARC) input connector of the TV and the HDMI output connector of the device as shown in the image below. 20 Connecting with a digital audio (optical) cable You can listen to digital audio by connecting an AV receiver to the TV via a digital audio (optical) connector. Connect the optical cable to digital audio output connector of the TV and the digital audio input connector of the device as shown in the image below. Connecting with headphones Connect the headphones to the headphone output connector of the TV as shown in the image below. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Connecting with an audio cable Refer to the diagram and connect the audio cable to the TV's audio output connector and the device's audio input connector. AUDIO OUT " Availability depends on the specific model and area. 20 21 Connecting a Computer The kinds of connections you can make are listed below. To use the TV as a computer monitor ● Connect through the HDMI port with an HDMI cable. ● Connect though the HDMI (DVI) port with an HDMI-to-DVI cable. To view or play the content saved in a computer on the TV ● Connect through using your home network. Connecting through the HDMI port For an HDMI connection, we recommend one of the following HDMI cable types: ● High-Speed HDMI Cable ● High-Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI input connector of the TV and the HDMI output connector of the device as shown in the image below. " Set Edit Device Type to DVI PC for a computer connected with a HDMI-to-DVI cable, and PC for a computer connected with HDMI cable. Also, set Edit Device Type to DVI Devices for an A/V device with a HDMI-to-DVI cable. 22 Connecting with an HDMI-to-DVI cable If the graphics adapter of your TV does not support the HDMI interface, connect the computer to the TV with a DVI (Digital Visual Interactive)-to-HDMI cable. Note that the HDMI-to-DVI connection is only supported by the HDMI (DVI) port and does not transmit audio. To listen to the computer sound, connect external speakers to the audio output connector of the computer. Connect the HDMI-to-DVI cable to the HDMI (DVI) port of the TV and the DVI output port of the computer as shown in the image below. " Set Edit Device Type to DVI PC for a computer connected with a HDMI-to-DVI cable, and PC for a computer connected with HDMI cable. Also, set Edit Device Type to DVI Devices for an A/V device with a HDMI-to-DVI cable. " For the resolutions supported by the TV, refer to "Read Before Connecting a Computer (Supported Resolutions)." Connecting through your home network You can quickly access and play photo, video, and music files stored on a computer on the TV. 1. Connect the TV and the computer to the same router or AP. Once you connect them to the same router or AP, a home network is configured. 2. On the computer, select [Control Panel] [Network and Internet] [Network and Sharing Centre] [Change advanced sharing settings], and select [Choose media streaming options...] to activate media streaming. 3. From the list, set the TV to [Allowed]. 4. Launch Windows Media Player on a computer. Select [Settings] [Library Management] and add the location where photo, video, and music files are saved to play them on the TV. For more information about playing content, refer to "Playing multimedia content in a computer or mobile device." " Alternatively, you can move the files to the default folder specified by Windows Media Player, and then play or view them on the TV. 22 23 Connecting a Mobile Device You can connect a mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet directly to the TV, or connect it to the network and display the mobile device's screen or play its content on the TV. The kinds of connections you can make are listed below. ● View the mobile device's screen on the TV screen by using an MHL-to-HDMI cable. ● Connect by mirroring the mobile device's screen on the TV (Screen Mirroring). ● Connect mobile devices without a wireless router (Wi-Fi Direct). ● Connect a mobile device via Samsung Smart View 2.0. Connecting with an MHL-to-HDMI Cable You can use the Mobile High-definition Link (MHL) function to display a mobile device's screen on the TV. However, MHL is only available through the TV's HDMI (MHL) port and only when used in conjunction with an MHL-enabled mobile device. For information on configuring MHL on your mobile device, refer to the device's User Manual. " If you connect a mobile device to the TV with an MHL-to-HDMI cable, the TV automatically switches the picture size of each content saved on the mobile device to the original picture size of that content. Connect the MHL-to-HDMI cable to the HDMI (MHL) input connecter of the TV and the mobile device's USB port as shown in the image below. 24 Using Screen Mirroring (MENU/123) MENU Network Screen Mirroring Try Now You can wirelessly connect a mirroring-enabled mobile device to the TV and play the video and audio files stored on the device on the TV. Mirroring refers to the function that plays the video and audio files located on a mobile device on a TV and on the mobile device simultaneously. Connecting via a mobile device 1. Launch Screen Mirroring function on your mobile device. The mobile device searches for available devices to connect to. 2. Select the TV from the list. The TV automatically allows the connection and the device connects. 3. Select Allow to connect the mobile device. " All previously allowed mobile devices will automatically connect without needing approval. " If you select Deny, the device cannot connect. To change the connection status of a denied device, select (MENU/123) MENU Network Multimedia Device Manager, select the device, and select Allow. Try Now Connecting by automatically allowing the connection 1. Select (MENU/123) MENU Network Screen Mirroring, You can also start screen mirroring by pressing the SOURCE button on your remote and selecting Screen Mirroring from the list at the top of the screen. 2. Launch Screen Mirroring function on your mobile device. The mobile device searches for available devices to connect to. 3. Select the TV from the list. The TV automatically allows the connection and the device connects. " If the mobile device cannot connect, turn off and on the TV and mobile device. 24 25 Connecting mobile devices without a wireless router (Wi-Fi Direct) (MENU/123) MENU Network Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct Try Now You can connect a mobile device with the Wi-Fi Direct feature directly to the TV without using a wireless router or AP. By connecting a mobile device to the TV through Wi-Fi Direct, you can play photo, video, and music files saved on the mobile device on the TV. 1. Enable Wi-Fi Direct on the mobile device, and then run Wi-Fi Direct on the TV. The TV automatically scans for and displays a list of available devices. The TV's name also appears on the mobile device. 2. Select the device from the list to initiate a connection. If a connection request is made by the TV, a permission message appears on the mobile device and vice versa. 3. Allow the connection. The TV and mobile device connect. " For more information on the multimedia content, refer to "Playing multimedia content in a computer or mobile device." " To confirm the mobile devices that allows or denies the connection, select (MENU/123) MENU Network Multimedia Device Manager. " When you place the mobile device closer to the TV with Wi-Fi Direct activated, the connection allowance confirmation window appears on the left bottom of the screen so that you can easily connect it. Managing the connection status of previously connected mobile devices 1. Select (MENU/123) MENU Network Multimedia Device Manager. The TV displays a list of devices that have previously connected to the TV or have tried to connect to the TV and been denied. The status of the connection (Allow/Deny) is also displayed. 2. Select a device. 3. Select connection type or delete the device from the list. " This function is only available if the devices have previously connected to the TV or have previously attempted to connect and been denied. 26 Connecting a mobile device via Samsung Smart View 2.0 You can play the mobile device's multimedia content, such as videos, photos, and music, when you install and launch Samsung Smart View 2.0 on a mobile device connected to the TV. You can send text messages or control the TV using the mobile device. Pairing a laptop to the TV - Wireless PC Mirroring (or KINO TV) You can view the enhanced or dual mode screen of a laptop on your TV by pairing the laptop to the TV wirelessly. Connect a Wireless PC Mirroring Adapter (or KINO KIT, VG-SWD1000) to the laptop's HDMI port, and then connect the USB cable that came with the package between a USB port of the Wireless PC Mirroring Adapter (or KINO KIT, VG-SWD1000) and a USB port of the laptop. A pairing message appears on the TV's screen. If you allow the pairing, the laptop's screen is displayed on the TV's screen. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " Wireless PC Mirroring, KINO TV, and KINO KIT use same technology, and naming may vary by region. " This function is not available on third-party TVs or non-laptop devices. " If two Samsung TVs are located closely, turn off the TV to which you don’t want to pair the laptop, and then try to pair. 26 27 Changing the input signal with external devices Press the SOURCE button to switch between external devices connected to the TV. ● Options To view the Options menu, press the button. The functions that appear in the Options menu can include any of the following: " The connector names may vary depending on the product. – Edit Device Type: Changes the types of the external devices. Select an external device to change. For example, you can use an HDMI cable to designate a computer connected to the TV as PC. You can also use a HDMI-to-DVI cable to designate an AV devices as DVI Devices. – Edit Name: You can rename devices connected to the TV to facilitate identifying external sources. – Information: Displays information about the connected devices. – Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC): Displays a list of Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-compliant devices that are connected to the TV. " This option is only available when Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On. – Remove USB Device: Removes a USB device connected to the TV. – Delete Universal Remote: Deletes the external device connected to the TV via the Universal Remote function. " This function is only supported for S9 series models or for J6300, J6330, J6390 series models within CIS region. – Universal remote setup: You can use your TV remote control to control external devices. " This function is only supported for S9 series models or for J6300, J6330, J6390 series models within CIS region. " For more information on using the Universal Remote function, refer to "Controlling External Devices with the TV Remote - Using the Universal Remote." 28 Connection Notes! " The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the model. " Refer to the external device's operating manual when connecting it to the TV. The number of external device connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the manufacturer. Connection notes for HDMI ● Use an HDMI cable with a thickness of 14mm or less. ● Using a non-certified HDMI cable may result in a blank screen or a connection error. ● Some HDMI cables and devices may not be compatible with the TV due to different HDMI specifications. ● This TV does not support HDMI Ethernet Channel. Ethernet is a LAN (Local Area Network) built with coaxial cables standardised by the IEEE. ● HDCP 2.2 is supported only by the TV's HDMI (MHL) port. HDCP is short for "High bandwidth Digital Content Protection" and is used for video copyright protection. ● Many computer graphics adaptors do not have HDMI ports, but have DVI ports instead. If your computer graphics adaptor has a DVI port, use an HDMI-to-DVI cable to connect the computer to the TV. For more information, refer to "Connecting with an HDMI-to-DVI cable." ● If you are using an HDMI adapter, the TV recognises the signal as an HDMI signal and may respond differently than it would to an MHL-to-HDMI cable connection. 28 29 Connection notes for audio devices ● For better audio quality, it is a good idea to use an AV receiver. ● Connecting a device using an optical cable does not automatically turn off the TV speakers. To turn off the TV's speakers, set Speaker Select ((MENU/123) MENU Sound Speaker Settings Speaker Select) to something other than TV Speaker. ● An unusual noise coming from the audio device while you are using it may indicate a problem with the audio device itself. If this occurs, ask for assistance from the audio device's manufacturer. ● Digital audio is only available with 5.1-channel broadcasts. ● Only use headphones with a 3-conductor TRS type jack. ● The headphone volume and the TV volume are adjusted independently of each other. ● While the headphone is connected, the TV speakers are muted and certain Sound options are deactivated. Connection notes for computers ● For the resolutions supported by the TV, refer to "Read Before Connecting a Computer (Supported Resolutions)." ● As long as file sharing is activated, unauthorised access may occur. When you do not need to access data, disable file sharing. ● Your PC and Smart TV must be connected on the same network. Connection notes for mobile devices ● To use the Screen Mirroring function, the mobile device must support a mirroring function such as AllShare Cast or Screen Mirroring. To check whether your mobile device supports the mirroring function, please visit the mobile device manufacturer's website. ● To use Wi-Fi Direct, the mobile device must support the Wi-Fi Direct function. Please check if your mobile device supports Wi-Fi Direct. ● The mobile device and your Smart TV must be connected with each other in the same network. ● The video or audio may intermittently stop depending on network conditions. 30 Connection notes for Wireless PC Mirroring (or KINO TV) ● Wireless PC Mirroring, KINO TV, and KINO KIT use same technology, and naming may vary by region. ● The working distance may differ due to obstacles (e.g., human bodies, metal objects, or walls) or electromagnetic environment. To ensure stable functioning, it is recommended to use the Wireless PC Mirroring Adapter (or KINO KIT, VG-SWD1000) in the same location where the TV is placed. ● When a Wireless PC Mirroring Adapter (or KINO KIT, VG-SWD1000) is connected, the TV may not play videos properly depending on whether there is another device that emits radio signals nearby. ● Do not place the Wireless PC Mirroring Adapter (or KINO KIT, VG-SWD1000) near any heat source, in a humid location, or under direct sunlight. This action may cause product malfunction or a fire. ● Do not apply any of the following to the Wireless PC Mirroring Adapter (or KINO KIT, VGSWD1000): chemicals (e.g., wax, benzene, thinner, mosquito repellent, air freshener, lubricant) and cleaning agent that contains alcohol or solvent or that is surface active. This action may cause the dongle's exterior to discolour or its label to peel off. ● Do not disassemble, repair or modify the Wireless PC Mirroring Adapter (or KINO KIT, VGSWD1000) by yourself. Stop using the dongle if it is damaged or broken. ● Make sure to use a genuine Wireless PC Mirroring Adapter (or KINO KIT, VG-SWD1000) supplied by Samsung Electronics. 31 About the Samsung Smart Control Remote Control and Peripherals You can control the functions of the TV with a standard remote control, the Samsung Smart Control, and the On-Screen Remote. Pair and use the remote controls to operate the TV and external devices connected to the TV. 32 Button Description / AD Press this button to mute the sound temporarily. Press and hold this button to bring up Accessibility Shortcuts that enables or disables Accessibility ((MENU/123) MENU System Accessibility) menus. MENU/123 Displays numeric buttons, content control button, and other function buttons on the screen so that you can run a function conveniently. " For more information, refer to "Displaying and using the On-Screen Remote." POINTER Place a finger on the POINTER button and move the Samsung Smart Control. The pointer on the screen moves in the direction you moved the Samsung Smart Control. Press the POINTER button to select or run a focused item. " For more information, refer to "Operating the TV with the POINTER button." , , , Moves the focus, and changes the values seen on the TV's menu. Enter Selects or runs a focused item. Press and hold this button to launch Guide while you are watching the TV. RETURN / EXIT Returns to the previous menu or channel. Press and hold to exit the currently running function on the TV's screen. Launches Smart Hub applications. , Controls the content when playing the media content such as movie, picture, or music. EXTRA Displays related information about the current programme. SOURCE Displays and selects the available video sources. " The image of the Samsung Smart Control may differ depending on the model. " This function is only supported for S9 series models or for J6300, J6330, J6390 series models within CIS region. " Use the Samsung Smart Control at a distance of less than 6m. The usable distance may differ with the wireless environmental conditions. 32 33 Using the Samsung Smart Control " This function is only supported for S9 series models or for J6300, J6330, J6390 series models within CIS region. Operating the TV with the POINTER button Place a finger on the POINTER button and move the Samsung Smart Control. The pointer on the screen moves in the direction you moved the Samsung Smart Control. Move the pointer to select an item on the screen. ● : Displays the On-Screen Remote. ● : Allows you to adjust the volume or select speakers. ● : Displays the channel list. ● : Launches Smart Hub. Operating the TV with the directional buttons and the Enter button Press the , , , and buttons to move the pointer, focus, or cursor in the direction you want or change a setting shown on the focused item. Press the Enter button to select an item or run a focused item. Press and hold the Enter button to view the Guide while watching the TV. " To adjust the pointer speed, select (MENU/123) MENU System Smart Control Settings Motion Sensitivity. " To view a tutorial that shows how to use the POINTER button, select (MENU/123) MENU Support Smart Control Tutorial. 34 Displaying and using the On-Screen Remote You can display and use the On-Screen Remote on the TV's screen by pressing the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control. Button Description Menu Displays the menu on the screen. Voice Recognition Runs the Voice Recognition function. Guide Displays the Electronic Programme Guide (EPG). Info Displays information about the current programme or content. Channel List Launches the Channel List. Sports Mode Turns the Sports Mode on or off. " For more information, refer to "Making Sports programmes More Realistic with Sports Mode". EXTRA Displays related information about the current programme. African Cinema Mode Turns the African Cinema Mode on or off. e-Manual Opens the e-Manual. Picture Size Changes the picture size. Picture Mode Changes the picture mode. Speakers Allows you to select the speakers that will play the TV's audio. D Accesses additional features and functions offered by the broadcast you watched. To use this button, the Auto Run Data Service is set to On, and the broadcast should be support the Data Service. Dual When you press the Dual button the first time, the current dual mode is displayed on the screen. Press the Dual button again to change the dual mode. 34 35 Button Description Audio Description/ Subtitles Displays the Accessibility Shortcuts. Select the options to turn them on or off. Audio Language Selects a audio language. Sleep Timer Shuts off the TV automatically after a preset period of time. Tools Displays the Tool's menu on the screen. Source Displays and selects available video sources. Power Turns off the TV. Use these coloured buttons to access additional options specific to the feature in use. Move Number Pad to the Right / Move Number Pad to the Left Moves the number pad to the left or right. " The On-Screen Remote buttons may vary, depending on the TV model, region, and the TV functions you are using. " To change the order of the menu options on the first row, select a menu option to move, press and hold the Enter button, and then select the directional buttons displayed to specify a new position. Pairing the TV to the Samsung Smart Control When you turn on the TV for the first time, the Samsung Smart Control pairs to the TV automatically. If the Smart Control does not pair to the TV automatically, point it at the remote control sensor of the TV, then press the ① and ② buttons on the Samsung Smart Control simultaneously for 3 seconds or more. 36 Controlling External Devices with the TV Remote - Using the Universal Remote (MENU/123) MENU System Universal remote setup You can control external devices connected to the TV using the TV's remote control. " This function is only supported for S9 series models or for J6300, J6330, J6390 series models within CIS region. " You can also use the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function to operate external Samsung devices with your TV's remote control without any additional setup. Refer to "Using Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)" for more information. " Certain external devices connected to the TV may not support the universal remote feature. Setting up the universal remote control 1. Connect the external device to control with the universal remote control to the HDMI port on the TV, and then turn on the external device. 2. Press the SOURCE button on your remote control to bring up the Source screen. 3. Select the Universal remote setup. 4. Follow the directions on the screen to complete the set up and register the device. The directions will be different, depending on the device you want to control. " If the external device does not respond after being registered, register it again using its model number. " The TV memorises both the external device and the connection (HDMI 1, HDMI 2, etc.) the device is connected to. 36 37 Using the Tools menu on the TV screen Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu on the TV’s screen. The following menu options are available. ● Picture Size: Changes the picture size. ● Picture Mode: Changes the picture mode. ● Network: Allows you to connect the TV to the Internet in a wired or wireless connection. ● Audio Description/Subtitles: Displays the Accessibility Shortcuts. Select the options to turn them on or off. ● Audio Language: Selects a audio language. ● Speakers: Allows you to select the speakers that will play the TV's audio. ● Sleep Timer: Shuts off the TV automatically after a preset period of time. ● Dual: When you press the Dual button the first time, the current dual mode is displayed on the screen. Press the Dual button again to change the dual mode. ● e-Manual: Opens the e-Manual. " The Tools menu options may differ with the model and geographical area. " To change the order of the menu options on the first row, select a menu option to move, press and hold the Enter button, and then select the directional buttons displayed to specify a new position. 38 Controlling the TV with a Keyboard (MENU/123) MENU System Device Manager Keyboard Settings Try Now " Certain models are not compatible with USB HID class keyboards. Connecting a keyboard Connecting a USB keyboard Plug the keyboard cable into the TV's USB port. Connecting a Bluetooth keyboard 1. Place the Bluetooth keyboard into standby status. 2. Select (MENU/123) MENU System Device Manager Keyboard Settings Add Bluetooth Keyboard. The TV automatically scans for available keyboards. Try Now " If your keyboard was not detected, position the keyboard close to the TV, and then select Refresh. The TV scans for available keyboards again. 3. Select the Bluetooth keyboard from the scan list, and then select Pair and connect. A number appears on the screen. 4. Enter the number using the Bluetooth keyboard. This pairs the Bluetooth keyboard to the TV. 38 39 Using the keyboard You can use the following remote features with the USB or Bluetooth keyboard connected to the TV. Keyboard Remote control functions Directional keys Moves the focus Windows key Displays the menu Menu list key Displays the On-Screen Remote Enter key Selects or runs a focused item ESC key Returns to the previous screen F1 / F2 / F3 / F4 key / / / F5 key Launches the button F6 key Displays the source screen F7 key Launches the Channel List F8 key Mutes the sound F9 / F10 key Adjusts the volume F11 / F12 key Changes the channel Changing keyboard settings Select (MENU/123) MENU System Device Manager Keyboard Settings Keyboard Options. Try Now ● Keyboard Language Displays the languages you can use on your keyboard and lets you select a language. ● Keyboard type Displays a list of keyboard types and lets you select a type that matches the Keyboard language you selected. " The list of keyboard type differs depending on the language you selected under Keyboard Language. ● Switch Input Language Displays a list of keys you can use to toggle between languages and lets you select a key. 40 Controlling the TV with a Mouse (MENU/123) MENU System Device Manager Mouse Settings Try Now " Certain models are not compatible with USB HID class mice. Connecting a USB mouse Plug the mouse cable into the TV's USB port. Connecting a Bluetooth mouse 1. Place the Bluetooth mouse in standby status. 2. Select (MENU/123) MENU System Device Manager Mouse Settings Add Bluetooth Mouse. Try Now 3. Select the Bluetooth mouse from the scanned list, and then select Pair and connect. This pairs the Bluetooth mouse to the TV. Using a mouse You can use a pointer to control the TV in the same way you use a pointer on a computer. ● Selecting and running an item Left-click the mouse. ● Scrolling the TV menu or screen Scroll the mouse wheel up or down. ● Exiting the TV menu or feature Place the pointer in any blank point on the screen, and then left-click the mouse. 40 41 Changing mouse buttons and pointer speed (MENU/123) MENU System Device Manager Mouse Settings Mouse Options Try Now ● Primary Button Select which or buttons to use when selecting and running items. ● Pointer Speed Adjust the movement speed of the pointer. Connecting a Bluetooth Gamepad (MENU/123) MENU System Device Manager Bluetooth Gamepad Settings Try Now You can play the games downloaded and installed on the Smart Hub service using a Bluetooth gamepad. Select Bluetooth Gamepad Settings, and then place your Bluetooth gamepad close to your TV. The TV scans for available Bluetooth gamepads automatically. (DualShock®4, a gamepad optimised for PlayStation, is recommended.) After scanning, you can use the Bluetooth gamepad to play games. " If the TV fails to find your Bluetooth gamepad, place it closer to the TV, and then select Refresh. For more information on pairing, refer to the Bluetooth gamepad's operating manual. Entering Text using the On-Screen QWERTY Keypad Using additional functions Select on the QWERTY keyboard screen. The following options are available: ● Recommend text Enables or disables the recommended text feature. The keyboard displays recommended words so that you can enter the text more easily. ● Reset recommended text data Deletes both the recommended words and the memorised words to clear the list. ● Predict Next Character (when using direction buttons) Enables or disables the text prediction feature. ● Language Selects a language from the list. " This function may not support depending on the country. 42 Smart Hub (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Open Smart Hub Try Now Recent Featured GAMES Search YouTube TuneIn Vimeo YuppTV AccuWeat… MY CON Apps " The image may differ with the specific model and area. You can surf the web, download apps with Smart Hub. In addition, you can enjoy photo, video, and music files stored on external storage devices. Place a finger on the POINTER button to display the pointer on the screen. Select at the bottom of the screen to launch Smart Hub. On the standard remote control, press the button on the remote control. " To run Smart Hub while you are using a service provided by Smart Hub, go to the same path as described above. Smart Features You can enjoy the TV more abundantly by using the special Smart Features. Use the various services in Smart Hub, or surf the Internet on the TV. 42 43 Removing or pinning an item in the Recent group To remove or pin an item in the Recent group, press the button on the remote control. The following icons are available. ● : Deletes the item. Although you remove an item from the Recent group, it is not removed from your TV. ● : Pin the item to the first position. To unpin the item, select again. Launching Smart Hub automatically (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Auto-Start Settings Smart Hub You can start Smart Hub automatically when you turn on the TV. Testing Smart Hub connections (MENU/123) MENU Support Self Diagnosis Smart Hub Connection Test Try Now When Smart Hub is not working, select Smart Hub Connection Test. The connection Test diagnoses the problem by checking the internet connection, your ISP, the Samsung server, and the Apps service. " If Smart Hub continues to have problems after completing the test, contact your Internet Service Provider or a Samsung Service Centre. 44 Using the Smart Hub tutorial (MENU/123) MENU Support Smart Hub Tutorial You can learn the basics of using Smart Hub and the Smart Hub service in detail. Resetting Smart Hub (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Reset Smart Hub Try Now You can remove the Samsung accounts saved in the TV and everything linked to them, including apps. " Some of the Smart Hub services are for pay services. To use a for pay service, you must have an account with the service provider or a Samsung account. For more information, refer to "Using Smart Hub with a Samsung Account." " To use this feature, the TV must be connected to the Internet. " Some Smart Hub features may not be available depending on the service provider, language, or region. " Smart Hub service outages can be caused by disruptions in your Internet service. " To use Smart Hub, you must agree to the end user agreement and privacy policy. Otherwise, you will not be able to access the features and services associated with them. You can view the entire text of the Terms & Policy by navigating to (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Terms & Policy. If you want to stop using Smart Hub, you can cancel the agreement. Try Now " To view help information about Smart Hub, select the button on the Recent screen. 44 45 Using Smart Hub with a Samsung Account Creating a Samsung account (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Samsung Account Try Now Some of the Smart Hub services are for paid services. To use a for paid service, you must have an account with the service provider or a Samsung account. You can create a Samsung account using your email address as your ID. " To create a Samsung account, you must agree to the Samsung account end user agreement and privacy policy. Otherwise, you cannot create a Samsung account. You can view the entire content of the agreement by navigating to (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Samsung Account Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy. " You can also create a Samsung account at http://content.samsung.com. Once you have an account, you can use the same ID on both the TV and the Samsung website. Creating a Samsung account MENU Smart Hub Samsung Account Create Account Create a Samsung account You can create the Samsung account by following the on-screen instructions. Once a Samsung account is created, you are automatically signed in to your Samsung account. " If you want to review the Terms and Conditions, select View Details. " If you want your account to be protected, select Profile image selection and password entry (High security) in the field below the password field. " If you want the TV to log you in to your account automatically when you turn the TV on, tick Sign me in automatically. Creating a Samsung account using a Facebook account (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Samsung Account Create Account Create a Samsung account using Facebook Enter your Facebook ID and password, and then follow the on-screen instructions to complete account setup. Once a Samsung account is created, you are automatically signed in to your Samsung account. " Samsung account and Facebook account are automatically linked when you create a Samsung account with your Facebook account. 46 Signing in to a Samsung account (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Samsung Account Sign In You can automatically sign in to your Samsung account and use the Smart Hub feature. Registering your Samsung account to the TV If you already have a Samsung account, you can register that account to the TV. Select + Sign In on the Samsung account screen and follow the on-screen instructions. Signing in to a registered Samsung account saved on the TV If you register a Samsung account, it is saved on the TV. To sign in to a registered Samsung account, just select it on the TV. " To change the sign in method, refer to "Changing and adding information to a Samsung account." Linking your Samsung account to external service accounts You can automatically log in to the linked apps' accounts when you log into your Samsung account by linking your Samsung account to an external service accounts. " To use Link Service Accounts, you must first log into your Samsung account. Linking or disconnecting a service account (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Samsung Account Link Service Accounts ● Linking a service account Select an account from the list and log in to the account by following the on-screen instructions. The service account is linked to the Samsung account. ● Disconnecting a linked account Select an account from the list and unlink the account by following the on-screen instructions. 46 47 Changing and adding information to a Samsung account (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Samsung Account Edit profile You can manage your Samsung account. Enter your password with the keyboard displayed on the TV's screen, and then select Done. You can perform the following functions on the screen. " To change the account information, you must be logged in to your Samsung account. ● Change Your Profile Image ● Selecting a Samsung Account sign-in method ● Turning auto login on or off ● Entering Basic User Information ● Subscribing to the Samsung e-Newsletter Deleting a Samsung account from the TV (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Samsung Account Remove Accounts from TV You can remove a Samsung account and password information from your TV. The account information for any external accounts linked to the account is also removed from the TV. " To remove the account information, you must be logged in to your Samsung account. 48 Using the GAMES Service Featured GAMES GAMES My Page Spotlight Most Popular What's New Top Grossing Arcade/Action Party/Music Puzzle/Brain/Board You can download and play the optimised game apps for your TV. Select a category from the top of the screen. You can install and run the apps arranged by genres. You can also manage the downloaded game apps in My Page. " The image may differ with the specific model and area. " To use this feature, the TV must be connected to the Internet. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. Managing Games with the pop-up Options menu Move the focus to a game and then press and hold the Enter button. You can use the following functions. ● Download / Remove ● View Details ● Update " The pop-up menu may differ with the game you selected. Viewing the Detailed Information screen Move the focus to a game, and then press the Enter or POINTER button. You can also select the View Details function. See above. 48 49 Installing and running a game Installing games Select a game to install and press and hold the Enter button. Select Download in the context-sensitive window or install the game in the detailed game information screen. " To get the information about the game controllers that are compatible with the downloaded game, select GAMES Options Game Controller Guide. " When the TV's internal memory is insufficient, you can install a game on a USB device. " You can play a game installed on a USB device only when the USB device is connected to the TV. If the USB device is disconnected during game playing, the game is terminated. " You cannot play the game installed on the USB device on a PC or another TV. Launching an installed game To run a game, you need to sign in to your Samsung account. First, select a game on GAMES My Page on the GAMES screen. The detailed information about the selected game screen appears. Select Play. The game starts. Managing downloaded or purchased games Select My Page on the GAMES service. Updating a game Select My Page Options Update My Games. You can update games installed on the TV. Editing a nickname 1. Select on the GAMES service screen, and then select Edit Nickname. 2. Enter your nickname with the on-screen keyboard, and then select Done. " Your nickname is displayed on the My Page screen. 50 Enabling automatic game updates (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub App & Game Auto Update or App Auto Update To update games automatically, set App & Game Auto Update or App Auto Update to On. Games will be updated automatically when an update becomes available. " The actual name may differ from specific geographical areas. Removing a game 1. Select at My Page screen, and then select Delete My Games. 2. Select a game remove and then press the Enter button. To select all games, select Select All. " You can remove a game by pressing and holding the Enter button with the game selected. 3. When the selection is complete, select Delete. Rating a game You can rate a game on the detailed information screen. " This feature is only available when the game only installed on the TV. Registering a coupon Enter the coupon number in the My Page screen to register it. 50 51 Using the Apps Service Featured Apps Apps My Apps What's New Most Popular Video Game Sports Lifestyle Information Education Kids " The image may differ with the specific model and area. You can enjoy a wide range of content including news, sports, weather, and games by installing corresponding apps on your TV. You can download the apps from Smart Hub. Select a category from the top of the screen. You install and run the apps arranged by genres, such as What's New, Most Popular. " To use this feature, the TV must be connected to the Internet. " When Smart Hub is launched for the first time, the default apps are automatically installed. The default apps may differ with the region. Managing Downloaded Apps with the pop-up Options menu Move the focus to an app and then press and hold the Enter button. You can use the following functions. ● Delete ● More ● Reinstall " The pop-up menu may differ with the apps. 52 Installing an app Installing an app quickly 1. Select a category on the Apps screen. 2. Move the focus to an app, and then press and hold the Enter button. The context-sensitive menu appears. 3. Select Download. The selected app is installed on the TV. " You can view installed apps on the Apps screen. " You can also, install the app from detailed information screen. " When the TV's internal memory is insufficient, you can install an app on a USB device. " You can run an app installed on a USB device only when the USB device is connected to the TV. If the USB device is disconnected during an app is running, the app is terminated. " You cannot run the app installed on the USB device on a PC or another TV. Launching an app You can launch an app by selecting an app on the Apps screen. The icons below appear in the selected apps and indicate the following: ● : The app is installed on a USB device. ● : The app has a password. ● : The app is installed. Enabling automatic apps updates (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub App & Game Auto Update or App Auto Update To update games automatically, set App & Game Auto Update or App Auto Update to On. Games will be updated automatically when an update becomes available. " The actual name may differ from specific geographical areas. 52 53 Removing an app from the TV Select an app to remove on the Apps screen and press and hold the Enter button to confirm it. If you want to remove multiple apps, select all the apps to delete and select Options from the top of the screen, and then select Delete My Apps. " Ensure that the related app data is also removed when you remove an app. Locking and unlocking apps Select Options Lock/Unlock My Apps on the Apps screen. The password input screen appears. Enter your password, select apps to lock or unlock, and then select Save. All selected apps are locked or unlocked. Updating apps Select Options Update Apps on the Apps screen. The TV searches for app updates, and then displays the list. After scanning, you can update some apps or all apps. Rearranging apps Select Options on the Apps screen, and then select Sort By to sort the apps by date, time or others. Rating purchased apps You can set the star score by using the or button on the detailed information screen. Using other app features and functions (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Auto-Start Settings Channel-bound Apps & Ticker You can configure additional app features and functions. Using channel bound apps You can receive the information on TV programmes and other relevant services while viewing TV by using an app installed on the TV and linked to a specific channel. " This function is only available when an app supporting Channel-bound Apps & Ticker is installed on the TV. 54 Using the e-Manual Launching the e-Manual (MENU/123) MENU Support e-Manual You can view the embedded e-Manual containing information about your TV's key features. Press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select e-Manual. On the standard remote, press the E-MANUAL button. 1. Select a category from the e-Manual screen. The list of the selected category appear on the screen. 2. Select an item from the list. The corresponding e-Manual topic appears. " Alternatively, you can download a copy of the e-Manual from Samsung's website. " Words in blue (e.g., Picture Mode) indicate a menu item. The arrows in the menu navigator indicate the menu path. For example, (MENU/123) MENU Picture Picture Mode means that you press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select the on-screen display items, Menu, Picture, and Picture Mode sequentially. Using the buttons in the e-Manual (Search): Brings up the search screen. Enter a search term, and then select Done. Select an item from the search result to load the corresponding page. (Index): Brings up the index screen. Select a topic from the list to navigate to the relevant page. (Recent pages): Displays a list of previously read pages. Select a page. The e-Manual jumps to the selected page. Accessing the associated menu screen from an e-Manual topic page (Try Now): Allows you to access the corresponding menu item and try out the feature right away. (Link): Allows you to access the corresponding reference page. " The e-Manual cannot be accessed from some menu screens. Updating the e-Manual to the latest version You can update the e-Manual in the same way you update apps. 54 55 Using the web browser You can surf the Internet on the TV in the same manner as you would using a PC - even while watching a TV programme using PIP. Select Help to view the information of the Internet web browser. " For a more convenient web browsing experience, use a keyboard and mouse. " The browsing page may differ from that on a PC. Browsing preferences Select Settings. Configure the browsing settings to meet your needs. ● General Hides taps or menu bars automatically after a period of inactivity, or resets all user settings. " The bookmarks and browsing histories that you made will not be reset. ● Home Page Sets the homepage when you launch the web browser. ● Search Engine Searches for information that you entered and display the result web pages. ● Privacy & Security Prevents you from accessing inappropriate web pages or sets not to save the browsing history. ● Blocked pages Blocks or unblocks pages. You can manage a list of pages to block. ● Approved pages Limits to use only the page that you have approved. To use this option, set a password. You can add or remove the approved pages. ● Encoding Set the encoding to Auto, or selects an encoding method from the list. ● About Displays the current version of Web Browser. 56 Using the MY CONTENT Service Featured MY CONTENT Try Now MY CONTENT Mobile Device USB 2 PC Connection Guide " The image may differ with the specific model and area. You can play the media content saved on the storage devices, such as a USB device, mobile device, and camera, in the TV. When you connect a storage device to the TV, the TV displays a tab with the name of the connected device. Select the tab to confirm the content saved on the storage device. " You cannot play media content if the content or the storage device is not supported by the TV. For more information, refer to "Read Before Playing Photo, Video, or Music Files." " Backup important files before connecting a USB device. Samsung is not responsible for damaged or lost files. Read before playing media content " To connect the TV to a computer, refer to "Connecting a Computer." " To connect the TV to a mobile device, refer to "Connecting a Mobile Device." " To connect the TV to a USB or external storage device, connect the device to the TV's USB port. 56 57 Playing multimedia content in a computer or mobile device " Before connecting to a computer or mobile device, configure the network settings. Playing multimedia content saved on a computer or mobile device Featured MY CONTENT To play multimedia content located on a computer or mobile device on the TV, you must allow the connection with the computer or mobile device on the TV. 1. Connect a computer or mobile device. The TV displays the device's name and lists the media contents in the device. 2. Select the media content to play from the list. The selected media content plays. 3. To stop playing media contents, press the or RETURN button. " Alternatively, move to the media content you want to play, and then press the button to play the content. " To connect a computer through your home network, refer to "Connecting a Computer." " To connect a mobile device through Smart View 2.0, refer to "Connecting a Mobile Device." " The content shared by a computer or a mobile device may not be played depending on the encoding type and file format of the content. " The content may not be played smoothly depending on the network status. If this occurs, transfer the content to a USB storage device, and then play the content from the device. Playing media content saved on a USB device 1. Select a USB device name on the MY CONTENT screen. The TV displays a thumbnail list of the media content saved on the USB device. 2. Select the media content to play from the list. The selected media content plays. 3. To stop playing media contents, press the or RETURN button. " Alternatively, if you select a USB device on the Source screen, the TV jumps to the MY CONTENT screen automatically. 58 Safely Removing a USB Device 1. Press the SOURCE button. The Source screen appears. 2. Move the focus to the USB device you want to remove, and then press the button. 3. Select Remove USB Device in the list. Buttons and functions available while viewing photos Press the Enter button while viewing photos to display available options. You can also view the thumbnails of photos saved on the TV while viewing photos. The options disappear when you press the RETURN button. ● Pause / Play Start or stop the slideshow. Using slideshow, you can play all the photos in a folder one by one. ● Previous / Next View the previous or the next photo. ● Pause BGM / Play BGM Pauses or resumes the background music. ● Options Function Description Slideshow Speed Sets the slideshow speed. Slideshow Effect Applies transition effects for the slide show. Rotate and Zoom Zooms in by up to a factor of 4. Rotates the photo. Background Music Plays background music while the TV displays photos. " The music files must be saved in the same USB device as the photo file. " When background music plays, the music icon appears on the screen. Using the music icon, you can pause the current music file or play another music file. Sound Mode Changes the sound mode setting. " This mode is supported only when background music is playing. Speaker List Allows you to control the speaker-related functions, such as selecting which speaker to play the background music through, changing each speaker's settings, or adjusting loudness and richness of the sound from speakers. Picture Mode Changes the picture mode setting. Information Displays detailed information about the current photo. 58 59 Buttons and functions available while viewing videos Press the Enter button while viewing videos to display available options. Preview images of the frames at the same time intervals are displayed so that you can move to a specific frame easily. The options disappear when you press the RETURN button. ● Pause / Play Pauses or plays the video. You can use the following functions when the video is paused. With the video paused, the TV does not play audio. – Step: Scans the paused video one frame at a time by pressing the button. – Slow Motion: Plays the video in slow playback speed (1/8, 1/4, 1/2) by pressing the button. ● Rewind / Fast Forward Rewinds or fast forwards the video. To increase the rewind or fast forward speed up to 3 times faster than normal, select the button repeatedly. To restore normal playback speed, press the button. ● Previous / Next Plays the previous or next video. Press the button twice to play the previous video. Press the button once starts the current video from the beginning. Press the button to play the next video. ● Repeat Plays the current file repeatedly or all files in the same folder repeatedly. 60 ● Options Function Description Picture Size Changes the size of the screen. The supported picture sizes differ with the video. Subtitles Allows you to control the subtitle-related function, such as selecting a language, changing subtitle font size, or adjusting subtitle synchronisation. Rotate Rotates the video. Picture Mode Changes the Picture Mode setting. Sound Mode Changes the Sound Mode setting. Speaker List Allows you to control the speaker-related functions, such as changing each speaker's settings, or adjusting loudness and richness of the sound from speakers. Audio Language Selects a audio language. This function is only available when the video supports multi-track sound. Information Displays detailed information about the video. 60 61 Buttons and functions available while playing music ● Pause / Play Pauses or resumes the music. ● Previous / Next Plays the previous or next music file. Press the button twice to play the previous music file. Press the button once starts the current music file from the beginning. Press the button to play the next music file. ● Repeat Plays the current music file repeatedly or all music files in the same folder repeatedly. ● Shuffle Plays the music files in random order. ● Speaker List Allows you to control the speaker-related functions, such as changing each speaker's settings, or adjusting loudness and richness of the sound from speakers. ● Picture Off Plays the music files only with the screen off. 62 Listening to music in HD quality You can enjoy HD music in HD native quality. Move to MY CONTENT service and select a music file to play in HD quality. " Set HD Audio ((MENU/123) MENU Sound Additional Settings HD Audio) to On before playing HD Audio format. " If a music file supports the HD audio format, the HD icon appears in the list. " Select the music file, and then select to play it. " When you set HD Audio mode to Off during playback, the next music file is played with standard audio signals. " Standard audio signals are sampled at 48 kHz while HD audio signals are sampled at 96 kHz. " Some S/PDIF receivers may not be compatible. For such incompatible receivers, deactivate HD Audio mode and use normal audio mode instead. " Some external audio players connected via HDMI, Bluetooth, or Wi-Fi networks are not able to play the HD audio signals. Functions on the media content list screen You can use the following functions on the media content list screen of a storage device. ● Filter By Filters the media content to display the type of media you want. ● Sort By Sorts the content list. The sorting methods change depending on the type of content you have selected. " This function is not available when Filter By is set to All. ● Delete Deletes the selected media content from the media content list. " This function is only available when Filter is set to Recorded. ● Play Selected Plays the selected media content from the media content list. " This function is not available when Filter By is set to All. 62 63 Using the NewsON Service Featured NewsON NewsON " The image may differ with the specific model and area. You can find daily information on a wide variety of topics in a smart and convenient way, updated in real time. NewsON brings you the latest headlines, top stories, popular issues, and weather forecasts. " To use this feature, the TV must be connected to the Internet. " The image may differ with the model. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. News Select an article on the screen. The selected article will be displayed on the screen in detail. The articles are updated in real time. Weather Select a weather-related item on the screen. The selected item will be displayed in detail. " The weather information is provided for major cities of your country. 64 Controlling the TV with Your Voice MENU/123 Voice Recognition " This function is only supported for S9 series models. " When you run Voice Recognition, the Voice Recognition User Guide appears at the top of the screen. This Guide differs by the language for which Voice Recognition is supported. You can run Voice Recognition in the short distance recognition mode that uses the microphone built into the Samsung Smart control: ● Press the MENU/123 button, and then select Voice Recognition. ● Press and hold the MENU/123 button. " Press and hold the MENU/123 button and say the command 10 to 15 cm from the microphone on the Samsung Smart Control. The optimal volume for voice commands is between 75 dB and 80 dB. 64 65 Read before using voice recognition (MENU/123) MENU System Voice Recognition Try Now You can access and select certain menu options and functions using voice commands. For more effective voice recognition, speak slowly and clearly in the language specified in the (MENU/123) MENU System Voice Recognition Language option. " For more information about voice recognition, refer to "Read Before Playing Photo, Video, or Music Files." Learning voice recognition basics ● View all voice commands: Press the button on the Samsung Smart Control to display a complete list of voice commands by category. Alternatively, say "Help." ● Deactivating voice recognition Say "Close", or press the RETURN button to terminate voice recognition. " The TV recognises predefined voice commands only. These voice commands may differ from the manual depending on the version of the TV. Changing the voice recognition language (MENU/123) MENU System Voice Recognition Language Try Now You can select a language to use with the Voice Recognition function. " Interactive voice recognition is not available in some languages. If the selected language is not available, select a different language. 66 Using imperative voice recognition 1. Press and hold the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control. When the microphone icon appears on the screen, you can use the Voice Recognition function. 2. Say a command. You can use voice recognition function to operate the TV while you are watching a TV programme or other videos. Using interactive voice recognition at a short distance You can set up a schedule viewing, access VODs (Videos on Demand), search for and launch applications, and execute various other functions using specified voice commands without having to remember specific commands or keywords. Activate Voice Interaction and say a command. See the examples below: ● When you want to find a specific content: "*** (Title)" / "Find *** (title)" ● When you want to know specific information: "What's the weather in *** (place name)?" / "What is the *** (company) stock price?" ● When you use the TV's function: "Remind me to watch *** (Title)." " Some sentences above may not be supported depending on the country. 66 67 Controlling the TV using Motions (Motion Control) (MENU/123) MENU System Motion Control Try Now Motion Control is not available. – When you are using the Samsung Smart Control or a mouse " This function is only supported for S9 series models. " This function is not supported by some apps. " For more information, refer to "Read Before Playing Photo, Video, or Music Files." [ To use this function, your TV should be connected to the optional TV camera. The optional TV camera must be connected to the dedicated USB port at the back of the TV. Other USB ports do not support the TV camera or Motion Control. Testing ambient illumination using the TV camera (MENU/123) MENU System Motion Control Motion Control Environment Test Try Now Run this test before using Motion Control to ensure proper functionality. 1. Stand 1.5 to 3.5m from the TV screen. Start Motion Control Environment Test, and then select Start. " If the TV screen is reflecting light or there are objects moving in the background, the TV may not recognise the motion of your hand. 2. Face the TV camera, and follow the onscreen instructions. 68 Checking ambient noise and illumination (MENU/123) MENU Support Self Diagnosis Voice & Motion Control Environment Check or Motion Control Environment Check You can test the ambient noise and brightness levels surrounding the TV camera and microphone to ensure if they are suitable for voice and motion control use. Activating motion control (MENU/123) MENU System Motion Control Motion Control Try Now Face the TV camera. Lower your hand to a comfortable position. Raise your hand with your index finger fully extended upwards, and then move your hand slowly to the left or right. When your hand is successfully recognised by the TV camera, motion control is activated and a pointer and motion control icons appear on the screen. " To deactivate motion control, move your hand out of the range of the TV camera. To reactivate it, simply move your hand toward the TV camera within 3 seconds. " Motion Control may be terminated if your index finger is not fully extended or you move it to fast. 68 69 Learning motion control basics The following actions are available: Moving the pointer Move your hand to move the pointer accordingly. Selecting an item Fold down and raise your index finger to select items. You can select a TV menu or run a function. Keeping your index finger lowered is like holding down a remote control button. Returning to the previous menu Make a circle with your hand in the counterclockwise direction to return to the previous menu. 70 Displaying the context-sensitive menu / Viewing broadcast information Fold your index finger down for 1 second and then raise it. This action displays the context-sensitive menu./ While viewing broadcasts, fold down your index finger for 1 second, and then raise it at any blank point on the screen. You can view the broadcast information saved automatically for all channels. Showing and hiding the animated motion guide (MENU/123) MENU System Motion Control Animated Motion Guide Try Now You can display an animated guide when motion control is activated. " When you run an app using motion control for the first time, the animated guide appears. Adjusting pointer speed (MENU/123) MENU System Motion Control Pointer Speed Try Now Select a pointer and adjust its speed. 70 71 Changing the motion control screen layout Showing the motion control screens while viewing a broadcast You can display the following screen icons by activating motion control while watching the TV. Select an icon to perform the associated action or function. The Direction Control Mode screen is displayed when you set Motion Control to On. Then, when you select the point at the centre of the icon, the TV displays the Motion Pointing Mode screen, as shown in the figures below. Direction Control Mode Motion Pointing Mode ● Direction Control Mode If you run Motion Control for the first time by raising you hand while viewing a broadcast, the Direction Control Mode screen appears. The screen contains the Direction Control icon. ● Motion Pointing Mode Move to point at the centre of the Direction Control icon with your index finger, and then fold down your index finger. The four icons allowing you to run the main functions of your TV appear. To switch to the Direction Control Mode screen, move your hand out of the screen and then raise your index finger at the screen. Icon Description Select and to adjust the volume. Select and to change the current channel. Select the point at the centre of this icon to change to the Motion Pointing Mode screen. Allows you to adjust the volume or select the speakers to use. Displays the channel list or information about the current programme. Launches Smart Hub. Displays the On-Screen Remote. 72 Showing the Direction Control icon while not viewing a broadcast To display the Direction Control icon while not viewing a broadcast, move to the centre of the top side of the screen, and then fold down you index finger. After the Direction Control icon appears, move the focus to the or , and then fold down your index finger to display the On-Screen Remote or launch Smart Hub. The Direction Control icon disappears when there is no user action for 5 or more seconds. Displaying the hidden direction control icon while using various services when not viewing broadcasts 73 Viewing Digital Broadcast Information at a Glance Using the guide (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Guide Try Now Try Now EPG You can get an overview of each digital channel's programme lineup from the Guide. You can move through the Guide in 24 hours jumps in either direction each time you press the or button. You can select the buttons that appear at the bottom of the screen by using the POINTER button of the Samsung Smart Control. " The information in the Guide is for digital channels only. Analogue channels are not supported. " To view the Guide, you must first set the TV's clock ((MENU/123) MENU System Time Clock). To access the Guide functions after launching the Guide, press and hold the Enter button on the remote control. A popup window listing the following functions appears. ● Channel Filter Filters the channels in the Guide screen by the selected filter. ● Schedule Manager Displays the schedule manager. " For information about the schedule manager, refer to "Setting Up a Schedule Viewing." ● Edit Favourite Channels Allows you to set a channel that you select in the Guide as a favourite. ● View Details Displays detailed information about a selected programme. The programme information may differ with the broadcast signal and may not be available at all for certain programmes. – Select a current programme on another channel, and then View Details to Watch or Record the programme. – Select an upcoming programme, and then select View Details to set up a Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording. " On the standard remote control, press the INFO button. " For more information about watching or Schedule Viewing refer to "Setting Up a Schedule Viewing." " For more information on Schedule Recording, refer to "Recording Programmes." This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " You can only view programmes scheduled after the current time. ● Record Starts instant recording for the selected programme. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. TV Viewing You can enhance your viewing experience by using the specific functions. Get information on TV programmes, edit schedule viewing, and use support functions. 74 Checking current programme info To get information about a show that you are watching, press the Enter or INFO button. To view information about, start instant recording for, or apply the Timeshift function on a current programme, select it in the Programme Info window. To view information about upcoming programmes, use the and buttons. To set up a Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording for a programme, select that programme. " To view the programme info, you must first set the TV's clock ((MENU/123) MENU System Time Clock). " The programme information may differ with the type of incoming signal and may not be available at all for certain programmes. " For more information on Schedule Recording, refer to "Recording Programmes." This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " For more information on Schedule Viewing, refer to "Setting Up a Schedule Viewing." Changing the broadcast signal (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Aerial Try Now You can choose your preferred method of receiving digital broadcasts. " This function is not needed if your TV is connected to a cable or satellite box. Checking digital channel signal info and strength (MENU/123) MENU Support Self Diagnosis Signal Information Try Now You can check the digital channel's signal information and strength. " If your TV is attached to a separate, over-the-air antenna, you can use the signal strength information to adjust the antenna for increased signal strength and improved HD channel reception. " This function is only available for digital channels. 74 75 Recording Programmes The appears next to programmes and channels for which a Schedule Recording has been set. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " Read all precautions before using the recording feature. Refer to "Before Using the Recording and Timeshift Functions" for more information. Recording programmes You can record current and upcoming programmes. Instant recording To begin recording the current programme right away, press the button on the standard remote control. Or, press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select the button on the On-Screen Remote. Using the instant and schedule recording options from the guide To start instant recording of a current programme, select that programme from the Guide, and then select Record. To start a schedule recording of a programme that will air in the future, select that programme from the Guide, press and hold the Enter button, select View Details, and then select Schedule Recording. Using the Instant and Schedule Recording options from programme info window To start instant recording or a schedule recording of a programme, press the Enter button. The Programme Info window appears. To start instant recording of a current programme, select . To start a schedule recording of a programme that will air in the future, press the or buttons to move to that programme, press the Enter button, and then select . 76 Using schedule recording to record on a specified date and time (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Schedule Manager Schedule 1. Select Schedule Recording. 2. Specify the Source, Channel, Repeat, Start Time, and End Time options for the programme you want to record, and then select OK to finish. Using the functions available while recording a programme Press the Enter button while recording a programme. The following buttons and the recording progress bar appear on the screen. ● More Info Displays detailed information about the programme being recorded. " The programme information may differ with the broadcasting signal and may not be available at all for certain programmes. ● Recording Time Sets the recording time. ● Stop Recording / Go to Live TV Stops recording. / Shifts viewing to live TV. Using the buttons on the remote control while recording a programme ● Pause / Play Press the or button on the remote control to pause the recording screen or resume the paused recording screen. When the recording is paused, you can use the following functions. However, no audio is heard while the recording is paused. – Step: Press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select the button to scan through a video one frame at a time. " On the standard remote control, press the button. – Slow Motion: Press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select the button to play the video back at 1/2 the normal speed. " On the standard remote control, press the button. ● Rewind / Fast Forward Press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select the or button to speed up rewind or fast forward to maximum speed in 7 steps. " On the standard remote control, press the or button. " This function is not available while you are watching a programme that is currently being broadcast. 76 77 Managing the schedule recording list (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Schedule Manager You can change the settings of scheduled recording sessions or cancel scheduled sessions altogether. Viewing recorded programmes Featured MY CONTENT 1. Select a USB recording device. The CONTENTS folder appears. 2. Select a recorded programme file from the CONTENTS folder to play the selected file. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. Using the functions available while playing a recording Press the Enter button. The following buttons appear. To hide the buttons, press the RETURN button. " Buttons that appear are different depending on the file being played. ● Pause / Play Pauses the file (recorded programme) or resumes playing the file if paused. When the video is paused, you can use the following functions. However, no audio is heard while the video is paused. – Step: Select the to scan through a video one frame at a time. – Slow Motion: Select the button to play the video back at 1/2 the normal speed. ● Previous / Next To restart the current video from the beginning, select the button. To play the next file (recorded programme), select the button. 78 ● Rewind / Fast Forward Speeds up rewind/fast forward to its maximum speed in 3 steps. To restore normal playback speed, select . " This function is not available while you are watching a programme that is currently being broadcast. ● Repeat Plays the current file repeatedly or all files in the same folder repeatedly. ● Highlights Player Displays highlights of the current recording. " This function is only available when highlights of a programme which was recorded in Sports Mode have been saved. ● Options Function Description Picture Size Changes the size of the screen. The supported picture sizes differ with the video. Subtitle Settings Subtitle: Turns the subtitles on or off. Subtitle Language: Changes the language. Picture Mode Changes the picture mode. Sound Mode Changes the sound mode. Speaker List Allows you to select the speakers to play the audio through. " This function is only available when you have a home theatre or receiver connected to the TV. Audio Language Allows you to select a different audio language. " This function is only available with files that support multi-track sound. Information Displays detailed information about the current file. 78 79 Managing recorded files Featured MY CONTENT Select a USB device containing recordings. A list of recordings appears. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. Using the functions for the saved file list ● Filter Displays only files that match the selected filter. ● Sort By Sorts files according to the selected viewing mode. " This function is unavailable if Filter is set to All. ● Delete Deletes the selected files, except for locked files. " This function is unavailable if Filter is set to All. ● Play Selected Plays the selected files. Select files from the file list and then select Play. If the viewing mode is set to Folder view, you can select the files included in the same folder only. Change the viewing mode to add a file contained in other folders to the playlist. " This function is unavailable if Filter is set to All. 80 Setting Up a Schedule Viewing The appears next to programmes that have been configured for a Schedule Viewing. " To set up a Schedule Viewing, you must first set the TV's clock ((MENU/123) MENU System Time Clock). Setting up a schedule viewing for a channel Setting up a schedule viewing for digital channel You can set up a schedule viewing for a digital channel on the Guide or Information screen. ● The Guide Screen On the Guide screen, use your remote control to highlight, and then select a programme you would like to view, and then press and hold the Enter button. Select Schedule Viewing on the pop-up menu that appears. The programme is scheduled for viewing. The Guide screen reappears. ● The Programme Info Screen Press the Enter button while you are watching the TV. The programme Info window appears. Press the or button to move to a programme you would like to view, and then press the Enter button. Select that appears on the programme Info window. The programme is scheduled for viewing. Setting up a schedule viewing for analogue channel (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Schedule Manager Try Now You can set up a scheduled viewing for an analogue channel. Select Schedule Schedule Viewing. Specify the Source, Channel, Repeat, and Start Time options for the programme you want to watch, and then select OK to finish. 80 81 Editing a schedule viewing (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Schedule Manager On the Scheduled screen, select a schedule viewing. A pop-up menu appears. Select Edit. Change the time, days, or channel. Select OK when done. Cancelling a schedule viewing (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Schedule Manager On the Scheduled screen, select a schedule viewing. A pop-up menu appears. Select Delete. Select OK on the pop-up menu. The schedule viewing is removed. " You can set up a maximum total of 30 Schedule Viewing and Schedule Recording entries. Using Timeshift You can pause and rewind live TV as you would a DVD by using Timeshift. Activating this function disables the Broadcasting function. " Read all precautions before using the Timeshift function. For more information, refer to "Before Using the Recording and Timeshift Functions." " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. To activate the Timeshift function while watching TV, press the Enter button, and then select on the programme Info window. The TV displays a progress bar and the following buttons at the top of the screen: ● More Info Displays detailed information about the current programme. " The programme information may differ with the type of incoming signal and may not be available at all for certain programmes. " This button is only available when you are watching a live programme. ● Record Starts instant recording for the current programme. ● Go to Live TV / Stop Timeshift Shifts to live TV or exits Timeshift. 82 Using the buttons on the remote control while using Timeshift ● Pause / Play Pauses the screen. Press the or button to pause or resume the current programme while using the Timeshift function. The following functions are available while the current programme is paused. However, there is no audio output while the current programme is paused. – Step: Press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select the button to scan through the current programme one frame at a time. " On the standard remote control, press the button. – Slow Playback: Press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select the or button to play current programme back at 1/2 the normal speed. " On the standard remote control, press the or button. ● Rewind / Fast Forward Press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select or button to speed up rewind or fast forward to maximum speed in 7 steps. " On the standard remote control, press the or button. " The Fast Forward function is not available while you are watching a programme that is currently being broadcast. Using the Channel List (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel List Try Now By using the Channel List, you can change the channel or check programmes on other digital channels while watching TV. To display the Channel List, place a finger on the POINTER button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select the icon that appears at the right side of the screen. On the standard remote control, press the CH.LIST button. The Channel List screen contains the following icons: ● : An analogue channel ● : A favourite channel ● : A locked channel 82 83 Press the button. The following functions are available: ● History Displays a list of channels that you viewed recently. ● Add a New List Allows you to create a new channel list by adding channels from a favourites list, genre, or your interest category. " The actual provided list may differ from specific geographical areas. ● All Displays all channels stored in the TV. ● Options Option Description Aerial Allows you to choose between Terrestrial, Cable, and Satellite. " This option is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. Sort Sorts the list by Channel Number or by Name (Digital channels only). Genre Sorts the list so that it includes channels of a selected genre only. However, Genre can only be used channels contain the genre information. Check the network and make sure the TV is connected to the Internet. Your TV needs to be connected to the Internet in order to receive the channel's genre information. Edit Channel Lists Allows you to rearrange the order of channels in the channel list or remove channels from the channel list. Edit Channel Allows you to remove channels from the channel index, restore removed channels, and rename analogue channels. Edit Favourites Sets favourite channels. " For more information, refer to "Creating a Personal Favourites List." 84 Registering, Removing, and Editing Channels (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Edit Channel Try Now Try Now The Edit Channel screen icons indicate the following: ● : An analogue channel ● : A favourite channel ● : A locked channel Registering and removing channels Removing registered channels You can remove a registered channel or all channels from the channel index. To remove a channel, select it, and then select Delete. To remove all channels, select Options Select All, and then select Delete. Editing registered channels You can access the following options by selecting Options on the screen. The available options may differ with the broadcast signal. ● Select All / Deselect All Selects or deselects all channels displayed on the Edit Channel screen. ● Sort Sort the list ordered by Number or Name. " This option is only available for digital channels. ● Aerial Allows you to choose between Terrestrial, Cable or Satellite. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. 84 85 ● Category Displays the channels of a selected category in the list. ● Edit Favourites Sets favourite channels. " For more information, refer to "Creating a Personal Favourites List." ● Rename channel Renames analogue channels. The new name can be up to 5 characters long. ● Information Displays detailed information about the current programme. Enabling / Disabling password protection on channels (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Edit Channel You can enable password protection on the channels that you don't want your children to view. " Before enabling password protection, ensure that Channel Lock ((MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Lock) is set to On. Locking / Unlocking channels You can lock or unlock channels. Select channels from the Edit Channel screen and then select Lock or Unlock at the bottom of the screen. When the password entry window appears, enter the password. Changing channel numbers (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Edit Channel Number You can change the channel numbers. Set Edit Channel Number to Enable. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " When a channel number is changed, its channel information is not updated automatically. 86 Creating a Personal Favourites List Favourite channels are highlighted in the Edit Channel and Channel List screens with the symbol. You can create up to 5 favourite channel lists. Registering channels as favourites (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Edit Favourites You can register multiple channels as favourites at the same time. 1. Select the channels that you want to add to your favourites list(s) from the list in the screen. 2. Select Change Fav. on the screen to select a favourites list. 3. Select Add on the screen. The TV adds the channels you selected to the favourites list you chose. Viewing and selecting channels on Favourites lists only (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel List You can flip through only the favourite list channels and select a channel using the channel up/down buttons. 1. Press the button. A favourites list appears. 2. Highlight a channel from the selected favourites list using the channel up/down buttons, and then select it. The channel changes. " A favourites list can be selected only if it contains at least one favourite channel. 86 87 Editing a Favourites List (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Edit Favourites Try Now Try Now Using the Edit Favourites screen menu items You can access the following options by selecting Options on the Edit Favourites screen. ● Select All / Deselect All Selects or deselects all channels saved on the TV. ● Copy to favourites Copies channels from one favourite channels list to another. " For more information, refer to "Copying channels from one favourites list to another." " This option is available only if you have registered one or more channels to at least one favourites list. ● Rename Favourites Rename an existing favourite channels list. " For more information, refer to "Renaming a favourites list." " This option is available only if you have registered one or more channels to at least one favourites list. ● Sort Sort the list ordered by Number or Name. " This option is only available for digital channels. ● Aerial Allows you to choose between Terrestrial, Cable or Satellite. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. ● Edit Channel Allows you to manage the channels saved on the TV. " For more information, refer to "Registering, Removing, and Editing Channels." 88 Removing registered channels from a favourites list Select Edit Favourites Change Fav. to move to the favourites list that has the channels you want to remove. Select the channels, and then select Delete. Rearranging a favourites list Select Edit Favourites Change Fav. to move to the favourites list that has the channels you want to rearrange. Select the channels, and then select Change order. The Change order highlight appears. Press the up/down arrow buttons to indicate the new location for the channels. Press the Enter button to set the channels into their new location. Renaming a favourites list Select Edit Favourites Options Rename Favourites. Select the favourites list you want to rename. Enter a new name using the on-screen keyboard that appears, and then select Done. Select OK. Copying channels from one favourites list to another Select Edit Favourites Change Fav. to move to the source favourites list, and then select the channels to copy. Select Options Copy to favourites. Select the destination favourites list, and then select OK. Select OK again. " Copy to favourites is only available if there are channels in at least one favourites list. 88 89 Making Sports programmes More Realistic with Sports Mode (MENU/123) MENU System Sports Mode Try Now You can use Sports Mode to get optimal picture and sound settings for sports events, making them appear and sound as if you are there. In addition, if a recording device is connected to the TV when you are using Sports Mode, you can use both the video recording and timeshift functions at the same time while watching the sports game, as well as watching the highlights extracted from the recorded sports game automatically or manually. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " For more information about recording a programme and using a recording device, refer to "Recording Programmes." " For more information about the Timeshift function, refer to "Using Timeshift." Enabling sports mode (MENU/123) MENU System Sports Mode Sports Mode You can set Sports Mode to On to make the picture and sound modes of the TV optimised automatically for sports events. " Enabling Sports Mode changes Picture Mode to Stadium and Sound Mode to Stadium, and disables some Picture and Sound menus. Choosing sports type (MENU/123) MENU System Sports Mode Sports Type You can enjoy optimal picture and sound settings for a selected sports type. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " The number of options available in Sports Type differ with the geographical area. 90 Extracting highlights automatically (MENU/123) MENU System Sports Mode Auto Highlights Try Now You can set Auto Highlights to On to configure the TV to extract highlights of a sports match automatically. However, Auto Highlights is not available with these TV operations: ● Switching the input signal using the SOURCE button. ● When Audio Description is on ● When 2 Tuner models record 2 channels simultaneously ● When you are viewing the content in MY CONTENT ● When the Screen Mirroring function is running " The performance of Auto Highlights depends on the characteristics of the transmitted signal. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " It is advisable to use Auto Highlights only while watching a football game. If you use this function for other sporting events, it may display irrelevant picture frames. Using the functions available while watching sports in sports mode You can use the following functions when you press the Enter button in sports mode. ● Zoom Pauses the current screen and zooms in any part of the screen by using the , , and buttons. " To launch this function easily, select or press the button. " This function is not available when PIP or MY CONTENT is active. " This function is not available when Data Service is active. 90 91 ● Manual Highlight Saves a video from 10 seconds before pressing this button to 10 seconds after. " To launch this function easily, select or press the button. " This function is only available when a recording is in progress. " You can set the TV to automatically save highlights without user intervention. Select (MENU/123) MENU System Sports Mode, and then set Auto Highlights to On. ● Recording Time Sets the recording time. " This function is only available when a recording is in progress. ● Stop Recording / Go to Live TV – Stops a recording when you are watching a live programme. – Switches to a live programme when you are watching a recorded programme. " This function is only available when a recording is in progress. ● Record Instantly records the game that you are currently watching on the TV. " This function is only available when the recording function is supported. ● Rewind / Fast Forward Press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select or button to speed up rewind or fast forward to maximum speed in 7 steps. " On the standard remote control, press the or button. " The Fast Forward function is not available while you are watching a programme that is currently being broadcast. ● Pause / Play Pauses or resumes the video. " This function is only available when a recording is in progress. 92 ● Highlights Player Displays the Highlights Player screen and plays automatically or manually the saved highlights in the recorded file. However, Highlights Player is not available with these TV operations: – Switching the input signal using the SOURCE button. – When Audio Description is on – When 2 Tuner models record 2 channels simultaneously " This function is only available when a recording is in progress. ● Watch Live TV at the same time Allows you to watch a current programme in a PIP window while watching a recorded programme. To exit PIP mode, press the button again. However, Watch Live TV at the same time is not available with these TV operations: – Switching the input signal using the SOURCE button. – When Audio Description is on – When 2 Tuner models record 2 channels simultaneously " This function is only available when a recording is in progress. " This function is only available while you are watching a recorded programme. ● More Info Displays detailed information about the current programme. " This function is only available while you are watching a live programme. Viewing a game recorded in sports mode You can view a recorded game using Recorded TV on the MY CONTENT screen. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " For more information, refer to "Viewing recorded programmes." Watching a Movie with Optimised Picture and Sound - African Cinema Mode (MENU/123) MENU System African Cinema Mode When you set African Cinema Mode to On, the TV provides an optimal picture and sound for popular content. You can also optimise your TV's picture size or position by Custom mode. To change a picture size or position, press the MENU/123 button on the Samsung Smart Control, and then select the button on the On-Screen Remote. On the standard remote control, press the button. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. 92 93 TV-Viewing Support Features Watching TV broadcasts with subtitles (MENU/123) MENU System Accessibility Subtitle You can watch TV broadcasts with subtitles. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " DVD subtitles are only available if the DVD player is connected to an external input connector. ● Subtitle Turns on or off the subtitle. ● Subtitle Mode Sets the subtitle mode. ● Subtitle Language Sets the subtitle language. " The TV cannot control or modify DVD or Blu-ray subtitles. To control DVD or Blu-ray subtitles, use the subtitle feature of the DVD or Blu-ray player and the player's remote control. Selecting the broadcasting subtitle language (MENU/123) MENU System Accessibility Subtitle You can select the default subtitle language. The list of modes may vary depending on the broadcast. ● Primary Subtitle Sets the primary subtitle language. ● Secondary Subtitle Sets the secondary subtitle language. 94 Reading digital text (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Digital Text You can use this function when you watch a broadcast that includes both text and multimedia content. " This function is only available in UK. " Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group (MHEG) is an International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the MPEG system which includes data-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and video files as well as multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including Video-On-Demand (VOD), Interactive TV (ITV), Electronic Commerce (EC), tele education, teleconferencing, digital libraries and network games. Scanning for available channels (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Auto Tuning Auto Tuning Try Now Try Now You can make the TV automatically scan and index all channels received through the TV's antenna input connector. Select Start. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " If the TV is connected to a cable box or satellite receiver, you do not need to do this. " DVB-T2 system may not be available in specific geographical areas. Selecting aerial connection type (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Aerial Connection Type You can watch TV broadcasts in a suitable aerial connection type. Select Single Oscillator or Dual Oscillator. " This function is available when Aerial is set to Satellite. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. 94 95 Selecting the broadcast audio language (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Audio Options Try Now You can select an audio option suitable for the broadcast content. ● Audio Language Changes the default audio languages. – Primary Audio: Sets the primary audio language. – Secondary Audio: Sets the secondary audio language. " The available language may differ with the broadcast. ● Audio Format Changes the audio format. " The supported audio format may differ with the broadcast programme. " This option is only available on digital channels. Audio Description (MENU/123) MENU System Accessibility Audio Description You can use the Audio Stream for the Audio Description (AD) which is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. Adjust the audio description volume using Volume. " This function is only available on digital channels. ● Audio Description Turns the audio description function on or off. ● Volume Adjusts the audio description volume. Genre Selection (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Genre Selection You can turn the channel genre selection feature on or off when you run Guide. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. Using adult genre (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Adult genre enabling You can enable or disable all adult services. When disabled, adult services will not be available. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. 96 Using the Channel Settings Try Now Setting the country (area) (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Country (Area) You can select your country so that the TV can correctly auto-tune the broadcasting channels. 1. Enter your PIN number. 2. Change your area. To change the country for digital channels, select Digital Channel. To change the country of analogue channels, select Analogue Channel. " This function is not available in all geographical areas. " The list of countries (areas) displayed on the TV's screen may differ with the geographical area. Tuning broadcast signals manually Try Now (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Manual Tuning You can scan for all the channels manually and store the scanned channels in the TV. To stop scanning, select Stop. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " This function is only available when Aerial is set to Terrestrial or Cable. Tuning digital channels (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Manual Tuning Digital Channel Tuning Select New Search to scan for digital channels automatically and store the scanned channel list in the TV. 96 97 Tuning analogue channels (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Manual Tuning Analogue Channel Tuning Select New and configure Programme, Colour System, Sound System, Channel, and Search to scan for analogue channels. Then, select Store to store the scanned channels in the TV. " This function is only available for analogue broadcasts. Fine-Tuning the screen Try Now (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Fine Tune When analogue pictures become shaky and full of noise, fine-tune the signal to clear up the picture. " This function is only available for analogue broadcasts. Transferring channel list (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Transfer Channel List You can import or export the channel list to a USB storage. ● Import from USB: Imports channel list from a USB storage. ● Export to USB: Exports channel list saved in the TV to a USB storage. " This function is available when USB is connected. Deleting CAM operator profile (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Delete CAM Operator Profile You can delete the CAM operator. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. 98 Setting satellite system (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Satellite System You can configure a set of satellite dish settings before performing a channel scan. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. Changing teletext language (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Teletext Language You can set or change the teletext language. To watch the teletext broadcast in your preferred language, select a language to use in Primary teletext. If this language is not supported, you can watch the teletext broadcast in your secondary preferred language set in Secondary teletext. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. Showing common interface menu (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Common Interface You can view information about common interfaces. ● CI Menu Enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu. Select the CI menu based on the menu PC Card. ● CAM video transcoding Configures the setting to transcode the video codec from the CAM automatically. Turn it Off if you do not want to use it. " You must use a CAM that supports video codec transcoding. ● Application Info Displays information about the CAM inserted into the CI slot and about the “CI or CI+ CARD” inserted into the CAM. You can install the CAM any time, with or without the TV turned on. ● CICAM PIN Manager Manages Common Interface Common Access Module (CICAM) PIN. Save PIN or change stored PIN and then set other PIN options. 99 Adjusting the Picture Quality Choosing a picture mode (MENU/123) MENU Picture Picture Mode Try Now You can select the picture mode that provides the best viewing experience. ● Dynamic Makes the picture clearer when the ambient lighting is so bright that it makes the picture difficult to see. ● Standard Is the default mode suitable for most environments. ● Natural Reduces eye strain. ● Movie Darkens the screen, reduces glare, and relieves eye fatigue. Use this mode while viewing the TV in a darkened room or watching a movie. ● Entertain Sharpens images for a more dynamic viewing experience. ● Stadium When you turn Sports Mode ((MENU/123) MENU System Sports Mode) to On, Picture Mode is set to Stadium automatically to configure the picture settings suitable to sports events. " When the Input source is set to PC, Standard and Entertain modes are only available. " When a PC is connected to the TV, but the Entertain mode is not available, set Edit Device Type to DVI PC or PC. Picture and Sound You can change the picture and sound settings for a better viewing experience. Change the picture and sound settings and use other picture and sound support functions. 100 Adjusting the picture quality (MENU/123) MENU Picture You can adjust the following picture quality settings manually for each combination of an input source and picture mode. ● Backlight Try Now Adjusts the brightness of individual pixels. Decrease this brightness to reduce power consumption. ● Contrast Try Now Adjusts the screen contrast. ● Brightness Try Now Adjusts the overall brightness. ● Sharpness Try Now Sharpens or dulls the edges of objects. ● Colour Try Now Adjusts the overall colour saturation. ● Tint (G/R) Try Now Adjusts the ratio of green to red. Increase the green value to saturate the greens and the red value to saturate the reds. " The TV saves the adjusted values for the current input source and picture mode and applies these values each time you select the same input source and picture mode. " The Colour and Tint (G/R) settings cannot be adjusted when the TV is connected to a computer via an HDMI-to-DVI cable. Applying the current picture settings to other input sources (MENU/123) MENU Picture Apply Picture Mode Try Now You can apply the picture quality settings to the current source and other input sources. ● All Sources Applies the settings to all external devices connected to the TV. ● Current Source Applies the settings to the current source only. 100 101 Adjusting advanced settings (MENU/123) MENU Picture Advanced Settings Try Now You can fine-tune how images are displayed on the TV screen for the Standard and Movie picture modes. ● Dynamic Contrast Try Now Automatically adjusts the screen contrast for an optimal contrast setting. ● Black Tone Try Now Adjusts the black colour depth. ● Flesh Tone Try Now Darkens or lightens skin tones. ● RGB Only Mode Try Now Adjusts the red, green, and blue levels individually. ● Colour Space Try Now Adjusts the range of colour that can be displayed on the screen. – Auto: Automatically adjusts the colour space to match the input signal. – Native: Applies a range of colours that is wider than the input signal. – Custom: Allows you to adjust the colour space manually. Select a colour, and then change its Red, Green, and Blue saturations. Reset allows you to restore the default values for Colour Space. " You can configure the Colour function only when Colour Space is set to Custom. ● White Balance Try Now Adjusts the colour temperature of the picture to make white objects look white and the overall picture appear natural. – 2 Point: Allows you to adjust red, green, and blue luminosity with the offset menu and brightness with the gain menu. Reset allows you to restore the default values. – 10 Point: Divides red, green, and blue into 10 sections each, and allows you to modify the white balance by adjusting the brightness of each section. Level allows you to select the section to adjust. " You can use the 10 Point function only when Picture Mode is set to Movie. This function may not be supported by some external devices. ● Gamma Try Now Adjusts the primary colour intensity. " Advanced Settings is only available when Picture Mode is set to Standard or Movie. " White Balance and Gamma are only available when the TV is connected to a computer with an HDMIto-DVI cable. 102 Adjusting picture options (MENU/123) MENU Picture Picture Options Try Now You can adjust the picture options to optimise your viewing experience. Select a picture mode and then adjust the picture options. ● Colour Tone Try Now Adjusts the colour tone. The colour tone you select is stored in the TV's memory. When you change the current picture mode, the stored colour tone is applied to the new picture mode automatically. " Cool and Standard are only available when Picture Mode is set to Dynamic. " Colour Tone is only available when the TV is connected to a computer via an HDMI-to-DVI cable. ● Digital Clean View Try Now Reduces static and ghosting caused by a weak signal. When you select Auto Visualisation, it displays the signal strength on the bottom of the screen. Green indicates the best possible signal. " This function is available for analogue channels only. ● MPEG Noise Filter Try Now Reduces MPEG noise and improves video quality. ● HDMI Black Level Try Now Compensates for effects caused by a low black level, such as low contrasts and dull colours. " This function is only available when the input signal, connected to the TV via an HDMI connector, is set to RGB444. 102 103 ● Film Mode Try Now Optimises the picture quality for movies. " This function is only available when the input signal is TV, AV, Component (480i, 1080i), or HDMI (1080i). ● Auto Motion Plus Removes blurring and judder from scenes with rapid movement. If you select Custom, you can configure Blur Reduction and Judder Reduction manually and set LED Clear Motion to On for a sharper LED image. To return to the default settings, select Reset. " This function is not available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " When LED Clear Motion is set to On, the screen appears darker than when it is Off. " If LED Clear Motion is On at 60Hz video signal, the screen may flicker. ● Analogue Clean View Reduces noise in the form of a diagonal line that occurs due to interferences between signals. " This function is only supported for analogue broadcasts. ● LED Clear Motion Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clear picture. " When LED Clear Motion is On, the screen appears darker than when it is Off. " If LED Clear Motion is On at 60Hz video signal, the screen may flicker. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. 104 Picture Support Functions Viewing a picture-in-picture (PIP) (MENU/123) MENU Picture PIP Try Now While viewing video from an external device such as a Blu-ray player on the main screen, you can view a TV broadcast in a picture-in-picture (PIP) window. ● PIP Activates/deactivates PIP. ● Aerial Selects the input source for the PIP window. ● Channel Selects the PIP channel. ● Size Sets the PIP window size. ● Position Sets the PIP window position. ● Sound Select Selects the audio source. " PIP cannot be used while Smart Hub is active. " Playing a game or using the karaoke function on the main screen can result in lower PIP picture quality. " The PIP function is only available under the following conditions: 1) The main screen's source is a Component or HDMI connection. 2) The input resolution is less than FHD (Full HD). " The PIP window supports digital channels only. 104 105 Changing the picture size and position Try Now Changing the picture size (MENU/123) MENU Picture Picture Size Picture Size Try Now You can change the size of the picture displayed on the TV screen. ● 16:9 Sets the picture size to the 16:9 wide screen format. ● Zoom Magnifies 16:9 pictures vertically. A magnified picture can be moved up and down. ● Custom Magnifies or shrinks 16:9 pictures vertically and/or horizontally. A magnified or shrunk picture can be moved left, right, up, and down. ● 4:3 Sets the picture size to the basic 4:3 mode. [ Do not watch TV in 4:3 mode for an extended period of time. This action may cause black bars to appear and rest for a while at the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the screen. Note that this information is not presented on the Warranty. " Supported picture sizes differ with the input signal. For more information about supported picture sizes, refer to "Picture sizes and input signals." Changing the picture size automatically (MENU/123) MENU Picture Picture Size Auto Wide When set to On, Your TV will automatically use the picture size recommended by the programme provider. 106 Changing the picture size in 4:3 or Screen Fit mode (MENU/123) MENU Picture Picture Size 4:3 Screen Size You can select a picture size suitable for your geographical area while you are watching TV in the 4:3 or Fit to screen mode. The supported screen sizes differ with the country and this function allows you to adjust the picture size in this case. " The 4:3 mode is not available when an external device is connected to the TV via a Component connector or an HDMI connector. Fitting the picture to the screen (MENU/123) MENU Picture Picture Size Fit to screen You can configure the TV so that the full picture fits the screen without any cutoff in the size you have chosen. " This function is not available depending on the Picture Size. Adjusting the picture position (MENU/123) MENU Picture Picture Size Zoom/Position Try Now Magnifies or shrinks 16:9 pictures vertically and/or horizontally. A magnified or shrunk picture can be moved left, right, up, and down. " This function is only available when Picture Size is set to Zoom or Custom. However, you cannot change the picture position when the TV is tuned to a digital channel and Picture Size is set to Custom. Listening to audio only (Picture Off) (MENU/123) MENU Picture Picture Off Try Now You can turn off the screen and play only the audio through the speakers. To turn the screen back on, press any button other than the Power and Volume buttons. Resetting the picture mode settings (MENU/123) MENU Picture Reset Picture Try Now You can reset the current picture mode to its factory defaults. This action does not affect the settings of other picture modes. 106 107 Adjusting the Sound Quality Choosing a sound mode (MENU/123) MENU Sound Sound Mode Try Now You can select a sound mode to optimise your listening experience. ● Standard Is the default mode suitable for most environments. ● Music Emphasises music instead of voices. ● Movie Provides the best sound for movies. ● Clear Voice Emphasises voices. ● Amplify Increases the overall intensity of high-frequency sound to help hearing-impaired listeners. ● Stadium When you turn Sports Mode ((MENU/123) MENU System Sports Mode) to On, Sound Mode is set to Stadium automatically so that the sound settings are fixed at settings most suitable for sporting events. " This mode is set automatically by the TV. You cannot set this mode manually. " This function is not available when you are listening to audio through external speakers. 108 Applying sound effects (MENU/123) MENU Sound Sound Effect Try Now You can apply sound effects to alter how the TV emits sound. ● Virtual Surround Try Now Produces sound that makes you feel like you are sitting in a movie theatre or concert hall. ● Dialog Clarity Try Now Increases voice intensity to make dialog clearer. ● Headphone Surround Try Now Experience home theatre-like surround sound through your headphones. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. ● Balance Try Now Allows you to adjust the sound settings of the left and right speakers for a better sound balance. To restore the defaults, select Reset. ● Equaliser Try Now Allows you to adjust the loudness of specific frequency ranges to control the richness of the sound. To restore the defaults, select Reset. " This function is not available when you are listening to audio through external speakers. " This function is only available when Sound Mode is set to Standard. 108 109 Using the Sound Support Functions Selecting speakers (MENU/123) MENU Sound Speaker Settings Speaker Select Try Now You can select which speakers the TV uses for audio output. " When Speaker Select is set so that sound comes from external speakers only, Volume and Mute buttons and some Sound functions are disabled. Specifying the TV's installation type (MENU/123) MENU Sound Speaker Settings TV Installation Type You can specify the TV's installation type, either Wall Mount or Stand, to optimise the TV's sound automatically. Listening to TV sound through a Samsung Bluetooth audio device (MENU/123) MENU Sound Speaker Settings TV SoundConnect You can connect Samsung Bluetooth audio devices to the TV. They must be paired using the TV's Bluetooth function. For more information on pairing, refer to the Samsung Bluetooth audio device's operating manual. ● Add New Device Adds a new device to the list of paired devices. If Add New Device is set to Off, the connection signals from new devices are ignored. ● Samsung Audio Device List Displays a list of paired Samsung audio devices. Select a device to display its menu options. You can activate/deactivate the audio device or remove it from the list. " This function is only available for Samsung audio devices that support TV SoundConnect. " TV SoundConnect, Surround, and Bluetooth headphones can't be used simultaneously. " Before using a Bluetooth device, refer to “Read Before Using Bluetooth Devices." 110 Listening to the TV through Bluetooth headphones (MENU/123) MENU Sound Speaker Settings Bluetooth Headphones You can connect Bluetooth headphones to the TV. They must be paired using the TV's Bluetooth function. For more information on pairing, refer to the Bluetooth headphone's operating manual. ● Bluetooth headphone List Displays a list of Bluetooth headphones that can be paired with the TV. Select a Bluetooth headphone to display its menu options. From this menu, you can activate/deactivate (i.e., pair/ unpair) the Bluetooth headphone or remove it from the list. " If the TV fails to find a headphone, place the headphone closer to the TV, and then select Refresh. " When you turn on a paired Bluetooth headphone, the TV detects it automatically, and then displays a pop-up window. Use this pop-up window to activate/deactivate the Bluetooth headphone. ● Multi-output Audio Allows you to listen to audio through the TV's speakers and the connected Bluetooth headphones simultaneously. " Before using a Bluetooth device, refer to “Read Before Using Bluetooth Devices." Listening to TV sound through a Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speaker (MENU/123) MENU Sound Speaker Settings Multiroom Link Multiroom Link Settings You can connect a Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speaker to the TV to enjoy a richer sound. ● Settings Sets the Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speaker(s) to one of the following options. – Surround Select this option when you want to enjoy a surround system using multiple Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speakers in a single space or room. – SoundBar+Surround Select this option when you want to enjoy a surround sound system by connecting a soundbar and two speakers to the TV in one space or room. 110 111 ● Volume Level Adjusts the volume of the speakers selected in the list. ● Speaker Test Sends a test sound to each speaker to make sure that your Multiroom Link system works properly. ● Edit Name Allows you to give a name to each speaker. " The Multiroom Link function is only available when at least one Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speaker is connected to the TV. " The Multiroom Link function is deactivated when you activate Screen Mirroring. " The networked speakers may disconnect on their own, depending on your network environment. " The sound quality may be affected by the condition of your wireless network. " Audio and video may become out of sync depending on your TV model. " The audio from the secondary device(s) may lag behind the audio and video of the main device which is playing the source content. " For more information, refer to the Multiroom Link manual on the Samsung web site. (www.samsung.com OWNERS & SUPPORT Manuals & Downloads) 112 Enabling digital audio output (MENU/123) MENU Sound Additional Settings Try Now Since this Smart TV is Sony/Philips Digital Interface Format (S/PDIF)-enabled, you can make the TV provide digital audio output to various digital audio devices, such as speakers, A/V receivers, and home theatres, by adjusting the following settings. ● DTV Audio Level Try Now Allows you to adjust the volume when you are viewing digital broadcasts on the TV through an A/V receiver. " This function is only available on digital channels. " The volume can be adjusted between 0 db and 10 db. However, this volume range may differ with the broadcast signal. " For the MPEG / HE-AAC broadcast signal, the volume can be adjusted between 0 db and 10 db. ● HDMI Audio Format Sets the audio input signal format suitable for the external device connected to the TV's HDMI port. ● Audio Format Try Now Selects the digital audio output (S/PDIF) format. The available formats are dependent on the input source. ● Audio Delay Try Now Helps correct timing mismatches between the audio and video tracks when you are watching TV and listening to audio through a digital audio device. You can adjust the delay by up to 250 ms. ● Dolby Digital Comp Try Now Sets the Dolby Digital compression mode. 112 113 ● HD Audio Provides the TV sound resampled at HD audio quality. " Standard audio signals are sampled at 48 kHz while HD audio signals are sampled at 96 kHz. " Some S/PDIF receivers may not be compatible. For incompatible receivers, deactivate this mode and use normal audio mode instead. " The HD audio signals available on the TV are not available on external audio players connected via HDMI, Bluetooth, or Wi-Fi networks. ● Auto Volume Try Now Automatically adjusts the TV's volume level when you change channels, video sources or content so that the volume level remains the same for all sources. Auto Volume can modify the volume up to 12 dB to equalise the sound. Normal can applies a normal level of volume adjustment, and Night can applies a slightly lower volume level. This option is ideal for late-night TV viewing. " If you want to use the volume control of a connected source device to control the sound, deactivate Auto Volume. When you use Auto Volume with a source device, the device's volume control may not function properly. Resetting all sound settings (MENU/123) MENU Sound Reset Sound Try Now Resets all sound settings to the factory defaults. 114 Setting the Time and Using the Timer Setting the current time (MENU/123) MENU System Time Clock Try Now You can set the clock manually or automatically. To view the time after the clock is set: – Samsung Smart Control: Press the MENU/123 button, and then select Info on the On-Screen Remote. – Standard remote control: Press the INFO button. " The clock must be reset every time the power is disconnected. Setting the clock using digital broadcast info (MENU/123) MENU System Time Clock Clock Mode Try Now You can make the TV automatically download time information from a digital channel and set the current time. To activate this function, set Clock Mode to Auto. If the TV is connected to a set-top box or satellite box using HDMI or Component connectors, you must set the current time manually. " This function works only when the TV's antenna jack is connected to either an antenna or a cable output and is receiving digital broadcasts. " The accuracy of the time information received may differ with the channel and signal. System and Support You can use the functions for optimising, protecting, and updating your TV and for various minor useful or required options. Customise various system and support settings for optimal use. 114 115 Setting the clock manually (MENU/123) MENU System Time Clock Clock Set Try Now You can set the clock manually. Set Clock Mode to Manual, and then input present date and time in date and time field. Setting the clock automatically (MENU/123) MENU System Time Clock Time Zone Sets the right time by setting Daylight Savings Time (DST) and your local time zone. " This function is only available when the Clock Mode is set to Auto. ● DST Switches the Daylight Saving Time (DST) function on or off. " This function is only available when the Clock Mode is set to Auto. ● GMT Selects your time zone. " When Country is set to others, you can use this function. If the clock is wrong in auto mode... (MENU/123) MENU System Time Clock Time Offset Try Now You can offset the clock in 1-hour increments by as much as -/+ 12 hours if the TV fails to display the correct automatically-set time, for whatever reason. " Time Offset adjusts the time through a network connection. This function is only available if Clock Mode is set to Auto and the TV is connected to the Internet though a local area network. " Time Offset adjusts the time if the TV fails to receive time information through normal digital broadcast signals. 116 Using the timers Using the sleep timer (MENU/123) MENU System Time Sleep Timer Try Now You can use this function to automatically shut off the TV after a pre-configured period of time. You can set the timer for 30 minute increments, for up to 3 hours. Turning on the TV using the on timer (MENU/123) MENU System Time On Timer Try Now You can set On Timer to make the TV turn on automatically at a specific time. You can use up to three separate configurations: On Timer 1, 2, and 3. On Timer is only available when Clock has already been set. ● Setup If you select Manual, you can highlight and select each day to select the specific days that you want On Timer to turn on the TV. ● Time ● Volume ● Source From the list, select a signal source for the TV to use when it turns on. If you want to play content saved in a USB device or content from an HDMI or Component source, such as a DVD player, Blu-ray player, or set-top box, connect the device to the TV before you start On Timer setup. Then, do not disconnect the device from the TV. ● Aerial Allows you to select a broadcast signal source, when Source is set to TV. ● Channel Allows you to select a channel, when Source is set to TV. 116 117 ● Music / Photo Allows you to specify a USB device folder containing music files in the music field and/or a folder containing photos in the photo field, when Source is set to USB. If you select both a folder that contains music files and a folder that contains photo files, the TV plays the music files and displays the photos at the same time. " If the folder that you choose has sub-folders, you can select a sub-folder in the same fashion. " This function does not work properly if the selected USB device does not contain media contents or a folder has not been specified. " No slideshow starts if there is only one image file on the USB device. " Folders with long names cannot be selected. " Make sure to use different folder names for multiple USB devices. " Use a USB memory stick or multi-card reader. On Timer may not work with certain battery-powered USB devices, MP3 players, or PMPs because the TV may take too long to recognise the device. Turning off the TV using the off timer (MENU/123) MENU System Time Off Timer Try Now You can set Off Timer to turn off the TV automatically at a specified time. You can set up three separate configurations: Off Timer 1, 2 and 3. Off Timer is only available when Clock has already been set. ● Setup Sets days of the week that the TV is turned off automatically. If you select Manual, you can highlight and select each specific day. ● Time Sets the time for the TV to turn off automatically. 118 Using the Screen Burn Protection and Energy Saving Functions Preventing screen burn (MENU/123) MENU System Auto Protection Time Try Now You can use the Screen Burn Protection function to protect the screen. Still images can leave burnin after-images if left on the screen for a long period of time. Select a time setting from the list. If a still image is shown on the screen for longer than the time that you selected, the TV automatically activates the Screen Burn Protection function. Reducing the energy consumption of the TV (MENU/123) MENU System Eco Solution Try Now You can adjust the brightness level of the TV and prevent overheating to reduce overall power consumption. ● Energy Saving Try Now Allows you to select a brightness setting from the list to reduce the TV's power consumption. ● Eco Sensor Try Now Automatically adjusts the brightness level of the TV, according to the ambient light level, to reduce power consumption. If the Eco Sensor has adjusted the screen's brightness level, you can select the Min. Backlight to manually adjust the minimum screen brightness. " When the Eco Sensor is set to On, the screen is darker than usual. ● No Signal Power Off Try Now Allows you to select a time from the list. If no signal has been received for a specified duration, the TV automatically cuts off the power to reduce power consumption. ● Auto Power Off Try Now Automatically turns off the TV to prevent overheating when the TV remains on for the specified period of time without any user input. ● Motion Lighting Try Now Adjusts the brightness in response to on-screen movements to reduce power consumption. " This function is only available when Picture Mode is set to Standard. " This function is deactivated when you adjust a picture quality setting, such as Contrast and Brightness. 118 119 Using Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) You can use the TV's remote control to control external devices that are connected to the TV by an HDMI cable and that support Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). Note that Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) can only be set by using the remote control. Setting up Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (MENU/123) MENU System Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Try Now ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Try Now You can enable or disable Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). Set to Off or On to disable or enable all Anynet+ related functions. ● Auto Turn Off Try Now When set to Yes, turns off Anynet+ compatible external devices when the TV is turned off. " This function is not supported by some Anynet+ compatible devices. ● Search for Devices Try Now Automatically searches for and identifies Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) compatible external devices that are connected to the TV. Using Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Selecting an external device After connecting external devices to the TV, select (MENU/123) MENU System Anynet+ (HDMICEC) Search for Devices. The TV displays a list of Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-compliant devices that you can set up as Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-enabled devices (i.e., devices that can be controlled with the TV's remote control). To set up an Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-compliant device as an Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)- enabled device, you must select it on the Source screen. Follow the instructions in the next section. " If an external device is set up as both an Anynet+-enabled device (i.e., a device that can be controlled with the TV's remote control) and a Universal Remote-enabled device (i.e., a device that can be controlled with the Universal Remote), it can be only controlled with the Universal Remote. 120 Setting up as an Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-enabled device 1. Press the SOURCE button on the remote control. On the Source screen, select the device and then press the button. 2. Select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) from the Tools list. The selected device is set up as an Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-enabled device. The following menu options are available. " The menu options available in the pop-up menu may differ with the external device. ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Sets up the selected device as an Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-enabled device and then displays a list of Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-compliant devices connected to the TV. Select View TV to exit Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), and start watching TV. Read before connecting an Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) " You can configure the TV's universal remote control to control third-party cable boxes, Blu-ray players, and home theatres that do not support HDMI-CEC. For more information, refer to "Controlling External Devices with the TV Remote - Using the Universal Remote." " Anynet+ cannot be used to control external devices that do not support HDMI-CEC. " Anynet+ devices must be connected to the TV with an HDMI cable. Note that some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). " The TV remote control may not work under certain circumstances. If this occurs, select the Anynet+ device again. " Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) works only with external devices that support HDMI-CEC and only when those devices are either in standby mode or turned on. " Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) can control up to 12 compatible external devices (up to 3 of the same type). With home theatre systems, however, the only one system can be controlled. " To listen to 5.1-channel audio from an external device, connect the device to the TV via an HDMI cable and connect the home theatre system directly to the TV's digital audio output connector. " A home theatre system that has been connected to the TV with an HDMI cable and an optical cable only supports 2-channel audio. 5.1-channel audio is, however, available for digital broadcasts with 5.1-channel audio. 120 121 Updating the TV’s Software (MENU/123) MENU Support Software Update Try Now You can view your TV’s software version and update it if necessary. Updating the TV’s software to the latest version (MENU/123) MENU Support Software Update Update now Try Now You can update your TV’s software by downloading the update from the Internet directly to your TV or copying the update from a USB device that contains it to your TV. " This function requires an Internet connection. " Save the update package in the USB device's top-level folder. Otherwise, the TV will not be able to locate the update package. [ DO NOT turn off the TV’s power until the update is complete. The TV turns off and on automatically after completing the software update. All video and audio settings return to the default settings after a software update. Updating the TV automatically (MENU/123) MENU Support Software Update Auto Update Try Now If the TV is connected to the Internet, you can have the TV's software update itself automatically while you are watching the TV. When the background update is completed, it is applied the next time the TV is used. " This function may take a longer time if a different networking function is running concurrently. " This function requires an Internet connection. " If you agree to the Smart Hub terms and conditions, Auto Update is set to On automatically. If you do not want the TV's software to update itself automatically, set Auto Update to Off. 122 Updating the TV manually To update your TV manually by using a USB device, follow these steps: " Record the current settings prior to updating so they can be re-loaded once updating is complete. All video and audio settings return to their default settings after a software update. 1. On a computer, visit Samsung's website and download the update package to a USB device. " Save the update package in the USB device's top-level folder. Otherwise, the TV cannot be able to locate the update package. 2. Connect the USB device with the update package to the TV. 3. In the TV’s menu, go to Support Software Update Update now. The TV searches for the software on the USB device. When it finds the software, the Update Request pop-up appears. 4. Select OK. The TV updates the software, turns off, and then turns back on automatically. [ DO NOT turn off the TV’s power until the upgrade is complete. The TV will turn off and on automatically after completing the software upgrade. All video and audio settings return to the default settings after a software upgrade. Protecting the TV from Hacking and Malicious Code (MENU/123) MENU System Smart Security Try Now You can use Smart Security to protect the TV from hacking and malicious code when connected to the Internet. Checking the TV and connected storage for malicious code (MENU/123) MENU System Smart Security Scan Try Now You can scan the TV and connected media to detect the presence of malicious code. If there is no malicious code detected, a notification window appears on the screen. 122 123 If malicious code is detected... If malicious code is found, the results of the scan will appear on the screen. This result window displays all malicious code found. You can either quarantine the code or isolate it to continue to run. 1. Select all the malicious code you want to either quarantine or block. 2. Select Isolate or Block. These options relocate the selected malicious code to the Isolated List or Blocked List. " The Isolated List displays all quarantined malicious codes. " The Blocked List displays all blocked malicious codes. You can also quarantine or allow codes from this list. Configuring additional functions (MENU/123) MENU System Smart Security Settings Try Now ● Antivirus Monitors the TV in real-time to prevent viruses from infecting the TV. ● Network Security Protects the TV from hacking to minimise a leaks of private information. ● Camera Permits the cameras connected to the TV to be used. ● Microphone Permits the microphones connected to the TV to be used. ● Auto Scan Makes the TV automatically scan itself and connected storage media when it is turned on. ● Auto Isolate Adds malicious codes found during the scanning process to the Isolated List automatically. 124 Using Other Functions Running the accessibility functions quickly You can use the Accessibility Shortcuts menu to quickly run the accessibility functions for the impaired. Press and hold the button on the Samsung Smart Control. Or, press the AD/SUBT. button on the standard remote. The Accessibility Shortcuts menu provides the Audio Description, Subtitle, Menu Transparency, High Contrast, Enlarge, and Multi-output Audio menu options. " The Accessibility Shortcuts menu may differ with the models. Adjusting the menu transparency (MENU/123) MENU System Accessibility Menu Transparency Try Now You can adjust the menu's transparency. " Setting High Contrast to On automatically switches the menu display mode to opaque. You cannot manually change the Menu Transparency settings. White text on black background (high contrast) (MENU/123) MENU System Accessibility High Contrast Try Now You can change major service screens to white text on a black background or change the transparent TV menus to opaque so that text can be more easily read. To activate this function, set High Contrast to On. Enlarging font (for the visually impaired) (MENU/123) MENU System Accessibility Enlarge Try Now You can zoom in the font on the screen. To activate this function, set Enlarge to On. 124 125 Listening to the TV through Bluetooth headphones (for the hearing impaired) (MENU/123) MENU System Accessibility Multi-output Audio Try Now You can turn on both of the TV speaker and Bluetooth headphones at the same time. With this function active, when you adjust the TV's volume, you can set the volume of the Bluetooth headphones to be louder than TV speaker. " When you connect the Bluetooth headphones to the TV, Multi-output Audio menu is activated. For more information about connecting Bluetooth headphones to the TV, refer to "Listening to the TV through Bluetooth headphones." Changing the menu language (MENU/123) MENU System Menu Language Try Now You can use this function to change the menu language. Choose a language from the list. Setting up a password (MENU/123) MENU System Change PIN Try Now You can set a Personal Identification Number (PIN) to lock channels, reset the TV, and change TV settings. The PIN input window appears. Enter a PIN. Enter it again to confirm it. The default PIN is 0000. (for France, Italy: 1111) " If you forget your PIN, you can reset it with your remote control. With the TV turned on, press the following buttons on the remote control to reset the PIN to 0000 (for France, Italy: 1111): MUTE → (Volume Up) → RETURN → (Volume Down) → RETURN → → RETURN. Checking Notifications (MENU/123) MENU System Notifications Try Now You can view the list of event messages generated by the TV. Notifications appear on the screen when events such as an update release for an app or Samsung Account login/logout occurs. " To delete all notifications, select Delete All. " To check the SMART TV's service notifications in a web browser, select Service Notice. 126 Programme Rating Lock (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Programme Rating Lock The Programme Rating Lock blocks programmes with ratings higher than those desired. This is useful for controlling what children watch on TV. This will not function for programmes originating from external sources, such as DVD players or USB files. This PIN is required to watch a blocked programme. The Broadcasting is not available in HDMI or Component mode. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. Enabling game mode (MENU/123) MENU System General Game Mode Try Now You can enable the game mode to optimise the TV's settings for playing video games with a gaming console, such as a PlayStation™ or Xbox™. " The game mode is not available for normal TV viewing. " The screen may shake somewhat. " When the Game Mode is enabled, Picture Mode and Sound Mode are switched to Game automatically. " To use a different external device, first disconnect the game console and disable the Game Mode. Richer colours and superior picture quality (BD Wise) (MENU/123) MENU System General BD Wise Try Now You can enhance colours and picture quality if you connect a Samsung DVD player, Blu-ray player, or home theatre system that supports BD Wise. When BD Wise is enabled, it automatically optimises the TV's resolution. " This function is only available when the external device is connected via an HDMI cable. Enabling/Disabling sound feedback (MENU/123) MENU System General Sound Feedback Try Now You can use Sound Feedback to get audio cues as you navigate through menus and select menu options. You can set it to Low, Medium, High, or Off. 126 127 Locking/Unlocking the Control Stick (MENU/123) MENU System General Panel Lock Try Now You can lock and unlock the front panel buttons (menu, channel, and volume) of the TV and the control stick on the back of the TV. Showing/Hiding the Samsung logo while booting (MENU/123) MENU System General Boot Logo Try Now You can enable or disable the Samsung logo display that appears when the TV starts up. " This function is not available when Samsung Instant On is set to On. Enabling the TV to boot faster (MENU/123) MENU System General Samsung Instant On Try Now You can set Samsung Instant On to On so that the TV boots up faster. " When Samsung Instant On is set to On, the use history of the apps that you used on the TV may be stored in the TV. " Even if the Samsung Instant On function is on, the power consumption while the TV is turned off meets the standby power consumption specification presented on the product label. " The Samsung Instant On function works when you turn on the TV while its power cable is still connected after you set Samsung Instant On to On. If you disconnect, reconnect the power cable, and then turn on the TV, this function does not work. Removing Flickering (MENU/123) MENU System General Anti Flicker Change the power frequency for the cable to stop the camera from flickering. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. 128 Registering the TV as a DivX-certified device (watching for pay DivX movies) (MENU/123) MENU System DivX® Video On Demand You can watch DivX DRM protected movies on the TV, only if it is registered as a DivX-certified device. " Digital Rights Management (DRM) functions as a technical security mechanism to protect the content provider's copyright. " You can watch recorded movies or free DivX movies without registration. " Visit the DivX website (http://www.divx.com) and log in to your user account before registering the TV as a DivX-certified device. If you do not have an account, create one. Restoring the TV to the factory settings (MENU/123) MENU Support Self Diagnosis Reset Try Now You can restore all TV settings (excluding the Internet and network settings) to the factory defaults. 1. Select Reset. The security PIN entry window appears. 2. Enter the security PIN and select Yes. All settings are then reset. The TV turns off and on again automatically and displays the Setup screen. " For more information on Setup, refer to the user manual that came with the TV. Using the TV as a display model (for retail stores) (MENU/123) MENU Support Use Mode Try Now You can turn the TV into a display model for retail environments by setting this mode to Store Demo. " For all other uses, select Home Use. " With Store Demo, some functions are disabled, and the TV automatically resets itself after a preset amount of time. 128 129 Running Data Service Automatically " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. (MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Channel Settings Auto Run Data Service You can set whether or not to automatically run data service. If the channel you are currently watching provides data service, you can enjoy a variety of data services by selecting the button. " This function is not available when any other secondary function is under way. " Provided data service information may vary depending on the broadcast. " Changing the channel with the numeric keys while using data service may not be available, depending on the service. " If Auto Run Data Service is On, the loading screen is displayed and the function is not available temporarily. HbbTV " In some countries, HbbTV is a data service. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. " Some broadcasting may not support the HbbTV. To use HbbTV, download, install and run HbbTV Widget from SAMSUNG APPS, then follow the instructions on the screen. HbbTV is turned off by default. To use HbbTV, go to (MENU/123) MENU System Data Service and set it Enable. (Depending on the country) ● HbbTV is not available when Timeshift is running or when a recorded video is being played back. ● An application on HbbTV may malfunction temporarily depending on the circumstances of the broadcast station or application provider. ● An application is only available for use on HbbTV when the TV network is connected to an external network. The application may malfunction depending on the network conditions. ● If the current channel is compatible with both the HbbTV and non-HbbTV text input modes, activate TTX by select TTX key twice. Using HbbTV: ● When the screen indicates (with the , etc.) that HbbTV is being accessed. ● Select TTX using the remote once to enter the HbbTV text-input mode. ● Select TTX using the remote twice to enter the non-HbbTV text-input mode. 130 Using a TV Viewing Card (“CI or CI+ Card”) The connection method of your TV viewing card may differ with models. " Turn the TV off to connect or disconnect a “CI or CI+ Card”. [ We recommend that you insert the “CI or CI+ Card” (viewing card) before you mount the TV on the wall because it may be difficult and dangerous to do this when it is on the wall. Connecting the “CI or CI+ Card” via COMMON INTERFACE slot Connect the “CI or CI+ Card” to the COMMON INTERFACE slot as shown in the image below. 130 131 Connecting the “CI or CI+ Card” via COMMON INTERFACE slot with the CI CARD Adapter Attaching the CI CARD Adapter via COMMON INTERFACE slot To attach the CI CARD Adapter to the TV, follow these steps: 1. Insert the CI CARD Adapter into the two holes on the product 1. " Please locate the two holes at the back of the TV next to the COMMON INTERFACE slot. 2. Connect the CI CARD Adapter to the COMMON INTERFACE slot on the product 2. 132 Connecting the “CI or CI+ Card” Connect the “CI or CI+ Card” to the COMMON INTERFACE slot as shown in the image below. Using the “CI or CI+ Card” To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted. ● Samsung TV follow up CI+ 1.3 standard. When TV product display the "Scrambled Signal", it may happen due to CI+ 1.3 Version inconsistency. If you have a problem, please contact Samsung Call Centre. ● If you don’t insert the “CI or CI+ CARD”, some channels will display the “Scrambled Signal” message. ● The pairing information containing a telephone number, the “CI or CI+ CARD” ID, the Host ID, and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider. ● When the configuration of channel information has finished, the message “Updating Completed” is displayed, indicating the channel list is updated. " You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD” from a local cable service provider. " When removing the “CI or CI+ CARD”, carefully pull it out with your hands since dropping the “CI or CI+ CARD” may cause damage to it. " Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the direction marked on the card. " The location of the COMMON INTERFACE slot may be different depending on the model. " “CI or CI+ CARD” is not supported in some countries and regions; check with your authorised dealer. " If you have any problems, please contact a service provider. " Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” that supports the current aerial settings. The screen will be distorted or will not be seen. 132 133 Teletext Feature " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. The index page of the Teletext service gives you information on how to use the Service. For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be displayed. " You can change Teletext pages by select numeric using your remote control. /Teletext on / mix / off: Activates the Teletext mode for the current channel. Press twice to overlap the Teletext mode with the current broadcasting screen. Press it one more time to exit teletext. 8 Store: Stores the Teletext pages. 4 Size: Displays the teletext on the upper half of the screen in double-size. To move the text to the lower half of the screen, press it again. For normal display, press it once again. 9 Hold: Holds the display at the current page, in the case that there are several secondary pages that follow automatically. To undo, press it again. Colour buttons (red, green, yellow, blue): If the FASTEXT system is used by the broadcasting company, the different topics on a Teletext page are colour-coded and can be selected by coloured buttons. Press the colour corresponding to the topic of your choice. A new colour coded page appears. Items can be selected in the same way. To display the previous or next page, select corresponding coloured button. 0 Mode: Selects the Teletext mode (LIST / FLOF). If pressed during LIST mode, switches the mode to List save mode. In List save mode, you can save a Teletext page into a list using the 8 (store) button. 1 Sub-page: Displays the available sub-page. 2 Page up: Displays the next Teletext page. 3 Page down: Displays the previous Teletext page. 6 Index: Displays the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing Teletext. 5 Reveal: Displays the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display the normal screen, press it again. 7 Cancel: Shrinks the Teletext display to overlap with the current broadcast. 134 Typical Teletext page Part Contents A Selected page number. B Broadcasting channel identity. C Current page number or search indications. D Date and time. E Text. F Status information. FASTEXT information. 135 Getting Support Support through Remote Management (MENU/123) MENU Support Remote Management Try Now If you need assistance with your TV, you can use this feature to let Samsung Electronics diagnose your TV remotely. You will need to read and agree to the service agreement before using this feature. A Samsung Electronics technician will then diagnose, repair, and update your TV remotely. " This option requires an Internet connection. What Does Remote Service Do? Samsung Remote Support service offers you one-on-one support with a Samsung Technician who can remotely. ● Diagnose your TV ● Adjust the TV settings for you ● Perform a factory reset your TV ● Install recommended firmware updates Troubleshooting You can get support for a problem with your TV, or try to troubleshoot known problems. Find information for service. 136 How Does it Work? Having a Samsung Tech remotely service your TV is easy. Call the Samsung Contact Centre and ask for remote support. Open the menu on your TV and go to the Support section. Select Remote Management, and then read and agree to the service agreements. When the PIN screen appears, provide the PIN number to the agent. The agent accesses your TV. Finding the contact information for service (MENU/123) MENU Support Contact Samsung You can view the address of the Samsung website, the call centre phone number, your TV's model number, your TV's software version, the Smart Hub info, and other information you may need to get service support from a Samsung call agent or the Samsung website. " To view the Open Source Licence, press the button. 136 137 There Is a Problem with the Picture Testing the picture (MENU/123) MENU Support Self Diagnosis Picture Test Try Now Before you review the list of problems and solutions below, use Picture Test to determine if the problem is caused by the TV. The Picture Test displays a high definition picture you can examine for flaws or faults. The problem Try this! Flickering and Dimming If your Samsung Television is flickering or dimming sporadically, you may need to disable some of the energy efficiency features. Disable Energy Saving ((MENU/123) MENU System Eco Solution Energy Saving) or Eco Sensor ((MENU/123) MENU System Eco Solution Eco Sensor). Component Connections/Screen Colour If the colour on your Samsung television screen is not correct or the black and white colours are off, run Picture Test ((MENU/123) MENU Support Self Diagnosis Picture Test). If the test results indicate that the problem is not caused by the TV, do the following: ● Confirm that the TV's video input connectors are connected to the correct external device video output connectors. ● Check the other connections as well. If the TV is connected to an external device via a component cable, confirm that the Pb, Pr, and Y jacks are plugged into their proper connectors. Screen Brightness If the colours on your Samsung TV are correct but just a little too dark or bright, try adjusting the following settings first. ● Go to the Picture menu and adjust the Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour, and Tint (G/R) settings. Ghosting, Blurring, or Juddering If you notice ghosting or blurring on the screen, use the Auto Motion Plus function((MENU/123) MENU Picture Picture Options Auto Motion Plus) to resolve the issue. Unwanted Powering Off If your Samsung TV appears to turn off by itself, try disabling some of the TV's energy efficiency functions. See if Sleep Timer ((MENU/123) MENU System Time Sleep Timer) has been enabled. The Sleep Timer automatically turns the TV off after a specified period of time. If the Sleep Timer has not been enabled, see if No Signal Power Off ((MENU/123) MENU System Eco Solution No Signal Power Off) or Auto Power Off ((MENU/123) MENU System Eco Solution Auto Power Off) has been enabled and disable them. Problems Powering On When the TV is turned on, the remote control receiver flashes 5 times before the screen turns on. If you are having problems powering on your Samsung television, there are a number of things to check before calling the service department. Confirm that the TV's power cord is connected correctly at both ends and that the remote control is operating normally. Make sure that the antenna cable or cable TV cable is firmly connected. If you have a cable/satellite box confirm that it is plugged in and turned on. Unable to find a Channel If your TV is not connected to a cable box or satellite box, run Setup ((MENU/123) MENU System Setup) or Auto Tuning (Broadcasting Auto Tuning). 138 The problem Try this! The TV image does not look as good as it did in the store. Store displays are all tuned to digital, HD (high definition) channels. If you have an analogue cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality. Many HD channels are upscaled from SD (Standard Definition) content. Look for a channel that is broadcasting true HD content. ● Cable/Satellite Subscribers: Try HD channels from the channel lineup. ● Terrestrial/Cable Antenna Connection: Try HD channels after running the Auto Tuning function. Adjust the cable/satellite box's video output resolution to 1080i or 720p. The picture is distorted. The compression of video content may cause picture distortions, especially in fast moving pictures from sports programmes and action movies. A weak or bad quality signal can cause picture distortions. This is not an issue with the TV. Mobile phones used close to the TV (within 1m) may cause noise in analogue and digital channels. The colour is wrong or missing. If you’re using a Component connection, make sure that the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause colour problems or a blank screen. The colour is poor or the picture is not bright enough. Go to the Picture menu and then adjust the Picture Mode, Brightness, Sharpness, and Colour settings. See if Energy Saving ((MENU/123) MENU System Eco Solution Energy Saving) has been enabled. Try resetting the picture. ((MENU/123) MENU Picture Reset Picture) There is a dotted line on the edge of the screen. Change Picture Size to 16:9. Change the cable/satellite box resolution. The picture is black and white. If you are using AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow) to the TV's green component jack. " If the test picture does not appear or there is noise or distortion, the TV may have a problem. Contact Samsung’s Call Centre for assistance. " If the test picture is displayed properly, there may be a problem with an external device. Please check the connections. " If the problem persists, check the signal strength or refer to the external device’s user manual. 138 139 I Can't Hear the Sound Clearly Testing the sound (MENU/123) MENU Support Self Diagnosis Sound Test Try Now If the TV plays the Sound Test melody without distortion, there may be a problem with an external device or the broadcast signal's strength. The problem Try this! There is no sound or the sound is too low at maximum volume. Check the volume control of the device (cable/satellite box, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) connected to your TV. The picture is good but there is no sound. Set (MENU/123) MENU Sound Speaker Settings Speaker Select to TV Speaker. If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output option. (For example, you may need to change your cable box’s audio option to HDMI if the box connected to your TV is using an HDMI cable.) To listen to the computer sound, connect the external speaker to the computer’s audio output connector. If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it. Reboot the connected device by disconnecting and then reconnecting the device’s power cable. The speakers are making an odd sound. Make sure that the audio cable is connected to the correct audio output connector on the external device. For antenna or cable connections, check the signal information. A low signal level may cause sound distortions. Run Sound Test ((MENU/123) MENU Support Self Diagnosis Sound Test). 140 There Is a Problem with the Broadcast The problem Try this! The TV is not receiving all channels. ● Confirm that the coaxial cable is securely connected to the TV. ● Run Setup ((MENU/123) MENU System Setup) or Auto Tuning ((MENU/123) MENU Broadcasting Auto Tuning). ● If you are using an antenna, verify it is positioned correctly and the all the connections are secure. There are no subtitles with digital channels. Go to Subtitle ((MENU/123) MENU System Accessibility Subtitle) and change the Subtitle Mode. Some channels may not have subtitle data. The picture is distorted. The compression of the video content may cause picture distortions. This is especially true with fast moving pictures from sports programmes and action movies. A weak signal can cause picture distortions. This is not a problem with the TV. My Computer Won't Connect The problem Try this! The "Mode Not Supported" message appears. Set your PC’s output resolution so it matches a resolution supported by the TV. The video is OK but there is no audio. If you are using an HDMI connection, check the audio output setting on your PC. If you are using an HDMI-to-DVI cable, a separate audio cable is required. I Can't Connect to the Internet The problem Try this! The wireless network connection failed. Confirm your wireless modem/router is on and connected to the Internet. The software update over the Internet has failed. Check the network connection status ((MENU/123) MENU Network Network Status). If the TV is not connected to a network, connect to a network. The upgrade stops if you already have the latest software version. 140 141 Data Service The Problem Try this! Why am I getting onscreen messages when I haven't selected the Data Service option? If Auto Run Data Service is set to On, messages will automatically appear on the screen when you watch a broadcast that supports the Data Service. If the broadcast doesn't support the Data Service, no messages will appear on the screen. If you do not wish to receive Data Service messages, disable Auto Run Data Service. How do I hide Data Service messages? Press and hold the RETURN button. If you do not wish to receive Data Service messages, disable Auto Run Data Service. How do I use the Data Service? Enabling the Auto Run Data Service option automatically displays messages on the screen whenever you watch a broadcast that supports the Data Service. You can press the corresponding buttons shown on the screen to access additional features and functions offered by that broadcast. What is an interactive service and how does it work? Interactive services include viewer surveys, quizzes, ticket requests, product purchases, and other interactions between the viewer and the TV station. Generally, you will need to set up an account with the broadcaster and log in to the account in order to enjoy the interactive services they offer. Note that interactive services are only available when your TV is connected to the Internet. In addition, T-Commerce requires that you have a certificate. Copy your certificate from the computer to a USB device and connect that device to the TV. (Interactive services are not being offered yet. The actual service launch date varies depending on the broadcaster.) A message displays "Receiving" but no change happens. This indicates an error has occurred while receiving data. An execution error message will also appear on the screen. If this happens, try again. Nothing appears on the screen after the Data Service is launched. The Data Service may be initialising or the signal may have been severed by the broadcaster. The Schedule Recording/Timeshift Function Isn't Working The problem Try this! Schedule Recording cannot be used. Check if there is a USB device connected to the TV. Recording will automatically stop if the signal becomes too weak. The Timeshift function will not work if there isn't enough storage space on the USB device. 142 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Isn't Working The problem Try this! Anynet+ does not work. Confirm that the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only. Check if the power cord of the Anynet+ device is properly connected. Check the cable connections of the Anynet+ device. Go to Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ((MENU/123) MENU System Anynet+ (HDMICEC)) and see if Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) has been set to On. Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode. Check whether the remote control is Anynet+ compatible. Anynet+ may not function when some other functions are active, including Channel Search, Smart Hub, Plug & Play, etc. If you have disconnected and then reconnected the HDMI cable, scan for devices again or turn your TV off and on. I want to start Anynet+. Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV, and then select the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ((MENU/123) MENU System Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)) menu to see if Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On. I want to exit Anynet+. Select View TV from the Anynet+ menu. Select a non-Anynet+ device from the Source list. The message "Connecting to Anynet+ device..." or "Disconnecting from Anynet+ device" appears on the screen. You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a viewing mode. Use the remote control after the TV has completed the Anynet+ configuration or has switched to a viewing mode. The Anynet+ device won't play. You cannot use the play function when Setup is in progress. The connected device is not displayed. Check whether the device supports Anynet+. Check whether the HDMI cable is properly connected. Go to Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ((MENU/123) MENU System Anynet+ (HDMICEC)) and see if Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) has been set to On. Scan for Anynet+ devices again. Anynet+ devices must be connected to the TV using an HDMI cable. Make sure the device is connected to your TV with an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+. If the connection is terminated because there has been a power failure or the HDMI cable has been disconnected, please scan for the device again. The TV audio is not being played through the receiver. Connect an optical cable to the TV and the receiver. ARC enables the TV to output digital sound via the HDMI (ARC) port. However, ARC is only available when the TV is connected to an audio receiver that supports ARC. 142 143 I Have Trouble Launching/Using Apps The problem Try this! I launched an app, but it's in English. How can I change the language? Languages supported by the app may be different from the user interface language. The ability to change the language depends on the service provider. My application is not working. Check with the service provider. Refer to the Help section on the application service provider's website. My File Won't Play The problem Try this! Some files can't be played. This problem may occur with high-bitrate files. Most files can be played back, but you might experience problems with high-bitrate files. I Want to Reset the TV Reset Path Description Reset Settings (MENU/123) MENU Support Self Diagnosis Reset Reset Picture, Sound, Channel, Smart Hub, and all other settings, except for the network settings, default settings. Resetting Smart Hub (MENU/123) MENU Smart Hub Reset Smart Hub Resets all Smart Hub settings to their factory defaults and deletes all information related to Samsung accounts, linked service accounts, Smart Hub service agreements, and Smart Hub applications. 144 Other Issues The problem Try this! The TV is hot. Watching TV for an extended period of time causes the panel to generate heat. The heat from the panel is dissipated through internal vents running along the top of the TV. The bottom, however, may feel hot to the touch after extended use. Children watching TV need constant adult supervision to prevent them from touching the TV. This heat, however, is not a defect and does not affect the TV's functionality. The picture won’t display in full screen. HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying upscaled SD (4:3) content. Black bars will appear at the top and bottom of the screen when you watch movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. Adjust the picture size options on your external device or set the TV to full screen. The "Mode Not Supported" message appears. The output resolution of the attached device is not supported by the TV. Check the TV's supported resolutions and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. The Subtitles item in the TV menu is greyed out. You cannot select the Subtitles menu if you have selected a source connected to the TV via HDMI or Component. To view subtitles, turn on the external device's subtitle function. The TV smells of plastic. This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. The Signal Information option under Self Diagnosis isn't activated. Verify that the current channel is a digital channel. The Signal Information is only available for digital channels. The TV is tilted to the side. Remove the base stand from the TV and reassemble it. 144 145 The problem Try this! The Broadcasting option has been deactivated. Broadcasting is only available when the Source is set to TV. The Broadcasting menu cannot be accessed while you watch TV using a cable box or satellite receiver. The Broadcasting menu cannot be accessed while a recording is in progress or the timeshift function is running. The settings are lost after 5 minutes or every time the TV is turned off. If the Use Mode is set to Store Demo, the TV's audio and video settings are automatically reset every 5 minutes. Change the Use Mode ((MENU/123) MENU Support Use Mode) to Home Use. There is an intermittent loss of audio or video. Check the cable connections and reconnect them. Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If you are mounting the TV to a wall, we recommend using cables with 90-degree connectors. There are small particles on the TV's bezel. This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. The PIP menu is not available. PIP functionality is only available when you are viewing video from an HDMI or Component source on the main screen. A POP (TV’s internal banner ad) appears on the screen. Change the Use Mode ((MENU/123) MENU Support Use Mode) to Home Use. The TV is making a popping noise. The expansion and contraction of the TV's outer casing may cause a popping noise. This does not indicate a product malfunction. The TV is safe to use. The TV is making a humming noise. Your TV utilises high-speed switching circuits and high levels of electrical current. Depending on the TV's brightness level, the TV may seem slightly noisier than a conventional TV. Your TV has undergone strict quality control procedures that meet our demanding performance and reliability requirements. Some noise coming from the TV is considered normal and is not an acceptable cause for an exchange or refund. 146 Before Using the Recording and Timeshift Functions " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. Before using the recording and schedule recording functions ● To set up a Schedule Recording, you must first set the TV's clock. Set the Clock ((MENU/123) MENU System Time Clock). ● You can set up a maximum total of 30 Schedule Viewing and Schedule Recording entries. ● Recordings are DRM-protected and therefore cannot be played back on a computer or on a different TV. In addition, these files cannot be played back on your TV if its video circuit has been replaced. ● A USB hard drive with a speed of 5,400 rpm or above is recommended. However, RAID-type USB hard drives are not supported. ● USB memory sticks are not supported. ● The total recording capacity may differ with the amount of available hard drive space and the recording quality level. ● Schedule Recording requires at least 100MB of free space on the USB storage device. Recording will stop if the available storage space falls below 50MB while recording is in progress. ● If the available storage space falls below 500MB while both the Schedule Recording and Timeshift functions are in progress, only the recording will stop. ● The maximum recording time is 720 minutes. ● A video is played according to the TV settings. ● If the input signal is changed while recording is in progress, the screen will go blank until the change is made. In this case, recording will resume, but will not be available. ● When using the Record or Schedule Recording function, the actual recording may start a second or two later than the specified time. Precautions and Notes You can get instructions and information that you should read before using various functions. Read instructions and information, and look for the definitions of terms. 146 147 ● If the Schedule Recording function is operating while a recording is being made on an HDMICEC external device, the priority is given to the Schedule Recording. ● Connecting a recording device to the TV automatically deletes abnormally saved recording files. ● If the Off Timer or Auto Power Off has been set, the TV will override these settings, continue to record, and turn off after the recording has ended. Before using the timeshift function ● A USB hard drive with a speed of 5,400 rpm or above is recommended. However, RAID-type USB hard drives are not supported. ● USB memory sticks or flash drives are not supported. ● The total recording capacity may differ with the amount of available hard drive space and the recording quality level. ● If the available storage space falls below 500MB while both the Schedule Recording and Timeshift functions are in progress, only the recording will stop. ● The maximum amount of time available for the Timeshift function is 90 minutes. ● The Timeshift function is not available for locked channels. ● A time-shifted video is played according to the TV settings. ● The Timeshift function may be terminated automatically once it reaches its maximum capacity. ● The Timeshift function requires at least 1.5GB of free space available on the USB storage device. 148 S Recommendation disclaimer " Some of the features recommended by S Recommendation may not be available on all models. S Recommendation with voice interaction For recommendations given in response to common speech commands: Voice Interaction is limited to the official language of the country of purchase. Performance may vary based on content availability, the clarity and volume of your voice, and ambient noise levels. Strong regional accents may not be recognised. Certain Samsung Smart TV features may not be available if you do not give your expressed consent to the collection and use of personal information. Certain features within S Recommendation require Internet access and may not be available based on service provider, language, dialect, and region. Your remote control may differ from the images shown in this manual. S Recommendation For content recommendations given to fit your TV viewing preferences: Certain Samsung Smart TV features may not be available if you do not give your expressed consent to the collection and use of personal information. Certain features within S Recommendation require Internet access and may not be available based on service provider, language, dialect, and region. Your remote control may differ from the images shown in this manual. 148 149 Read Before Using Voice Recognition, or Motion Control " This function is only supported for S9 series models. Precautions for Voice Recognition and Motion Control Using the TV camera ● Under some circumstances and under certain legal conditions, the use/misuse of the TV camera may result in illegal actions. There may be obligations under local privacy laws regarding the protection of individuals concerning personal data and on the free movement of such data, and possibly other laws including criminal laws regulating camera surveillance both in the workplace and elsewhere. ● By using the TV camera, users agree that it will not be used (i) in locations where cameras are generally prohibited (such as bathrooms, locker rooms or changing rooms), (ii) in any manner that will result in an invasion of a person’s privacy, or (iii) in violation of any applicable laws, regulations or statutes. ● When you are no longer using the camera, keep it retracted inside the TV. This prevents any inadvertent or unintentional camera operation. Motion Control ● Motion Control is worked through the camera connected to the TV. For Motion Control to work, you must be within the camera's recognition range. The camera's recognition range differ with the ambient light level and other factors. ● Run the Motion Control Environment Test before using Motion Control to determine the camera's recognition range. ● You may experience physical fatigue when using Motion Control for extended periods. 150 Voice Recognition ● Voice Recognition is not available in all languages, dialects, or regions. The performance differs with the language chosen, voice volume, and ambient noise levels in the surrounding area. ● Voice Text Input requires that you agree to any third-party app’s voice privacy policy. ● Voice Text Input lets you enter text using voice commands instead of a mouse, keyboard, or remote control. This feature is particularly useful for searching, browsing the web, and using applications. ● You must agree to the following privacy notices before using Interactive Voice Recognition: – Voice Recognition Privacy Notice, Nuance Privacy Notice Requirements for using Voice Recognition, or Motion Control Requirements for using voice recognition ● The voice recognition rate differs with the volume/tone, pronunciation, and ambient sound environment (TV sound and ambient noise). ● Say the command 1.2m to 1.8m from the microphone on the Samsung Smart Control. The optimal volume for voice commands is between 75 dB and 80 dB. 150 151 Requirements for using motion recognition ● Be sure to use Motion Control within recommended distances: – TV Camera (Built-in): between 1.5m and 3.5m – TV Camera (Sold Separately): between 1.5m and 4m ● The actual recognition range may differ with the camera angle and other factors. ● You must be located within a range of camera lens, because Motion Control relies on the TV's built-in camera. Adjust the camera's angle using the wheel on the back of the camera. Do not point the camera directly at the sun or any other light source or obstruct its view. ● For the camera to recognise movement, you must stand out from the background. ● The appropriate ambient brightness is 50 to 500 lux. (100 Lux: Bathroom, 400 Lux: Living Room) ● Avoid direct sunlight when using Motion Control. ● Run the Motion Control Environment Test to assess the camera's recognition range before using Motion Control. 152 Read Before Using Apps ● Due to the product characteristics featured on the Samsung Smart Hub, as well as limitations in available content, certain features, applications, and services may not be available on all devices or in all territories. Some Smart Hub features may also require additional peripheral devices or membership fees. Visit http://www.samsung.com for more information on specific device information and content availability. Services and content availability are subject to change without prior notice. ● Samsung Electronics takes no legal responsibility whatsoever for any interruption of app services caused by the service provider for any reason. ● Application services may be provided in English only and available content may differ with the area. ● For more information about applications, visit the applicable service provider's website. ● An unstable Internet connection may cause delays or interruptions. In addition, applications may terminate automatically depending on the network environment. If this occurs, check your Internet connection and try again. ● Application services and updates may become unavailable. ● Application content is subject to change by the service provider without prior notice. ● Specific services may differ with the version of the application installed on the TV. ● An application's functionality may change in future versions of the application. If this occurs, run the application's tutorial or visit the service provider's website. ● Depending on the service provider's policies, certain applications may not support multitasking. 152 153 Read Before Using the Web Browser ● The browsing screen may differ from the one on your computer. ● The web browser is not compatible with Java applications. ● You cannot download files. If you attempt to download a file, you will receive an error message instead. ● The web browser may not be able to access certain websites. ● Playing Flash videos may be restricted. ● E-commerce for online purchases is not supported. ● With websites that have scrollable windows, scrolling a window can result in corrupted characters. ● ActiveX is not supported. ● Certain options are not accessible in Link Browsing mode. (Switch to Pointer Browsing to activate those options.) ● Only a limited number of fonts are supported. Certain symbols and characters may not be displayed properly. ● The response to remote commands and the resulting on-screen display may be delayed while a webpage is loading. ● Loading a webpage may be delayed or suspended completely with certain operating systems. ● The copy and paste operations are not supported. 154 ● When composing an email or a simple message, certain functions such as the font size and colour selection may not be available. ● There is a limit to the number of bookmarks and the size of the log file that can be saved. ● The number of windows that can be opened concurrently differs with the search conditions and the TV model. ● The web browsing speed will differs with the network environment. ● Playing embedded video automatically disables PIP. Video playback may not commence after PIP is disabled. In this case, you will have to reload the page. ● The web browser supports .mp3 audio files only. ● If the Clock ((MENU/123) MENU System Time Clock) has not been set, the browsing history will not be saved. ● The browsing history is saved from latest to oldest, with the oldest entries being overwritten first. ● Depending on the types of video/audio codecs supported, it might not be possible to play certain video and audio files while playing Flash content. ● Video sources from PC-optimised streaming service providers may not play properly on our proprietary web browser. ● Using the on-screen QWERTY keyboard automatically disables PIP. (Except when entering a URL.) 154 155 Read Before Playing Photo, Video, or Music Files Limitations on use of photo, video, and music files ● The TV supports MSC (Mass Storage Class) USB devices only. MSC is a class designation for mass storage devices. Types of MSC devices include external hard drives, flash card readers, and digital cameras. (USB hubs are not supported.) These kinds of devices must be connected directly to the TV's USB port. The TV may not be able to recognise the USB device or read the files on the device if it is connected to the TV via a USB extension cable. Do not disconnect the USB device while transferring files. ● When connecting an external hard drive, use the USB (HDD) port. We recommend that you use an external hard drive with its own power adapter. ● Certain digital cameras and audio devices may not be compatible with the TV. ● If there are multiple USB devices connected to the TV, the TV might not be able to recognise some or all the devices. USB devices that use high-power input should be connect the USB [5V, 1A] port. ● The TV supports the FAT, exFAT, and NTFS file systems. ● After sorting files in the Folder view mode, the TV can display up to 1000 files per folder. If the USB device contains more than 8,000 files and folders, however, some files and folders might not be accessible. ● The PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol) connection mode is available only for digital cameras. If you connect a smartphone or tablet to the TV using PTP mode, the TV will not recognise it. ● Be sure to connect a USB or external Hard Drive, supporting USB 3.0, to the USB 3.0 port. ● Certain files, depending on how they were encoded, may not play on the TV. ● Certain files are not available depending on the model. 156 Supported external subtitles Name Format MPEG-4 Timed text .ttxt SAMI .smi SubRip .srt SubViewer .sub Micro DVD .sub or .txt SubStation Alpha .ssa Advanced SubStation Alpha .ass Powerdivx .psb SMPTE-TT Text .xml Supported internal subtitles Name Container Xsub AVI SubStation Alpha MKV Advanced SubStation Alpha MKV SubRip MKV VobSub MKV MPEG-4 Timed text MP4 TTML in smooth streaming MP4 SMPTE-TT Text MP4 SMPTE-TT PNG MP4 156 157 Supported image formats and resolutions File extension Format Resolution *.jpg *.jpeg JPEG 15360x8640 *.png PNG 4096x4096 *.bmp BMP 4096x4096 *.mpo MPO 15360x8640 Supported music formats and codecs File extension Format Codec Note *.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC Supports up to 2 channels *.ogg OGG Vorbis Supports up to 2 channels *.wma WMA WMA Supports up to 10 Pro 5.1 channels. WMA lossless audio is not supported. Supports up to the M2 profile. *.wav wav wav *.mid *.midi midi midi Supports type 0 and type 1. Seek is not supported. Supports USB device only. *.ape ape ape *.aif *.aiff AIFF AIFF *.m4a ALAC ALAC 158 Supported video codecs File format Container Video codecs Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bitrate (Mbps) Audio codecs H.264 BP/MP/HP 60 40 HEVC(H.265 - Main Profile only) *.avi *.mkv Motion JPEG 30 *.asf *.wmv MVC *.mp4 *.mov AVI MKV DivX 3.11 / 4 / 5 / 6 *.3gp *.vro ASF MP4 MPEG4 SP/ASP 60 Dolby Digital LPCM *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts 3GP MOV FLV Window Media Video v9(VC1) ADPCM(IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC *.tp *.trp VRO VOB MPEG2 1920x1080 20 WMA Dolby Digital Plus *.mov *.flv PS TS MPEG1 MPEG(MP3) DTS(Core, LBR) *.vob *.svi SVAF Microsoft MPEG-4 v1, v2, v3 G.711(A-Law, μ-Law) *.m2ts *.mts Window Media Video v7(WMV1), v8(WMV2) 30 *.divx H.263 Sorrenson VP6 *.webm WebM VP8 90 Vorbis 158 159 Other restrictions ● Codecs may not function properly if there is a problem with the content. ● Video content does not play or does not play correctly if there is an error in the content or container. ● Sound or video may not work if they have standard bit rates/frame rates above the TV’s compatibility ratings. ● If the Index Table is has an error, the Seek (Jump) function will not work. ● When playing video over a network connection, the video may not play smoothly because of data transmission speeds. ● Some USB/digital camera devices may not be compatible with the TV. ● HEVC codec is only available in MKV/MP4/TS containers. Video decoders ● H.264 FHD is supported up to Level 4.1. (does not support FMO/ASO/RS) ● VC1 AP L4 is not supported. ● All video codecs excluding WMV v7, v8, MSMPEG4 v3, MVC, and VP6: Below 1280x720: 60 frame max Above 1280x720: 30 frame max ● GMC 2 or above is not supported. ● Supports SVAF Top/Bottom, Side by Side, and Left/Right view sequence type (2ES) only. ● Supports BD MVC specs only. Audio decoders ● WMA 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channels. Supports up to the M2 profile. WMA lossless audio is not supported. ● QCELP and AMR NB/WB are not supported. ● Vorbis is supported for up to 5.1 channels. ● Dolby Digital Plus is supported for up to 5.1 channels. ● The DTS LBR codec is only available for MKV/MP4/TS containers. ● The supported sample rates are 8, 11.025, 12, 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, and 48 KHz, and differ by the codec. 160 Restrictions Restrictions to PIP (Picture-in-Picture) ● PIP cannot be used while Smart Hub is active. ● Turning off the TV automatically disables PIP. ● Playing a game or using the karaoke feature on the main screen can result in lower PIP picture quality. 1 Tuner model MAIN TV PIP DTV ATV HDMI AV SCART IN Component DTV X X ○ X X ○ ATV X X ○ X X ○ " This function is dependent on the specific model and area. 2 Tuner model MAIN TV PIP DTV ATV HDMI AV SCART IN Component DTV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ATV X X ○ X X ○ " This function is dependent on the specific model and area. Flexible CI Not supported 2 Scrambled Channel Tuner 1 Tuner 2 Compatibility Watch (Pay) Watch (Pay) X Watch (Pay) Watch (Free) ○ Watch (Free) Watch (Pay) ○ Watch (Free) Watch (Free) ○ 160 161 Read After Installing the TV Picture sizes and input signals The Picture Size setting is applied to the current source. The applied Picture Size will remain in effect whenever you select that source unless you change it. Input signal Picture size Component 16:9, Zoom, Custom, 4:3 Component (1080i, 1080p) 16:9, Zoom, Custom, 4:3 Digital channel (720p, 1080i, 1080p) 16:9, Zoom, Custom, 4:3 HDMI (720p) 16:9, Zoom, Custom, 4:3 HDMI (1080i, 1080p) 16:9, Zoom, Custom, 4:3 Installing an anti-theft lock ● An anti-theft lock is a physical device that can be used to protect the TV against theft. Look for the lock slot on the back of the TV. The slot has a icon next to it. To use the lock, wrap the lock cable around an object that is too heavy to carry and then thread it through the TV's lock slot. The lock is sold separately. ● The method of using an anti-theft lock may differ for each TV model. Refer to the lock's user manual for more information. " This function is only available on certain models in specific geographical areas. 162 Read before setting up a wireless Internet connection Precautions for wireless Internet ● This TV supports the IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n communication protocols. Samsung recommends using IEEE 802.11n. Video files stored on a device connected to the TV via Home Network may not play back smoothly. ● To use wireless Internet, the TV must be connected to a wireless router or modem. If the wireless router supports DHCP, the TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. ● Select a channel that is not currently in use for the wireless router. If the channel set for the wireless router is currently being used by another device, the result is usually interference and/or a communications failure. ● Most wireless networks have an optional security system. To enable a wireless network's security system, you need to create a password using characters and numbers. This password is then needed to connect to a security-enabled AP. Wireless security protocols ● The TV only supports the following wireless network security protocols. – Authentication Modes: WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK – Encryption Types: WEP, TKIP, AES ● In compliance with the newest Wi-Fi certification specifications, Samsung TVs do not support WEP or TKIP security encryption in networks running in the 802.11n mode. ● If the wireless router supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect the TV to your network using PBC (Push Button Configuration) or a PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS automatically configures the SSID and WPA key settings. ● The TV cannot connect to non-certified wireless routers. 162 163 Read Before Connecting a Computer (Supported Resolutions) ● When you connect your TV to a computer, set the computer's video card to one of the standard resolutions listed in the tables below or on the next page. The TV will automatically adjust to the resolution you choose. Note that the optimal and recommended resolution is 1920 x 1080 at 60 Hz. ● Choosing a resolution not included in the tables can result in a blank screen or just the power indicator turning on. ● Refer to the user manual of your graphics card for compatible resolutions. IBM Resolution (Dots x lines) Display format Horizontal frequency (KHz) Vertical frequency (Hz) Clock frequency (MHz) Polarity (horizontal / vertical) 720 x 400 70 Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 - / + MAC Resolution (Dots x lines) Display format Horizontal frequency (KHz) Vertical frequency (Hz) Clock frequency (MHz) Polarity (horizontal / vertical) 640 x 480 67 Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 - / - 832 x 624 75 Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 - / - 1152 x 870 75 Hz 68.681 75.062 100.000 - / - 164 VESA DMT Resolution (Dots x lines) Display format Horizontal frequency (KHz) Vertical frequency (Hz) Clock frequency (MHz) Polarity (horizontal / vertical) 640 x 480 60 Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 - / - 640 x 480 72 Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 - / - 640 x 480 75 Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 - / - 800 x 600 60 Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 + / + 800 x 600 72 Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 + / + 800 x 600 75 Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 + / + 1024 x 768 60 Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 - / - 1024 x 768 70 Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 - / - 1024 x 768 75 Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 + / + 1152 x 864 75 Hz 67.500 75.000 108.000 + / + 1280 x 720 60 Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 + / + 1280 x 800 60 Hz 49.702 59.810 83.500 - / + 1280 x 1024 60 Hz 63.981 60.020 108.000 + / + 1280 x 1024 75 Hz 79.976 75.025 135.000 + / + 1366 x 768 60 Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 + / + 1440 x 900 60 Hz 55.935 59.887 106.500 - / + 1600 x 900RB 60 Hz 60.000 60.000 108.000 + / + 1680 x 1050 60 Hz 65.290 59.954 146.250 - / + 1920 x 1080 60 Hz 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + 164 165 Supported Resolutions for Video Signals CEA-861 Resolution (Dots x lines) Display format Horizontal frequency (KHz) Vertical frequency (Hz) Clock frequency (MHz) Polarity (horizontal / vertical) 720(1440) x 480i 60 Hz 15.734 59.940 27.000 - / - 720(1440) x 576i 50 Hz 15.625 50.000 27.000 - / - 720 x 480 60 Hz 31.469 59.940 27.000 - / - 720 x 576 50 Hz 31.250 50.000 27.000 - / - 1280 x 720 60 Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 + / + 1280 x 720 50 Hz 37.500 50.000 74.250 + / + 1920 x 1080i 60 Hz 33.750 60.000 74.250 + / + 1920 x 1080i 50 Hz 28.125 50.000 74.250 + / + 1920 x 1080 60 Hz 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + 1920 x 1080 50 Hz 56.250 50.000 148.500 + / + 1920 x 1080 30 Hz 33.750 30.000 74.250 + / + 1920 x 1080 25 Hz 28.125 25.000 74.250 + / + 1920 x 1080 24 Hz 27.000 24.000 74.250 + / + DVI Resolution (Dots x lines) Display format Horizontal frequency (KHz) Vertical frequency (Hz) Clock frequency (MHz) Polarity (horizontal / vertical) 720 x 480 60 Hz 31.469 59.940 27.000 - / - 720 x 576 50 Hz 31.250 50.000 27.000 - / - 1280 x 720 60 Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 + / + 1280 x 720 50 Hz 37.500 50.000 74.250 + / + 1920 x 1080 60 Hz 67.500 60.000 148.500 + / + 1920 x 1080 50 Hz 56.250 50.000 148.500 + / + 166 Read Before Using Bluetooth Devices Restrictions on using Bluetooth ● The Samsung Bluetooth Speaker is only available when a device is supporting TV SoundConnect. ● You can't use Bluetooth Devices, Speaker Select ((MENU/123) MENU Sound Speaker Settings Speaker Select) and Surround features simultaneously. ● Compatibility issues may occur, depending on the Bluetooth Devices. (A Mobile exclusive headphone may not be available, depending on the environment.) ● Lip-sync errors may occur. ● The TV and Bluetooth Devices may disconnect, depending on the distance between them. ● A Bluetooth device may hum or malfunction – When a part of your body is in contact with the receiving/transmitting system of the Bluetooth device or the TV. – When the device is subject to electrical variation from obstructions caused by a wall, corner, or office partitioning. – When the device is exposed to electrical interference from same frequency-band devices including medical equipment, microwave ovens, and wireless LANs. ● If the problem persists, be sure to use a Digital Sound Output (Optical) port or HDMI (ARC) port. 166 167 Licence This DivX Certified® device has passed rigorous testing to ensure it plays DivX® video. To play purchased DivX movies, first register your device at vod.divx.com. Find your registration code in the DivX VOD section of your device setup menu. DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used under license. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274. This device supports DivX Plus Streaming® for enjoying HD movies and TV shows with advanced features (multi-language subtitles, multiple audio tracks, chapters, smooth FF/RW, etc.) streamed to your device. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol, DTS Premium Sound|5.1, DTS Digital Surround, DTS Express, and DTS Neo2:5 are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. ⓒ DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and HEADPHONE:X and the DTS HEADPHONE:X logo are trademarks of DTS, Inc. ⓒ DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 168 The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Trademark: Rovi and Rovi Guide are trademarks of Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries. Licence: The Rovi Guide system is manufactured under licence from Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries. Patent: The Rovi Guide system is protected by patents and patent applications filed in the US, Europe, and other countries including one or more of the United States patents 6,396,546; 5,940,073; 6,239,794 issued to Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries. Disclaimer: Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries and related affiliates are not in any way liable for the accuracy or availability of the programme schedule information or other data in the Rovi Guide system and cannot guarantee service availability in your area. In no event shall Rovi Corporation and/or its related affiliates be liable for any damages in connection with the accuracy or availability of the programme schedule information or other data in the Rovi Guide system. Open Source License Notice Open Source used in this product can be found on the following webpage. (http://opensource.samsung.com) Open Source License Notice is written only English. 168 169 Glossary ● 480i / 480p / 720p / 1080i / 1080p Generally refers to the number of effective scanning lines that determines the screen's resolution. There are two scanning methods: interlaced and progressive. – Scanning Sequential projection of pixels to form images. The higher the number of pixels, the clearer and more vivid the images. – Progressive A sequential scanning method that scans every line, one after another. – Interlaced A staggered scanning method that scans every other line until the end of the screen and then fills in the remaining lines. Example) If the number of horizontal scan lines is 480i Scans 240 lines from start to finish and then scans the remaining 240 lines for a total of 480 lines. * General differences between 480i and 480p are as follows: 480i 480p Horizontal Frequency 15.75Khz 31.5Khz FPS 30 60 Lines on Screen 480 480 ● ARC (Audio Return Channel) ARC lets the TV output digital sound to an audio device and input digital sound from the same audio device through one HDMI cable. However, ARC is only available through the HDMI (ARC) port and only when the TV is connected to an ARC-enabled AV receiver. ● DVI (Digital Visual Interface) Connecting the TV's DVI connector to a computer's DVI connector via an HDMI-to-DVI cable lets you use the TV as a computer monitor. However, HDMI-to-DVI cables deliver video signals only. You must connect a set of speakers to the computer using a separate cable to hear the computer's audio. 170 ● HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) HDMI is a method of transmitting both video and audio signals via a single cable. ● Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses If the network requires a dynamic IP address, use an ADSL modem or router that supports the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values the TV needs to access the Internet, so they do not have to be entered manually. Most home networks use a dynamic IP address. If the network requires a static IP address, enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually when setting up the network connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). If the network requires a static IP address, use an ADSL modem that supports DHCP. ADSL modems that support DHCP also allow static IP addresses. ● Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-distance wireless communication protocol allowing information exchange between connected mobile phones, laptops, earphones and headphones with Bluetoothcompatible devices. It is mostly used for low-power consuming wireless connections within a very short-distance of 10m. ● Ethernet Ethernet is a LAN (Local Area Network) that uses coaxial cables standardised by the IEEE. ● Component Connection Component connections are mostly used for game consoles and transmit the video signal by splitting it into a luminance signal (Y) and two colour signals (Pb and Pr). The connector is marked as [Component IN]_(Pr, Pb, Y) on the back of the TV. On some devices, it is sometimes marked as Cr, Cb, Y. Cb and Cr are the digital conversions of the Pb and Pr signals. The connectors are normally colour-coded red (R), blue (B), and green (G) and offer the best picture quality possible for an analogue connection. Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model ___________ Serial No. ____________ user manual LED TV [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 1 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:42 Warning! Important Safety Instructions (Please read the Safety Instructions before using your TV.) CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER ALL SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. This symbol indicates that high voltage is present inside. It is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any internal part of this product. This symbol indicates that this product has included important literature concerning operation and maintenance. The slots and openings in the cabinet and in the back or bottom are provided for necessary ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of this apparatus and to protect it from overheating, these slots and openings must never be blocked or covered. - Do not place this apparatus in a confined space, such as a bookcase or built-in cabinet, unless proper ventilation is provided. - Do not place this apparatus near or over a radiator or heat register, or where it is exposed to direct sunlight. - Do not place vessels (vases etc.) containing water on this apparatus, as this can result in a fire or electric shock. Do not expose this apparatus to rain or place it near water (near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool etc.). If this apparatus accidentally gets wet, unplug it and contact an authorised dealer immediately. This apparatus uses batteries. In your community, there might be environmental regulations that require you to dispose of these batteries properly. Please contact your local authorities for disposal or recycling information. Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords or adaptors beyond their capacity, since this can result in fire or electric shock. Power-supply cords should be placed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular attention to cords at the plug end, at wall outlets, and at the point where they exit from the appliance. To protect this apparatus from a lightning storm, or when left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the set due to lightning and power line surges. Before connecting the AC power cord to the DC adaptor outlet, make sure that the voltage designation of the DC adaptor corresponds to the local electrical supply. Never insert anything metallic into the open parts of this apparatus. This may cause a danger of electric shock. To avoid electric shock, never touch the inside of this apparatus. Only a qualified technician should open this apparatus. Be sure to plug in the power cord until it is firmly seated. When unplugging the power cord from a wall outlet, always pull on the power cord's plug. Never unplug it by pulling on the power cord. Do not touch the power cord with wet hands. If this apparatus does not operate normally - in particular, if there are any unusual sounds or smells coming from it - unplug it immediately and contact an authorised dealer or service centre. Be sure to pull the power plug out of the outlet if the TV is to remain unused or if you are to leave the house for an extended period of time (especially when children, elderly or disabled people will be left alone in the house). - Accumulated dust can cause an electric shock, an electric leakage, or a fire by causing the power cord to generate sparks and heat or by causing the insulation to deteriorate. Be sure to contact an authorised service centre for information if you intend to install your TV in a location with heavy dust, high or low temperatures, high humidity, chemical substances, or where it will operate 24 hours a day such as in an aerial port, a train station, etc. Failure to do so may lead to serious damage to your TV. Use only a properly grounded plug and wall outlet. - An improper ground may cause electric shock or equipment damage. (Class l Equipment only.) To turn off this apparatus completely, disconnect it from the wall outlet. Be sure to have the wall outlet and power plug readily accessible. Do not allow children to hang onto the product. Store the accessories (battery, etc.) in a location safely out of the reach of children. Do not install the product in an unstable location such as a shaky shelf or a slanted floor or in a location exposed to vibration. Do not drop or strike the product. If the product is damaged, disconnect the power cord and contact a service centre. To clean this apparatus, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and wipe the product with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use any chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol, thinners, insecticide, aerial fresheners, lubricants, or detergents. These chemicals can damage the appearance of the TV or erase the printing on the product. Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or overheat the batteries. There is danger of an explosion if you replace the batteries used in the remote with the wrong type of battery. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. WARNING - TO PREVENT THE SPREAD OF FIRE, KEEP CANDLES OR OTHER ITEMS WITH OPEN FLAMES AWAY FROM THIS PRODUCT AT ALL TIMES. * Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from the actual product appearance. Product design and specifications may change without notice. CIS languages (Russian, Ukrainian, Kazakhs) are not available for this product, since this is manufactured for customers in EU region. English - 2 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 2 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:42 What's in the Box? Remote Control & Batteries (AAA x 2) Regulatory Guide User Manual Power Cord Warranty Card (Not available in some locations) CI Card Adapter Cable Guide - Make sure that the following items are included with your TV. If there are any items missing, contact your local dealer. - The colours and shapes of the items differ with the model. - Cables not supplied with this product can be purchased separately. - Open the box and check for any accessory items hidden behind or inside the packing materials. An administration fee may be charged in the following situations: (a) An engineer is called out at your request, but there will be no defect with the product (i.e., where the user manual has not been read). (b) You bring the unit to a repair centre, but there will be no defect identified the product (i.e., where the user manual has not been read). You will be informed of the administration fee amount before a technician visits. Warning: Screens can be damaged from direct pressure when handled incorrectly. We recommend lifting the TV at the edges, as shown. Do Not Touch This Screen! Using the TV Controller You can use the TV Controller on the back of the TV instead of the remote control to control most of the functions of your TV. Control Stick The Control Stick is located on the lower left corner of the back of the TV. Control Menu : Opens Smart Hub. : Selects a source. : Opens the menu. : Turns off the TV. Remote control sensor English English - 3 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 3 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:43 TV Camera Connection - The TV camera is sold separately. - Make sure to connect only the TV camera to the TV CAMERA port. Connecting to a COMMON INTERFACE slot (Your TV viewing Card Slot) - Turn the TV off to connect or disconnect a CI card or CI card adapter. - For more information how to use "CI or CI+ CARD", see the e-Manual chapter, "System and Support > Connecting to a TV Viewing Card slot". Attaching the CI Card Adapter A CI Card Adapter that lets the TV use two different CI Cards is available, depending on the model. We recommend that you attach the CI Card adapter and insert the CI card (viewing card) before you mount the TV on the wall because it may be difficult and dangerous to do this when it is on the wall. Using the “CI or CI+ CARD” To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted. English - 4 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 4 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:44 The Remote Control E-MANUAL: Opens the e-Manual. EXTRA: Displays related information about the current programme. AD/SUBT.: Displays the Accessibility Shortcuts. P.MODE / PICTURE: Changes the picture mode. P.SIZE / PIC SIZE: Change the picture size. SEARCH: Launches the Search function. Displays and selects available video sources. Turns the Sports Mode on or off. Turns the sound on/off. Launches Smart Hub applications. Refer to the e-Manual chapter, Smart Features > Smart Hub. Changes the current channel. Displays the Electronic Programme Guide (EPG). Turns the TV on/off. Gives direct access to channels. Adjusts the volume. Launches the Channel List. Alternately selects Teletext ON, Double, Mix or OFF. Returns to the previous channel. Displays the menu on the screen. TOOLS: Quickly selects frequently used functions. INFO: Displays information about the current programme or content. RETURN: Returns to the previous menu or channel. EXIT: Exits the menu. Use these buttons according to the directions on the TV screen. Use these buttons with specific features. Use these buttons according to the directions on the TV screen. Moves the focus, and changes the values seen on the TV's menu. E (Enter): Selects or runs a focused item. - Press and hold to display the Guide. N The button names above may be differ from the actual names. N The remote control may differ by its model. Installing batteries into the remote control Match the polarity of the batteries to the symbols on the battery compartment. - Use the remote control within 7m the TV. - Bright light may affect the performance of the remote control. Avoid using near bright fluorescent lights or neon signs. - The colour and shape of the remote may vary depending on the model. English English - 5 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 5 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:44 Connecting to a Network Connecting the TV to a network gives you access to online services, such as Smart Hub, as well as software updates. Network Connection - Wireless Connect the TV to the Internet using a standard router or modem. Wireless IP Router or Modem with a DHCP Server LAN Cable (Not Supplied) The LAN Port on the Wall Network Connection - Wired TV Rear Panel Connect your TV to your network using a LAN cable. - Use a Category 7 cable for the connection. English - 6 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 6 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:45 The e-Manual The embedded e-Manual contains information about the key features of your TV. - You can download and view a printable version of the e-Manual on the Samsung website. Displaying the e-Manual: • Press the E-MANUAL button on the remote control. • On the TV’s menu, select Support > e-Manual. Using the buttons available on the main screen of the e-Manual Search Select an item from the search results to load the corresponding page. Index Select a keyword to navigate to the relevant page. Recent pages Select a topic from the list of recently viewed topics. Accessing the associated menu screen from an e-Manual topic page Try Now Access the associated menu item and try out the feature directly. Link Access a topic referred to on an e-Manual topic page. Accessing the associated e-Manual topic from a menu screen Press the E-MANUAL button on the remote control to read the e-Manual topic about a current screen menu function. - The e-Manual cannot be accessed from some menu screens. Updating the e-Manual to the latest version You can update the e-Manual in the same way you update apps. Initial setup The initial setup dialogue box appears when the TV is first activated. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the initial setup process. You can manually perform this process at a later time in the System > Setup menu. - If you connect any device to HDMI1 before starting the installation, the Channel Source will be changed to Set-top box automatically. - If you do not want to select Set-top box, please select Aerial. English English - 7 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 7 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:46 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting If the TV seems to have a problem, first review this list of possible problems and solutions. Alternatively, review the Troubleshooting Section in the e-Manual. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit “www.samsung.com” and click on Support, or contact the call centre listed on the back cover of this manual. - This TFT LED panel is made up of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. There may be, however, a few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product. - To keep your TV in optimum condition, upgrade to the latest software. Use the Update now or Auto update functions on the TV's menu (MENU > Support > Software Update > Update now or MENU > Support > Software Update > Auto Update). Issues Solutions and explanations The TV is not powered on. Make sure that the power cord is connected and that the remote has live batteries and is functioning properly. If the power cord is properly connected and the remote control is operating normally, there might arise a problem with the antenna cable connection, or the cable/set-top box might not be turned on. Check the antenna connection or turn on the cable/ set-top box. The TV won’t turn on. Make sure that the AC power cord is securely plugged in to the TV and the wall outlet. Make sure that the wall outlet is working. Try pressing the P button on the TV to make sure that the problem is not with the remote. If the TV turns on, refer to “The remote control does not work” below. There is no picture/video. Check the cable connections. Remove and reconnect all cables connected to the TV and external devices. Set the video outputs of your external devices (Cable/set-top box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) to match the TV's input connections. For example, if an external device’s output is HDMI, connect it to an HDMI input on the TV. Make sure that your connected devices are powered on. Be sure to select the correct input source. Reboot the connected device by unplugging it and reconnecting the device's power cable. The remote control does not work. Replace the remote control batteries. Make sure that the batteries are installed with their poles (+/–) in the correct direction. Clean the sensor’s transmission window on the remote. Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 1.5~1.8 m away. The Cable or set-top box remote control doesn’t turn on/off the TV or adjust the volume. Programme the cable or set-top box remote control to operate the TV. Refer to the Cable or set-top box user manual for the SAMSUNG TV code. English - 8 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 8 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:46 Changing the TV’s password (System > Change PIN) 1. Run Change PIN and then enter the current password in the password field. The default password is “0-0-0-0” (France: “1- 1-1-1”). 2. Enter a new password and then enter it again to confirm it. The password change is complete. - If you forgot your PIN code, press the buttons in the following sequence to reset the PIN to “0-0-0-0” (France: “1-1-1-1”): For the Standard Remote Control: In Standby mode: MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (On) Eco Sensor and screen brightness Eco Sensor adjusts the brightness of the TV automatically. This feature measures the light in your room and optimises the brightness of the TV automatically to reduce power consumption. If you want to turn this off, go to MENU > System > Eco Solution > Eco Sensor. - If the screen is too dark while you are watching TV in a dark environment, it may be due to the Eco Sensor. - Do not block the sensor with any object. This can decrease picture brightness. Still image warning Avoid displaying still images (such as jpeg picture files), still image elements (such as TV channel logos, stock or news crawls at the screen bottom etc.), or programmes in panorama or 4:3 image format on the screen. If you constantly display still pictures, it can cause image burn-in on the LED screen and affect image quality. To reduce the risk of this adverse effect, please follow the recommendations below: • Avoid displaying the still image for long periods. • Always try to display any image in full screen. Use the picture format menu of the TV set for the best possible match. • Reduce brightness and contrast to avoid the appearance of after-images. • Use all TV features designed to reduce image retention and screen burn. Refer to the e-Manual for details. Caring for the TV - If a sticker was attached to the TV screen, some debris can remain after you remove the sticker. Please clean the debris off before watching TV. - The exterior and screen of the TV can get scratched during cleaning. Be sure to wipe the exterior and screen carefully using a soft cloth to prevent scratches. Do not spray water or any liquid directly onto the TV. Any liquid that goes into the product may cause a failure, fire, or electric shock. Turn off the TV, then gently wipe away smudges and fingerprints on the screen with a micro-fiber cloth. Clean the body of the TV with a soft cloth dampened with a small amount of water. Do not use flammable liquids (benzene, thinners, etc.) or a cleaning agent. For stubborn smudges, spray a small amount of screen cleaner on the cloth. English English - 9 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 9 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:47 TV Installation Mounting the TV on a wall If you mount this product on a wall, follow the instructions exactly as recommended by the manufacturer. Unless it is correctly mounted, the product may slide or fall, thus causing serious injury to a child or adult and serious damage to the product. Installing the wall mount kit You can mount the TV on the wall using a wall mount kit (sold separately). Wall mount TV Bracket C For detailed information about installing the wall mount, see the instructions provided with the wall mount kit. We recommend that you contact a technician for assistance when installing the wall mount bracket. We do not advise you to do it yourself. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any damage to the product or injury to yourself or others if you choose to install the wall mount on your own. VESA wall mount kit notes and specifications You can install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. Before attaching the wall mount to surfaces other than plaster board, contact your nearest dealer for additional information. If you install the TV on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury. Product Family TV size in inches VESA screw hole specs (A * B) in millimetres C (mm) Standard Screw Quantity LED-TV 32 200 X 200 19.8 ~ 20.8 M8 4 40 20 ~ 21 43 20.1 ~ 21.1 48 400 X 400 20.7 ~ 21.7 50 20.6 ~ 21.6 55 20.3 ~ 21.3 English - 10 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 10 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:48 Do not install your wall mount kit while your TV is turned on. This may result in personal injury from electric shock. Do not use screws that are longer than the standard length or do not comply with VESA standard screw specifications. Screws that are too long may cause damage to the inside of the TV set. • For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications, the length of the screws may differ depending on the wall mount specifications. • Do not fasten the screws too firmly. This may damage the product or cause the product to fall, leading to personal injury. Samsung is not liable for these kinds of accidents. • Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non-VESA or non-specified wall mount is used or the consumer fails to follow the product installation instructions. • Do not mount the TV at more than a 15 degree tilt. • Always have two people mount the TV onto a wall. Arranging the cables with the Cable guide Providing proper ventilation for your TV When you install your TV, maintain a distance of at least 10 cm between the TV and other objects (walls, cabinet sides, etc.) to ensure proper ventilation. Failing to maintain proper ventilation may result in a fire or a problem with the product caused by an increase in its internal temperature. When you install your TV with a stand or a wall mount, we strongly recommend you use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only. Using parts provided by another manufacturer may cause difficulties with the product or result in injury caused by the product falling. Installation with a stand Installation with a wall mount 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm English English - 11 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 11 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:48 Attaching the TV to the Stand Make sure you have all the accessories shown, and that you assemble the stand following the provided assembly instructions. Safety Precaution: Securing the TV to the wall Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children do not hang on or destabilize the TV. This action may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death. Follow all safety precautions provided in the Safety Flyer included with your TV. For added stability and safety, you can purchase and install the anti-fall device as described below. Preventing the TV from falling These are general instructions. The clamps, screws, and string are not supplied by Samsung. They must be purchased separately. We suggest consulting an installation service or professional TV installer for specific hardware and anti-fall hardware installation. 1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall. Confirm that the screws have been firmly installed onto the wall. - You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of wall. 2. Remove the screws from the back centre of the TV, put the screws into the clamps, and then fasten the screws onto the TV again. - Screws may not be supplied with the product. In this case, please purchase the screws of the following specifications. 3. Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a durable, heavy-duty string, and then tie the string tightly. - Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards. - Connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are at the same height as or lower than the clamps fixed on the TV. - Untie the string before moving the TV. 4. Make sure that all connections are properly secured. Periodically check the connections for any sign of fatigue or failure. If you have any doubt about the security of your connections, contact a professional installer. English - 12 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 12 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:49 Specifications and Other Information Specifications Display Resolution 1920 x 1080 Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F) 10% to 80%, non-condensing -20°C to 45°C (-4°F to 113°F) 5% to 95%, non-condensing Stand Swivel (Left / Right) 0˚ Model Name UE32J5500 / UE32J5600 UE40J5500 / UE40J5510 / UE40J5600 Screen Size (Diagonal) 32 inches (80 cm) 40 inches (101 cm) Sound (Output) 20 W (L: 10 W, R: 10 W) Dimensions (W x H x D) Body With stand 721.4 x 424.8 x 66.6 mm 721.4 x 471.6 x 207.6 mm 907.6 x 529.7 x 66.9 mm 907.6 x 585.6 x 288.1 mm Weight Without Stand With Stand 4.7 kg 5.1 kg 7.7 kg 8.6 kg Model Name UE43J5500 / UE43J5600 UE48J5500 / UE48J5510 / UE48J5600 Screen Size (Diagonal) 43 inches (108 cm) 48 inches (121 cm) Sound (Output) 20 W (L: 10 W, R: 10 W) Dimensions (W x H x D) Body With stand 962.9 x 561.3 x 66.9 mm 962.9 x 616.2 x 288.1 mm 1076.1 x 624.4 x 67.1 mm 1076.1 x 681.3 x 310.5 mm Weight Without Stand With Stand 7.8 kg 8.7 kg 11.3 kg 12.3 kg English English - 13 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 13 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:49 Model Name UE50J5500 UE55J5500 / UE55J5600 Screen Size (Diagonal) 50 inches (125 cm) 55 inches (138 cm) Sound (Output) 20 W (L: 10 W, R: 10 W) Dimensions (W x H x D) Body With stand 1117.8 x 647.8 x 67.5 mm 1117.8 x 703.6 x 310.5 mm 1231.6 x 711.9 x 67.8 mm 1231.6 x 770.6 x 310.5 mm Weight Without Stand With Stand 12.4 kg 13.4 kg 13.6 kg 14.6 kg - The design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. - For information about the power supply, and about power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product. - Typical power consumption is measured according to IEC 62087 Ed.2 Decreasing power consumption When you shut the TV off, it enters Standby mode. In Standby mode, it continues to draw a small amount of power. To decrease power consumption, unplug the power cord when you don't intend to use the TV for a long time. English - 14 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 14 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:49 Licences The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Recommendation - EU Only Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this TV is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The official Declaration of Conformity may be found at http://www.samsung.com, go to Support > Search Product Support and enter the model name. This equipment may only be used indoors. This equipment may be operated in all EU countries. Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Correct disposal of the batteries in this product (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. English English - 15 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 15 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:50 Avertissement ! Consignes de sécurité importantes (Veuillez lire les consignes de sécurité avant d'utiliser le téléviseur.) ATTENTION RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION - NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION : POUR REDUIRE LE RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION, NE RETIREZ PAS LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). AUCUNE DES PIECES SITUEES A L'INTERIEUR DU PRODUIT NE PEUT ETRE REPAREE PAR L'UTILISATEUR. POUR TOUT DEPANNAGE, ADRESSEZ-VOUS A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Ce symbole indique la présence de haute tension à l'intérieur de ce produit. Il est dangereux de toucher les pièces situées à l'intérieur de ce produit. Ce symbole indique qu'une documentation importante relative au fonctionnement et à l'entretien est fournie avec le produit. Les fentes et les ouvertures aménagées dans le boîtier ainsi qu'à l'arrière et en dessous de l'appareil assurent la ventilation de ce dernier. Afin de garantir le bon fonctionnement de l'appareil et d'éviter les risques de surchauffe, ces fentes et ouvertures ne doivent être ni obstruées ni couvertes. - Ne placez pas l'appareil dans un environnement clos tel qu'une bibliothèque ou une armoire encastrée, sauf si une ventilation adéquate est prévue. - Ne placez pas l'appareil à proximité ou au-dessus d'un radiateur ou d'une bouche d'air chaud, ni dans un endroit exposé à la lumière directe du soleil. - Ne placez pas de récipients contenant de l'eau (vases, etc.) sur l'appareil afin d'éviter tout risque d'incendie ou de choc électrique. N'exposez pas l'appareil à la pluie et ne le placez pas à proximité d'une source d'eau (baignoire, lavabo, évier, bac de lavage, sous-sol humide ou piscine, par exemple). Si l'appareil vient à être mouillé par accident, débranchez-le et contactez immédiatement un revendeur agréé. Cet appareil fonctionne sur piles. Dans un souci de préservation de l'environnement, la réglementation locale en vigueur peut prévoir des mesures spécifiques de mise au rebut des piles usagées. Veuillez contacter les autorités compétentes afin d'obtenir des informations sur la mise au rebut ou le recyclage des piles. Evitez de surcharger les prises murales, les rallonges et les adaptateurs, car cela entraîne un risque d'incendie ou de choc électrique. Les cordons d'alimentation doivent être déroulés de sorte qu'aucun objet placé sur ou contre eux ne les chevauche ni les pince. Accordez une attention particulière aux cordons au niveau de l'extrémité des fiches, des prises murales et de la sortie de l'appareil. En cas d'orage, d'absence ou de non utilisation de votre appareil pendant une longue période, débranchez-le de la prise murale, de même que l'antenne ou le système de câbles. Ces précautions éviteront que l'appareil ne soit endommagé par la foudre ou par des surtensions. Avant de raccorder le cordon d'alimentation CA à la prise de l'adaptateur CC, vérifiez que la tension indiquée sur ce dernier correspond bien à la tension délivrée par le réseau électrique local. N'insérez jamais d'objets métalliques dans les parties ouvertes de cet appareil Vous pourriez vous électrocuter. Afin d'éviter tout risque d'électrocution, ne mettez jamais les doigts à l'intérieur de l'appareil. Seul un technicien qualifié est habilité à ouvrir cet appareil. Veillez à brancher correctement et complètement le cordon d'alimentation. Lorsque vous débranchez le cordon d'alimentation d'une prise murale, tirez toujours sur la fiche du cordon d'alimentation. Ne le débranchez jamais en tirant sur le cordon d'alimentation. Ne touchez pas le cordon d'alimentation si vous avez les mains mouillées. Si l'appareil ne fonctionne pas normalement, en particulier s'il émet des odeurs ou des sons anormaux, débranchez-le immédiatement et contactez un revendeur ou un centre de dépannage agréé. Si vous prévoyez de ne pas utiliser le téléviseur ou de vous absenter pendant une période prolongée, veillez à retirer la fiche d'alimentation de la prise (en particulier si des enfants, des personnes âgées ou des personnes handicapées restent seuls au domicile). - L'accumulation de poussière peut amener le cordon d'alimentation à produire des étincelles et de la chaleur ou l'isolation à se détériorer, entraînant un risque de fuite électrique, d'électrocution et d'incendie. Si vous prévoyez d'installer le téléviseur dans des endroits exposés à la poussière, à des températures faibles ou élevées, à une forte humidité, à des substances chimiques ou s'il fonctionnera 24/24 heures, comme dans un aéroport ou une gare ferroviaire, contactez un centre de service agréé pour obtenir des informations. Le non-respect de ce qui précède peut gravement endommager le téléviseur. N'utilisez que des fiches et des prises murales correctement reliées à la terre. - Une mise à la terre incorrecte peut entraîner des chocs électriques ou endommager l'appareil (appareils de classe I uniquement). Pour éteindre complètement cet appareil, débranchez-le de la prise murale. Assurez-vous que la prise murale et la fiche d'alimentation sont facilement accessibles. Ne laissez pas les enfants se suspendre à l'appareil. Rangez les accessoires (pile, etc.) dans un endroit hors de portée des enfants. N'installez pas l'appareil dans un endroit instable, comme sur une étagère bancale, sur une surface inclinée ou dans un endroit exposé à des vibrations. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber le produit ni à lui donner des coups. Si le produit est endommagé, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation et contactez un centre de service. Pour nettoyer l'appareil, retirez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale et nettoyez le produit à l'aide d'un chiffon doux et sec. N'utilisez aucune substance chimique, telle que la cire, le benzène, l'alcool, des solvants, des insecticides, des désodorisants, des lubrifiants ou des détergents. Ces substances chimiques peuvent altérer l'aspect du téléviseur ou effacer les imprimés se trouvant sur celui-ci. N'exposez pas l'appareil aux gouttes ni aux éclaboussures. Ne jetez pas les piles au feu. Les piles ne doivent pas être court-circuitées, démontées ni subir de surchauffe. Un risque d'explosion existe si vous remplacez les piles de la télécommande par des piles d'un autre type. Ne les remplacez que par des piles du même type. ATTENTION : POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE D'INCENDIE, TENEZ TOUJOURS CE PRODUIT A DISTANCE DES BOUGIES OU AUTRES FLAMMES OUVERTES. * Les schémas et illustrations contenus dans ce manuel de l'utilisateur sont fournis uniquement à titre de référence. L'aspect réel du produit peut être différent. La conception et les spécifications du produit sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. Les langues de la CEI (russe, ukrainien, kazakh) ne sont pas disponibles pour ce produit, car il est fabriqué pour des clients de l'UE. Français - 2 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 2 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:51 Contenu de la boîte Télécommande et piles (AAA x 2) Guide réglementaire Guide d'utilisation Cordon d'alimentation Carte de garantie (non disponible dans tous les pays) Adaptateur de carte CI Guide de câblage - Vérifiez que les éléments suivants sont inclus avec votre téléviseur. S'il manque des éléments, contactez votre revendeur local. - Les couleurs et les formes des éléments varient en fonction du modèle. - Il est possible d'acheter séparément les câbles non fournis avec ce produit. - Ouvrez la boîte et vérifiez qu'aucun accessoire n'est caché derrière ou dans l'emballage. Des frais d'administration peuvent vous être facturés dans les situations suivantes : (a) Un technicien intervient à votre demande alors que le produit ne comporte aucun défaut (c.-à-d. vous n'avez pas lu le manuel d'utilisation). (b) Vous amenez le produit dans un centre de réparation alors que le produit ne comporte aucun défaut (c.-à-d. vous n'avez pas lu le manuel d'utilisation). Le montant des frais d'administration vous sera communiqué avant la visite du technicien. Avertissement : les écrans peuvent être endommagés par une pression directe lorsqu'ils sont incorrectement manipulés. Il est recommandé de soulever le téléviseur par les bords, comme indiqué. Ne touchez pas cet écran ! Utilisation du contrôleur du téléviseur Vous pouvez utiliser le contrôleur du téléviseur qui se trouve à l'arrière de l'appareil plutôt que la télécommande pour contrôler la majorité des fonctions de votre téléviseur. Stick de commande Le stick de commande est situé à l'arrière du téléviseur, dans le coin inférieur gauche. Menu de commande : permet d'ouvrir Smart Hub. : permet de sélectionner une source. : permet d'ouvrir le menu. : permet d'éteindre le téléviseur. Capteur de la télécommande Français Français - 3 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 3 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:52 Connexion de la caméra TV - La caméra TV est vendue séparément. - Veillez à ne connecter que la caméra TV au port TV CAMERA. Connexion à un port COMMON INTERFACE (logement pour votre carte permettant de regarder la télévision) - Mettez le téléviseur hors tension ou déconnectez la carte CI ou l'adaptateur de carte CI. - Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la CARTE CI ou CI+, consultez le chapitre « Système et assistance > Connexion à un logement de carte de visionnage TV » du manuel électronique. Connexion de l'adaptateur de carte CI Un adaptateur de carte CI, permettant au téléviseur d'utiliser deux cartes CI différentes, est disponible selon le modèle. Il est conseillé de connecter l'adaptateur de carte CI et d'insérer la carte CI (carte permettant de regarder la télévision) avant d'installer le téléviseur sur le mur parce qu'il peut être difficile et dangereux de procéder une fois celui-ci fixé au mur. Utilisation de la carte d'interface commune CI ou CI+ Pour pouvoir regarder des chaînes payantes, vous devez avoir inséré la carte d'interface commune "CI ou CI+". Français - 4 [UJ5500-XN-ZF]BN68-07047N-00L04.indb 4 2015-03-31 오전 10:07:52 La télécommande E-MANUAL : permet d'ouvrir le manuel électronique. EXTRA : permet d'afficher des informations sur le programme en cours. AD/SUBT. : permet d'afficher Raccourcis d'accessibilité. P.MODE / PICTURE : permet de modifier le mode d'image. P.SIZE / PIC SIZE : permet de régler le format de l'image. SEARCH : permet de démarrer la fonction Rech.. Permet d'afficher et de sélectionner les sources vidéo disponibles. Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le Mode Sport. Permet d'activer et de désactiver le son. Permet de lancer les applications Smart Hub. Consultez le chapitre du e-Manual intitulé Fonctions Smart > Smart Hub. Permet de changer de chaîne. Permet d'afficher le Guide électronique des progra16-4ppm-Imprimante-l..> 23-Jan-2016 10:05 2.8M